2006 Mercedes-Benz C-Class Amg

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG
Operator’s Manual
C-Class AMG
Operator’s Manual C-Class AMG

Ê4CtFg;Ë
2035843871
Order No. 6515 0187 13 Part No. 203 584 38 71 USA Edition D 2006
C 55 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you 앫 Please read this manual carefully, then
on the purchase of your new return it to your vehicle where it will be
Mercedes-Benz. handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon- 앫 Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are de-
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your signed to acquaint you with the opera-
desire to own an automobile that will be as tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
앫 Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- They are designed to help improve the
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure, cupants.
and also the safety of you and your passen- We extend our best wishes for many miles
gers, we ask you to make a small invest- of safe, pleasurable driving.
ment of time:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 21 Getting started ................................... 31

Product information................................ 9 Cockpit................................................. 22 Unlocking ............................................. 32
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10 Instrument cluster ................................ 24 Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... 32
Service and warranty information .. 10 Multifunction steering wheel ................ 26 Starter switch positions.................. 33
Important notice for California Center console ..................................... 27 Adjusting .............................................. 35
retail buyers and lessees of Upper part ...................................... 27 Seats .............................................. 35
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11 Lower part ...................................... 28 Steering wheel................................ 38
Maintenance .................................. 12 Overhead control panel ........................ 29 Mirrors............................................ 40
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12 Door control panel................................ 30 Driving.................................................. 42
Change of address or ownership.... 12 Fastening the seat belt ................... 42
Operating your vehicle outside the Starting the engine ......................... 45
USA or Canada............................... 13 Parking brake ................................. 46
Where to find it.................................... 14 Driving ............................................ 47
Symbols............................................... 15 Switching on headlamps................. 48
Operating safety .................................. 16 Turn signals .................................... 49
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16 Windshield wipers........................... 50
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17 Problems while driving.................... 52
Reporting safety defects...................... 18 Parking and locking.............................. 54
Reporting Safety Defects ............... 18 Parking brake ................................. 54
Vehicle data recording......................... 19 Switching off headlamps................. 55
Information regarding electronic Turning off engine........................... 56
recording devices........................... 19 Releasing seat belts........................ 56
Locking ........................................... 56
Contents
Lighting ............................................. 114

Safety and Security ........................... 59 Controls in detail ............................... 93 Exterior lamp switch .................... 114
Occupant safety................................... 60 Locking and unlocking ......................... 94 Combination switch ..................... 118
Air bags .......................................... 61 SmartKey ....................................... 94 Hazard warning flasher ................ 119
Seat belts ....................................... 67 Opening the doors from Interior lighting ............................ 120
Active head restraint ...................... 71 the inside ....................................... 99 Door entry lamps ......................... 121
Children in the vehicle.................... 72 Opening the trunk .......................... 99 Trunk lamp................................... 121
Blocking of rear door window Closing the trunk.......................... 101 Instrument cluster ............................. 122
operation........................................ 80 Trunk emergency release ............. 102 Instrument cluster illumination .... 122
Panic alarm* ........................................ 81 Valet locking ................................ 103 Coolant temperature gauge ......... 123
Activating ....................................... 81 Automatic central locking ............ 103 Trip odometer .............................. 123
Deactivating ................................... 81 Locking and unlocking from Tachometer.................................. 124
Driving safety systems......................... 82 the inside ..................................... 104 Outside temperature indicator ..... 124
ABS ................................................ 82 Seats ................................................. 106 Control system .................................. 125
BAS ................................................ 84 Front seat active head restraints . 106 Multifunction display.................... 125
ESP® ............................................... 84 Rear seat head restraints ............. 106 Multifunction steering wheel........ 126
Anti-theft systems................................ 88 Lumbar support*.......................... 109 Menus .......................................... 128
Immobilizer..................................... 88 Seat heating................................. 110 Standard display menu ................ 130
Anti-theft alarm system* ................ 88 Memory function ............................... 111 AUDIO menu ................................ 131
Tow-away alarm* ........................... 90 Storing positions into memory ..... 112 NAV* menu.................................. 134
Recalling positions from memory . 112 Vehicle status message memory
Storing exterior rear view mirror menu............................................ 134
parking position ........................... 113 Settings menu.............................. 135
Trip computer menu..................... 150
TEL menu* ................................... 152
Contents
Automatic transmission..................... 155 Adjusting air volume ..................... 179 Audio system...................................... 197
Gear selector lever position ......... 157 Front defroster.............................. 179 Audio and telephone, operation.... 197
Driving tips................................... 158 Air recirculation mode .................. 180 Operating safety ........................... 197
Gear ranges ................................. 160 Air conditioning............................. 182 Operating and display elements ... 198
Automatic shift program .............. 161 Rear passenger compartment Button and soft key operation ...... 200
Gear selector lever one-touch adjustable air vents....................... 183 Operation...................................... 200
gearshifting .................................. 162 Automatic climate control* Radio operation ............................ 205
Steering wheel gearshift control (Canada only) ..................................... 184 Introduction to satellite radio*
one-touch gearshifting ................. 163 Deactivating the automatic (USA only)..................................... 209
Manual shift program................... 165 climate control system ................. 187 CD mode....................................... 214
Emergency operation Operating the automatic climate GSM network phones ................... 223
(Limp-Home Mode) ...................... 168 control system in automatic mode 187 TDMA or CDMA network phones .. 229
Good visibility .................................... 169 Setting the temperature................ 188 Emergency calls “911” ................. 235
Headlamp cleaning system* ........ 169 Adjusting air distribution............... 189 Power windows .................................. 238
Rear view mirrors......................... 169 Adjusting air volume ..................... 190 Opening and closing the windows 238
Sun visors .................................... 171 Front defroster.............................. 190 Synchronizing power windows...... 240
Rear window sunshade* .............. 172 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL ........ 191 Summer opening feature .............. 241
Rear window defroster ................. 173 Air recirculation mode .................. 191 Convenience closing feature......... 241
Climate control .................................. 174 Charcoal filter ............................... 193 Power tilt/sliding sunroof .................. 242
Deactivating the climate control Air conditioning............................. 194 Opening and closing the power
system ......................................... 177 Residual heat and ventilation........ 195 tilt/sliding sunroof........................ 242
Operating the climate control Rear passenger compartment Synchronizing the power
system in automatic mode........... 177 adjustable air vents....................... 196 tilt/sliding sunroof........................ 244
Setting the temperature............... 178 Driving systems.................................. 245
Adjusting air distribution and Cruise control ............................... 245
volume ......................................... 178
Contents
Loading .............................................. 248 At the gas station .............................. 293

Roof rack*.................................... 248 Operation ......................................... 281 Refueling...................................... 293
Ski sack (Canada only) ................. 249 The first 1000 miles (1500 km)......... 282 Check regularly and before a
Split rear bench seat .................... 252 Driving instructions............................ 283 long trip ....................................... 294
Loading instructions..................... 254 Drive sensibly – save fuel............. 283 Engine compartment ......................... 297
Cargo tie-down rings* .................. 255 Drinking and driving ..................... 283 Hood ............................................ 297
Useful features .................................. 256 Pedals .......................................... 283 Engine oil ..................................... 298
Storage compartments................. 256 Power assistance ......................... 283 Transmission fluid level................ 301
Cup holders.................................. 258 Brakes.......................................... 284 Coolant level ................................ 301
Ashtrays ....................................... 260 Driving off .................................... 285 Battery ......................................... 303
Cigarette lighter ........................... 262 Parking......................................... 285 Windshield washer system and
Power outlet................................. 263 Tires ............................................. 286 headlamp cleaning system*......... 304
Telephone*................................... 263 Hydroplaning................................ 287 Tires and wheels................................ 305
Tele Aid* ...................................... 264 Tire traction.................................. 287 Important guidelines .................... 305
Garage door opener ..................... 273 Tire speed rating .......................... 288 Tire care and maintenance........... 306
Winter driving instructions ........... 288 Direction of rotation..................... 308
Standing water............................. 289 Loading the vehicle ...................... 308
Passenger compartment .............. 290 Recommended tire inflation
Driving abroad.............................. 290 pressure....................................... 315
Control and operation of radio Checking tire inflation pressure ... 317
transmitters ................................. 290 Tire labeling ................................. 321
Catalytic converter....................... 291 Load identification ....................... 325
Emission control .......................... 291 DOT, Tire Identification Number
Coolant temperature.................... 292 (TIN) ............................................. 326
Maximum tire load ....................... 327
Maximum tire inflation pressure .. 328
Contents
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Replacing bulbs .................................. 394

Standards (U.S. vehicles) ............. 329 Practical hints .................................. 349 Bulbs............................................. 395
Tire ply material ........................... 331 What to do if … ................................... 350 Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 397
Tire and loading terminology........ 331 Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 350 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 400
Rotating tires ............................... 335 Lamp in center console................. 357 Replacing wiper blades ...................... 402
Winter driving .................................... 336 Vehicle status messages in the Removing and installing wiper
Winter tires .................................. 336 multifunction display..................... 358 blades ........................................... 402
Block heater (Canada only) .......... 337 Where will I find ...? ............................ 380 Flat tire............................................... 404
Snow chains................................. 337 First aid kit.................................... 380 Preparing the vehicle .................... 404
Maintenance...................................... 338 Vehicle tool kit.............................. 380 Mounting the spare wheel ............ 404
Maintenance service indicator Spare wheel .................................. 383 Battery ............................................... 411
message....................................... 338 Spare wheel bolts ......................... 385 Disconnecting the battery ............ 412
Calling up the maintenance Unlocking/locking in an emergency... 386 Removing the battery ................... 412
service indicator display............... 339 Unlocking the vehicle.................... 386 Charging and reinstalling the
Resetting the maintenance Locking the vehicle ....................... 387 battery .......................................... 413
service indicator........................... 340 Manually unlocking the Reconnecting the battery ............. 413
Vehicle care....................................... 341 transmission gear selector lever ... 388 Jump starting...................................... 415
Cleaning and care of the vehicle .. 341 Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 389 Towing the vehicle.............................. 417
Power tilt/sliding sunroof ............. 389 Installing towing eye bolt .............. 419
Resetting activated head restraints.... 391 Fuses.................................................. 420
Resetting activated head Aids for replacing fuses ................ 420
restraints ...................................... 391 Main fuse box in passenger
Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 392 compartment ................................ 421
SmartKey ...................................... 393 Fuse box in engine compartment . 421
Fuse box in trunk .......................... 422
Contents
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ......... 436

Technical data.................................. 423 Capacities .................................... 436 Technical terms............................... 443
Parts service ...................................... 424 Engine oils.................................... 437
Warranty coverage............................. 425 Engine oil additives ...................... 437
Loss of Service and Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 437 Index................................................. 449
Information Booklet...................... 425 Brake fluid.................................... 437
Identification labels............................ 426 Premium unleaded gasoline ......... 438
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 427 Gasoline additives ........................ 438
Engine................................................ 428 Fuel requirements ........................ 439
Rims and Tires ................................... 429 Coolants....................................... 439
Same size tires ............................. 431 Windshield washer and headlamp
Mixed size tires ............................ 432 cleaning system* ......................... 442
Spare wheel (collapsible tire) ....... 433
Electrical system................................ 434
Main dimensions and weights............ 435
Main dimensions .......................... 435
Weights ........................................ 435
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
best interest: other products and therefore cannot be conversion parts and accessories
held responsible for them, even if in indi- approved by us are available at your
We recommend using Genuine
vidual cases an official approval or authori- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
zation by governmental or other agencies you will receive comprehensive informa-
parts and accessories explicitly approved
should exist. Use of such parts and acces- tion, also on permissible technical modifi-
by us for your vehicle model.
sories could adversely affect the safety, cations, and where proper installation will
We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. be performed.
their reliability, safety and special Please do not use them.
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information
mation, illustrations and descriptions in about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
this Operator’s Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle. 앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in 앫 Emission System Warranty
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are 앫 Emission Performance Warranty
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System
the actual equipment of your vehicle. Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operator’s Vermont only)
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz 앫 State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Center will be glad to inform you of correct (Lemon Laws)
the operation of any equipment, your care and operating procedures.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance
glad to demonstrate the proper proce- Booklet are important documents and
dures. should be kept with the vehicle.
10
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub-
automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calendar days.
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have
Written notification should be sent to us,
of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au- LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
Customer Assistance Center,
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
(2) the same substantial defect or mal- One Mercedes Drive, Montvale,
one or more substantial defects or mal-
function of a less serious nature than NJ 07645-0350.
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
its repair, or
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approximately 29000 km)
on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever
occurs first, a reasonable number of repair
attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following
occurs:
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance If you change your address, be sure to
necessary maintenance work which should Program provides factory-trained technical send in the “Change of Address Notice”
be performed at regular intervals. help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to found in the Service and Warranty
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number Information Booklet, or simply call the
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
you when you take the vehicle to your au- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
Center (in the USA) at
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for ser- 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
vice. The service advisor will record each
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It
service in the booklet for you.
Customer Assistance Representatives is in your own interest that we can contact
24 hours a day, 365 days a year. you should the need arise.
For additional information refer to the If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
Program Brochure in your vehicle literature able to the next operator.
portfolio.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-
or Canada able for delivery in Europe under our
European Delivery Program. For details,
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for- consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
eign countries, please be aware that Center or write to:
앫 service facilities or replacement parts In the USA:
may not be readily available,
앫 unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat- European Delivery Department
alytic converters may not be available; One Mercedes Drive
the use of leaded fuels will damage the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
catalysts,
In Canada:
앫 gasoline may have a considerably low-
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
er octane rating, and improper fuel can
European Delivery Department
cause engine damage.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
13
Introduction
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-

vide comprehensive support information Controls in detail Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi-
has its own reference color. about the equipment installed in your vehicle can be found in this section.
cle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes techni-
At a glance cal innovations. If you are already familiar Indexes
Here you will find an overview of all the with the basic functions of your vehicle, The glossary provides explanations of the
controls that can be operated from the this section will be of particular interest to most important technical terms.
driver’s seat. you.
The table of contents and the index are de-
signed to help you find information quickly
Getting started Operation and easily.
Here you will find all the information you Here you will find all the information you The following publications are part of your
need for your first drive. You should read need for the proper operation of your vehi- vehicle documentation:
this section first if this is your first cle. 앫 this Operator’s Manual
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent-
앫 the Maintenance Booklet
ing or borrowing this vehicle.
Practical hints Separate operating instructions will be
This section provides fast assistance for provided as required depending on the
Safety and Security dealing with problems you may encounter. equipment options installed in your
Here you will find descriptions of the safety vehicle.
and security features of your vehicle.
14
Introduction
Symbols
왔 Symbols
Trademarks: 왘 This symbol points to instructions for
앫 ESP® is a registered trademark of
Warning! G you to follow.
DaimlerChrysler. 왘 A number of these symbols appearing
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
in succession indicates a multiple-step
앫 ®
HomeLink is a registered trademark ards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others. procedure.
of Prince, a Johnson Controls
Company. 컄 Page This symbol tells you where to
앫
TM
BabySmart is a trademark of ! look for further information on a
Siemens Automotive Corp. topic.
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle. 컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
앫 SIRIUS and related marks are trade-
an interrupted procedure which
marks of Sirius Satellite Radio Inc.
will be continued on the next
The following symbols are found in this i
page.
Operator’s Manual: Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful. -> In the glossary of technical
* Optional equipment is identified terms, this symbol is used to
with an asterisk. Since standard indicate cross-references to
equipment varies between models, term definitions.
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from Display Words appearing in the multi-
the actual equipment of your vehi- function display and audio dis-
cle. play are printed in the type
shown here.
15
Introduction
Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle

Warning! G Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
앫 the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicle’s electronic components are may cause serious damage and impair the
interconnected, any modifications made operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a 앫 the “Technical data” section in this
may produce an undesired effect on other sudden significant vibration or ride distur- manual
systems. Electronic malfunctions could bance, or you suspect that damage to your 앫 traffic rules and regulations
seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
vehicle. your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow 앫 motor vehicle laws and safety
down, and drive with caution to an area standards
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic which is a safe distance from the road.
components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and Warning! G
Other improper work or modifications on the tires/wheels for possible damage. If the
vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center vehicle. These warning labels are intended
the operating safety of the vehicle.
or other qualified maintenance or repair to make you and others aware of various
Some safety systems only function while the facility for further inspection or repairs. risks. You should not remove any of these
engine is running. You should therefore warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
never turn off the engine while driving. do so by information on the label itself.
Removal of any of these labels may cause
you and others to be unaware of certain
risks which may result in an accident and/or
personal injury.
16
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9
17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:

The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting Safety Defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
18
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
왔 Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)

Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫 for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫 with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫 in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫 for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫 as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
19
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
21
At a glance
Cockpit
22
At a glance
Cockpit
Item Page Item Page Item Page

1 Steering wheel gearshift 163 7 Glove box lid release 256 g Parking brake release 46
control 8 Glove box lock 256 h Combination switch
2 Cruise control lever 245 9 Center console 27 앫 Turn signals 49
3 Multifunction steering 26, a Starter switch 33 앫 Windshield wipers 50
wheel 126
b Hood lock release 297 앫 High beam 49
4 Horn
c Steering wheel adjustment 38 j Exterior lamp switch 48,
5 Instrument cluster 24, lever 114
122
d Remote trunk opening 100 k Exterior rear view mirror 40,
6 Overhead control panel 29 switch adjustment 113
e Parking brake pedal 46, 54 l Headlamp washer button* 169
f Door control panel 30
23
At a glance
Instrument cluster
24
At a glance
Instrument cluster

1 Speedometer with: 앫 Program mode 161 < Seat belt telltale 67,
v Electronic Stability 84, 앫 Status indicator (outside 124, 355
Program (ESP®) 354 temperature/digital 139 A High beam headlamp 49,
warning lamp speedometer indicator lamp 118
; Brake warning lamp, 46, 54, 앫 Digital clock 125 6 Fuel gauge with:
USA only 351 4 K Right turn signal 49 Fuel reserve warning lamp 354
3 Brake warning lamp, 46, 54, indicator lamp 4 The arrow indicates
Canada only 351 5 Tachometer with: 124 that the fuel filler cap
B Low beam headlamp 48, - Antilock Brake 82, is on the rear
indicator lamp 114 System (ABS) 350 right-hand side.
2 L Left turn signal 49 indicator lamp 7 Coolant temperature gauge 123
indicator lamp ú Engine malfunction 352, 8 Button for: 122
3 Multifunction display 125 indicator lamp, 353 앫 Resetting trip odometer 123
with: USA only
앫 Resetting all settings 135
앫 Trip odometer 123 ± Engine malfunction 352,
앫 Instrument cluster 122
앫 Main odometer 125 indicator lamp, 353
Canada only illumination
앫 Gear selector lever 45,
position 125, 1 Supplemental 60,
157 Restraint System 356
(SRS) indicator lamp
25
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Item Page Item Page

1 Multifunction display 125 4 Menu systems:
Operating control system 126 Press button
2 Telephone*: è for next menu

Press button ÿ for previous menu
s to take a call 5 Moving within a menu:
to dial a call Press button
t to end a call j for next display
to reject an incoming k for previous display
call
3 Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume:
Press button
æ up/to increase
ç down/to decrease
26
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part Item Page Item Page
1 Seat heating, driver’s side 110 8 Seat heating, passenger 110
2 Rear window sunshade 172 side
switch* 9 Front passenger front 75,
3 ESP® control switch 84 air bag off indicator lamp 357
4 Hazard warning flasher 119 a Audio system, 197

switch – switching on/off or
5 Central locking switch 104 COMAND* (see separate
Central unlocking switch 104 operating instructions)
6 Switch for folding back rear 108 b Climate control 174

seat head restraints Automatic climate control* 184
7 Tow-away alarm switch* 90 (Canada only)
(if equipped) Rear window defroster 173
Anti-theft alarm system 89
indicator lamp*
27
At a glance
Center console
Lower part Item Page

1 Ashtray 260
Cigarette lighter 262
2 Gear selector lever for 45,
automatic transmission 157
3 Cup holder 258
4 Armrest 257
5 Program mode selector 161
switch for automatic
transmission
28
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item Page
1 Rear interior lighting on/off 121
2 Power tilt/sliding sunroof 242
3 Right reading lamp on/off 121
4 Interior lighting control 120
5 Interior rear view mirror 40,
169
6 Hands-free microphone for 152,
Tele Aid* (emergency call 223,
system) and telephone* 264
7 Garage door opener 273
8 Left reading lamp on/off 121
9 Tele Aid* (emergency call 264
system) button
29
At a glance
Door control panel
Item Page
1 Inside door handle 99
2 Memory function (for 111
storing seat, exterior mirror
and steering wheel settings)
3 Switches for seat 35,
adjustment 106
4 Switches for 238
opening/closing front door
windows
5 Rear door window override 80
switch
6 Switches for 238
opening/closing rear door
windows
7 Remote trunk lid switch 100
30
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
31
Getting started
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey 왘 Press unlock button Œ on the
overview of the vehicle’s most basic func- SmartKey.
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
should pay special attention to the infor-
locking knobs in the doors move up.
mation given here.
The anti-theft alarm system* is dis-
If you are already familiar with the basic armed.
functions described here, the “Controls in
왘 Get in the vehicle and insert the
detail” section (컄 page 94) will provide you
SmartKey in the starter switch.
with further information. The correspond-
ing page references are located at the end For more information, see “Locking and
of each segment. unlocking” (컄 page 94).
SmartKey with remote control
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Opening button for trunk
3 Œ Unlock button
4 Â Panic button* (컄 page 81)
i
Canada only:
Only vehicles equipped with an
anti-theft alarm system* have
SmartKeys with integrated panic
button 4.
32
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions SmartKey 2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position.
All lamps (except low beam headlamp
Warning! G indicator lamp, high beam headlamp in-
dicator lamp, and turn signal indicator
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the lamps unless activated) in the instru-
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave instrument cluster fails to come on
children unattended in the vehicle, or with when the ignition is switched on, have
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper- it checked and replaced if necessary. If
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause a lamp in the instrument cluster re-
an accident and/or serious personal injury. Starter switch mains on after starting the engine or
0 For removing SmartKey comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
The steering is locked when the in instrument cluster” (컄 page 350).
SmartKey is removed from the starter 3 Starting position
switch.
1 Power supply for some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment
33
Getting started
Unlocking
i !
When you switch on ignition, the If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
indicator and warning lamps (except starter switch, the battery may not be
low beam headlamp indicator lamp, sufficiently charged.
high beam headlamp indicator lamp, 앫 Check the battery and charge it if
and turn signal indicator lamps unless necessary (컄 page 411).
activated) in the instrument cluster
come on. The indicator and warning 앫 Get a jump start (컄 page 415).
lamps (except low beam headlamp in- To prevent accelerated vehicle battery
dicator lamp, high beam headlamp indi- discharge or a completely discharged
cator lamp, and turn signal indicator battery, always remove the SmartKey
lamps if activated) will go out when the from the starter switch when the en-
engine is running. This indicates that gine is not in operation.
the respective systems are operational.
i
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
34
Getting started
Adjusting
왔 Adjusting
Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G

All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas- Adjusting the seat while driving could cause SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
tening of seat belts, must be done before the driver to lose control of the vehicle. with you, and lock the vehicle.
the vehicle is put into motion. Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Even with the SmartKey removed from the
back in an excessively reclined position as starter switch, the power seats* can be
Seats this can be dangerous. You could slide un- operated when the respective door is open.
der the seat belt in a collision. If you slide Therefore, do not leave children unattended
The seats can be adjusted electrically. under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
For more information, see “Seats” domen or neck. That could cause serious or vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
(컄 page 106). fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts ment may cause an accident and/or serious
provide the best restraint when the wearer personal injury.
is in a nearly upright position and belts are
properly positioned on the body. Your seat
must be adjusted so that you can correctly
fasten your seat belt (컄 page 42).
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being
adjusted.
35
Getting started
Adjusting
! 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33).

Warning! G When moving the seats, make sure or
there are no items in the footwell or
According to accident statistics, children 왘 Open the respective door.
behind the seat. Otherwise you could
are safer when properly restrained in the
damage the seats. i
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend The memory function (컄 page 111) lets
that children be placed in the rear seats Power seat adjustment you store the settings for the power
whenever possible. Regardless of seating The seat adjustment switches are located seat, the steering wheel adjustment
position, children 12 years old and under on the respective front door. and the exterior rear view mirrors.
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant, or toddler restraint, or Seat fore and aft adjustment
booster seat recommended for the size and
왘 Press switch forward or backward in
weight of the child. For additional
direction of arrow 4.
information, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 72). Adjust seat to a comfortable seating
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is position that still allows you to reach
significantly increased if the child restraints the accelerator/brake pedal safely.
are not properly secured in the vehicle The position should be as far rearward
and/or the child is not properly secured in as possible, consistent with ability to
the child restraint. 1 Head restraint height properly operate controls.
2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat fore and aft adjustment
5 Seat backrest tilt
36
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat cushion tilt Head restraint tilt

왘 Press switch up or down in direction of
Warning! G
arrow 3 until your upper legs are For your protection, drive only with properly
lightly supported. positioned head restraints.
Seat backrest tilt Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
straint supports the back of the head at eye
왘 Press switch forward or backward in level. This will reduce the potential for injury
direction of arrow 5 until your arms to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
are slightly angled when holding the cident or similar situation.
steering wheel.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are
Manually adjust the angle of the head
Seat height restraint.
intended to help reduce injuries during an
왘 Press switch up or down in direction of accident. 왘 Push or pull on the lower edge of the
arrow 2. head restraint cushion.
Head restraint height For more information, see “Seats”

(컄 page 106).
왘 Press switch up or down in direction of
arrow 1.
i
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that it is as close to the head as
possible.
37
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel Steering wheel adjustment, electrical i

The lever for the electrical steering wheel The memory function (컄 page 111) lets
you store the settings for the power
Warning! G adjustment is located on the lower left of
the steering column. seat, the steering wheel adjustment
and the exterior rear view mirrors.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while
driving, or driving without the steering wheel Adjusting steering column in or out
adjustment feature locked could cause the 왘 Move the lever in direction of
driver to lose control of the vehicle. arrows 1 until a comfortable steering
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the wheel position is reached with your
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it arms slightly bent at the elbow.
with you, and lock the vehicle.
Adjusting steering column up or down
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch, the electrical steering wheel 1 Adjusting steering column, in or out 왘 Move the lever in direction of
adjustment feature* can be operated when 2 Adjusting steering column, up or down arrows 2.
the driver’s door is open. Therefore, do not Make sure your legs can move freely
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33).
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or and that all the displays (including mal-
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu- or function and indicator lamps) on the in-
pervised use of vehicle equipment may 왘 Open the driver’s door. strument cluster are clearly visible.
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
38
Getting started
Adjusting
Easy-entry/exit feature With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,

Children could open the driver’s door and
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you:
This feature allows for easier entry into and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
exit from the vehicle. When entering and feature, which could result in an accident 앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter
exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in and/or serious personal injury. switch,
its uppermost position.
or
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activat- With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
앫 open the driver’s door with the
ed or deactivated in the Convenience sub- the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you: SmartKey in starter switch position 0
menu of the control system (컄 page 148). or 1.
앫 close the driver’s door with the ignition
Warning! G switched on, i
or If the current position for the steering
You must make sure no one can become wheel is in the uppermost tilt position,
앫 insert the SmartKey into the starter
trapped or injured by the moving steering the steering wheel will no longer be
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is switch with the driver’s door closed. able to move upward when the
activated. easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
i
To cancel steering wheel movement, do one The last set steering wheel position is The adjustment procedure is briefly in-
of the following: stored when terrupted when the engine is started.
앫 Move steering column stalk 앫 the ignition is switched off
(컄 page 38).
앫 the position is stored in memory
앫 Press memory position switch
(컄 page 112). (컄 page 112)
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
39
Getting started
Adjusting
Mirrors Interior rear view mirror

Warning! G 왘 Manually adjust the interior rear view
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
Let the system complete the adjustment mirror.
mirrors before driving so that you have a
procedure before setting the vehicle in mo- good view of the road and traffic condi- For more information, see “Rear view mir-
tion. All steering wheel adjustments must be tions. rors” (컄 page 169).
completed before setting the vehicle in mo-
G
tion. Driving off with the steering wheel still Exterior rear view mirrors
adjusting could cause the driver to lose con-
Warning!
trol of the vehicle.
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may Warning! G
escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass
breaks. Exercise care when using the passen-
ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
low the liquid to come into contact with
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
In case it does, immediately flush affected
terior rear view mirror or glance over your
area with water, and seek medical help if
shoulder before changing lanes.
necessary.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their
liquid state and by applying plenty of
water.
40
Getting started
Adjusting
The buttons are located above the exterior ! i

lamp switch. If an exterior rear view mirror was The memory function (컄 page 111) lets
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the you store the settings for the exterior
rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit rear view mirrors together with the set-
from the front), reposition it by tings for the steering wheel and the
applying firm pressure until it snaps driver’s seat position.
into place. The mirror housing is now
properly positioned and you can adjust For more information, see “Rear view mir-
the mirror in the usual manner. rors” (컄 page 169).
i
1 Adjustment button At low ambient temperatures, the
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view exterior rear view mirrors will be
mirror button heated automatically.
3 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
왘 Press button 3 for the driver’s side
exterior rear view mirror or button 2
for passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror.
왘 Push adjustment button 1 up, down,
left, or right according to the desired
setting.
41
Getting started
Driving
Warning! G Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-

sition your seat belt greatly increases your
Warning! G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob- risk of injuries and their likely severity in an According to accident statistics, children
structing the pedals’ range of movement. accident. You and your passengers should are safer when properly restrained in the
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta- always wear seat belts. rear seating positions than in the front seat-
cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in If you are ever in an accident, your injuries ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
the footwell, make sure that the pedals still can be considerably more severe without that children be placed in the rear seats.
have sufficient clearance. your seat belt properly buckled. Without Regardless of seating position, children
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers your seat belt buckled, you are much more 12 years old and under must be seated and
the objects could get caught between the likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be properly secured in an appropriate infant or
pedals. You could then no longer brake or ejected from it. You can be seriously injured toddler restraint, or booster seat recom-
accelerate. or killed. mended for the size and weight of the child.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or For additional information, see “Children in
death is lessened if you are wearing your the vehicle” (컄 page 72).
Fastening the seat belt
seat belt. The air bags can only provide the A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
protection they were designed to afford if significantly increased if the child restraints
Warning! G the occupants are using their seat belts are not properly secured in the vehicle
(컄 page 67). and/or the child is not properly secured in
Always fasten your seat belt before driving the child restraint.
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
42
Getting started
Driving
왘 With a smooth motion, pull the belt

Warning! G Warning! G from the belt outlet.
왘 Place the shoulder portion of the belt
Never let more people ride in the vehicle Read and observe the additional warning no-
than there are seat belts available. Be sure tices printed in the “Safety and Security” across the top of your shoulder and the
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly section (컄 page 64) and (컄 page 67). lap portion across your hips.
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never 왘 Push latch plate 1 into buckle 3 until
use a seat belt for more than one person at it engages.
a time.
왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
Warning! G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-
domen or neck. That could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body. 1 Latch plate
2 Release button
3 Buckle
43
Getting started
Driving
Belt outlet height adjustment Proper use of seat belts 앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
앫 Do not twist the seat belt when fasten-
ing. 앫 Do not fasten a seat belt around a
person and another object at the same
앫 Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
time.
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should 앫 When using a seat belt to secure infant
not touch the neck). Never pass the or toddler restraints or children in
shoulder portion of the belt under your booster seats, always follow the child
arm. For this purpose, you can adjust seat manufacturer’s instructions.
the height of the belt outlet. 앫 Check your seat belt during travel to
1 Release button 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible make sure that it is properly posi-
왘 Press release button 1 and move the on your hips (over hip joint) and not tioned.
seat belt height adjuster upward or across the abdomen.
앫 Make sure that the seat belt is always
downward. 앫 Place the seat backrest in a nearly fitted snugly. Take special care of this
upright position. when wearing loose clothing.
44
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine Automatic transmission

Warning! G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They Warning! G
could tear.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
This could damage the belt. monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un-
consciousness and possible death.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effective- Do not run the engine in confined areas
ness of the belts. (such as garage) which are not properly ven-
tilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes Gearshift pattern for automatic
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may transmission
are entering the vehicle while driving, have
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may P Park position with gear selector lever
the cause determined and corrected imme-
not be able to provide adequate protection. lock
diately. If you must drive under these condi-
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly tions, drive only with at least one window R Reverse gear
stressed in an accident must be replaced. fully open. N Neutral position
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz D Drive position
Center.
For more information, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 155).
45
Getting started
Driving
Starting Starting difficulties Parking brake

왘 Place the gear selector lever in If the engine does not start as described,
position P. carry out the following steps:
Warning! G
왘 Do not depress the accelerator. 왘 Turn the SmartKey in starter switch to
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch position 0 and repeat the starting When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
to position 3 (컄 page 33) and release it procedure (컄 page 45). SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
again immediately. The engine then Remember that extended starting
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
starts automatically. attempts can drain the vehicle battery.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
For information on turning off the engine, 왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 415). could release the parking brake, which
see “Turning off engine” (컄 page 56). could result in an accident and/or serious
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a mal- injury.
function in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
46
Getting started
Driving
Driving i
Once the vehicle is in motion, the auto-
matic central locking system engages
Warning! G and the locking knobs drop down.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift For more information, see “Automatic
in order to obtain braking action. This could central locking” (컄 page 103).
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre- !
vent this type of loss of control. Do not run cold engine at high engine
1 Release handle speeds. Running a cold engine at high
2 Parking brake pedal ! engine speeds may shorten the service
왘 Release parking brake by pulling on If you hear a warning signal and the life of the engine.
handle 1. message Release parking brake ap-
The warning lamp ; (USA only) pears in the multifunction display when
or 3 (Canada only) in the driving off, you have forgotten to re-
instrument cluster goes out. lease the parking brake.
!
Simultaneously depressing the acceler-
ator pedal and applying the brake re-
duces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
47
Getting started
Driving
Automatic transmission Switching on headlamps

Warning! G
!
Wait for the gear selection process to It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le- Low beam headlamps
complete before setting the vehicle in ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high- The exterior lamp switch is located on the
motion. er than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
왘 Depress the brake pedal. erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
왘 Move gear selector lever to position D someone or something. Only shift into gear
to drive forward, or to position R to when the engine is idling normally and when
drive rearward. your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
!
Place the gear selector lever in
position P or R only when the vehicle is
stopped in order to avoid damaging the
Exterior lamp switch
transmission.
1 Off
왘 Release the brake pedal. 2 Low beam headlamps on
왘 Carefully depress the accelerator 왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to
pedal. position B.
The low beam headlamp indicator
lamp B in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄 page 24).
48
Getting started
Driving
High beam Turn signals 왘 Press combination switch in direction

of arrow 1 or 2.
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column. The corresponding turn signal indicator
left of the steering column.
lamp L or K in the instrument
cluster flashes (컄 page 24).
The combination switch resets auto-
matically after major directional
changes.
i
If the combination switch is pressed to
point of resistance the turn signals will
flash three times.
Combination switch
Combination switch
1 High beam
1 Turn signals, right
2 High beam flasher
2 Turn signals, left
왘 Push combination switch in direction of
arrow 1.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
For more information on headlamps, see
“Lighting” (컄 page 114).
49
Getting started
Driving
Windshield wipers ! Intermittent wiping

Do not operate the windshield wipers !
The combination switch is located on the when the windshield is dry. Dust that
left of the steering column. Vehicles with rain sensor*:
accumulates on a windshield might
Do not leave windshield wipers in
scratch the glass and/or damage the
intermittent setting when the vehicle is
wiper blades when wiping occurs on a
taken to an automatic car wash or
dry windshield. If it is necessary to op-
during windshield cleaning. Windshield
erate the windshield wipers in dry
wipers will operate in the presence of
weather conditions, always operate the
water sprayed on the windshield, and
windshield wipers with windshield
windshield wipers may be damaged as
washer fluid (컄 page 51).
a result.
Switching on windshield wipers
!
Combination switch 왘 Turn the combination switch to the
Vehicles with rain sensor*:
1 Single wipe desired position depending on the
If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt
Wiping with windshield washer fluid intensity of the rain.
on the surface of the rain sensor or op-
2 Switching on windshield wipers 0 Windshield wipers off tical effects may cause the windshield
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33). I Intermittent wiping wipers to wipe in an undesired fashion.
This could then damage the windshield
II Normal wiper speed wiper blades or scratch the windows.
III Fast wiper speed You should therefore switch off the
windshield wipers when weather condi-
tions are dry.
50
Getting started
Driving
Vehicles with rain sensor*: i Single wipe

Intermittent wiping interval is dependent Intermittent wiping is interrupted when 왘 Press the combination switch briefly in
on wetness of windshield. the vehicle is at a standstill and a front direction of arrow 1 to the resistance
왘 Turn the combination switch to door is opened. This protects persons point.
position I. getting into or out of the vehicle from
The windshield wipers wipe one time
being sprayed.
Vehicles with rain sensor*: without washer fluid.
After the initial wipe, pauses between Intermittent wiping will be continued
wipes are automatically controlled by when Wiping with windshield washer fluid
the rain sensor. 앫 all doors are closed 왘 Press the combination switch in direc-
and tion of arrow 1 past the resistance
point.
앫 the gear selector lever is in
position D or R The windshield wipers operate with
washer fluid.
or
앫 the wiper setting is changed using
i
the combination switch To prevent smears on the windshield,
wipe with windshield washer fluid every
now and then even when it is raining.
For information on filling up the washer

reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄 page 304).
51
Getting started
Driving
! Problems while driving The coolant temperature is

If anything blocks the windshield above 248°F (120°C)
wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch The engine runs erratically and misfires The coolant is too hot and is no longer
them off immediately. cooling the engine.
앫 An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫 For safety reasons, stop the vehicle 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
앫 The engine electronics may not be op-
in a safe location and remove soon as possible and turn off the en-
SmartKey from starter switch erating properly.
gine. Allow engine and coolant to cool.
before attempting to remove any 앫 Unburned gasoline may have entered
왘 Check the coolant level and add
blockage. the catalytic converter and damaged it.
coolant if necessary (컄 page 301).
앫 Remove blockage. 왘 Give very little gas.
앫 Turn the windshield wipers on 왘 Have the problem repaired by an au-
again. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
If the windshield wipers fail to function soon as possible.
at all with combination switch in
position I,
앫 set the combination switch to the
next higher wiper speed
앫 have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center
52
Getting started
Driving
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
왘 Do not start the engine under any cir-
cumstances.
왘 Notify local fire and/or police authori-
ties.
If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
termined:
왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If no damage can be determined on the
앫 Major assemblies
앫 Fuel system
앫 Engine mount
왘 Start the engine in the usual manner.
53
Getting started
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive. Parking brake

You have properly stopped and parked Warning! G
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
Warning! G leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
With the engine not running, there is no
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
power assistance for the brake and steering
system. In this case, it is important to keep To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
in mind that a considerably higher degree of sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
effort is necessary to brake and steer the the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
vehicle. 앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal. 1 Release handle
앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal. 2 Parking brake pedal
앫 Move the gear selector lever to 왘 Step firmly on parking brake pedal 2.
position P.
When the engine is running, the brake
앫 Slowly release brake pedal. warning lamp ; (USA only)
앫 When parked on an incline, turn front or 3 (Canada only) in the
wheels towards the road curb. instrument cluster comes on.
앫 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.
앫 Take the SmartKey and lock the vehicle
when leaving.
54
Getting started
Parking and locking
Switching off headlamps

왘 Turn exterior lamp switch
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se- to M (컄 page 48).
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it lector lever not fully engaged in position P is
For more information, see “Lighting”
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
(컄 page 114).
children unattended in the vehicle, or with position P alone may not prevent your vehi-
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children cle from moving, possibly hitting people or
could release the parking brake and/or objects.
move the gear selector lever from Always set the parking brake in addition to
position P, either of which could result in an shifting to position P.
accident and/or serious injury.
When parked on an incline, turn front wheel
towards the road curb.
55
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off engine Releasing seat belts Locking
왘 Place the gear selector lever in 왘 Press the seat belt release button
position P. (컄 page 43). Warning! G
i Allow the retractor to completely
To prevent possible personal injury, always
rewind the seat belt by guiding the
Always set the parking brake in addi- keep hands and fingers away from the door
latch plate.
tion to shifting to position P. openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
On slopes, turn the front wheels ! cially careful when small children are
Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so around.
towards the road curb.
that the seat belt and/or latch plate Before closing doors, make sure there is no
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch cannot get caught or pinched in the possibility of someone getting caught in a
to position 0. door or in the seat mechanism. This door during closing.
can damage the seat belt and impair
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter the effectiveness of the seat belt,
switch.
The immobilizer is activated.
and/or cause damage to the door Warning! G
and/or door trim panel. Such damage
i is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
Limited Warranty. SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
The SmartKey can only be removed
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
from the starter switch with the gear
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz children unattended in the vehicle, or with
selector lever in position P.
Center. access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
56
Getting started
Parking and locking
i For more information, see “Locking and

With the SmartKey removed and the unlocking” (컄 page 94).
driver’s door open, a warning sounds if
the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not
switched off.
The message Switch off lights ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
왘 Exit the vehicle and close all doors.

왘 After exiting the vehicle, press the lock
button ‹ on the SmartKey
(컄 page 32).
앫 All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫 An acoustic signal sounds three
times (if equipped and feature acti-
vated).
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄 page 96).
앫 The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫 The anti-theft alarm system* is
armed.
57
58
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm*
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im- The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument The 1 indicator lamp goes out shortly
portant facts about the restraint systems cluster (컄 page 24) comes on: after you start the engine. This shows that
of the vehicle. the restraint systems are operational.
앫 for about 4 seconds when you turn the
The restraint systems are SmartKey in the starter switch to A malfunction in the system has been
position 1. detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫 Seat belts
앫 for about 4 seconds when you start the 앫 fails to extinguish after approximately
앫 Emergency tensioning device
engine by turning the SmartKey. 4 seconds.
앫 Air bags
앫 does not come on at all.
i
앫 Child seats
The 1 indicator lamp remains lit if 앫 comes on after the engine was started
앫 Child seat recognition the SmartKey in the starter switch is or while driving.
앫 Lower anchors and tethers for children turned to position 2 and left there. The For safety reasons, we strongly
(LATCH) indicator lamp will go out when you recommend that you visit an authorized
start the engine. Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
As independent systems, their protective
effects work in conjunction with each have the system checked.
other. For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 356).
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and
children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 72).
60
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Air bags
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp Warning! G To reduce the risk of injury when the front
comes on during driving or does not come air bags inflate, it is very important for the
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a Air bags are designed to reduce the poten- driver and front passenger to always be in a
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal properly seated position and to wear your
recommend that you visit an authorized impacts (front air bags), or side impacts seat belts.
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have (front side impact air bags, rear side impact For maximum protection in the event of a
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may air bags * and head protection window cur- collision always be in normal seated position
not be activated when needed in an acci- tain air bags). However, no system available with your back against the backrest. Fasten
dent, which could result in serious or fatal today can totally eliminate injuries and fatal- your seat belt and make sure that it is prop-
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and ities. erly positioned on your body.
unnecessarily which could also result in
The activation of the air bags temporarily Since the air bag inflates with considerable
injury.
releases a small amount of dust from the speed and force, a proper seating and hands
In addition, improper work on the SRS air bags. This dust, however, is neither inju- on steering wheel position will help to keep
creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera- rious to your health, nor does it indicate a you at a safe distance from the air bag.
tive or causing unintended air bag deploy- fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause Occupants who are unbelted, out of position
ment. Work on the SRS must therefore only some temporary breathing difficulty for peo- or too close to the air bag can be seriously
be performed by qualified technicians. Con- ple with asthma or other breathing trouble. injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the with great force in the blink of an eye:
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
앫 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
have any breathing difficulty but cannot get
position with your back against the seat
out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,
backrest. 컄컄
then get fresh air by opening a window or
door.
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
앫 Adjust the driver seat as far as possible 앫 Adjust the front passenger seat as far as Failure to follow these instructions can
rearward, still permitting proper opera- possible rearward from the dashboard result in severe injuries to you or other
tion of vehicle controls. The distance when the seat is occupied. occupants.
from the center of the driver’s breast- 앫 Occupants, especially children, should
bone to the center of the air bag cover If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
never place their bodies or lean their you make the buyer aware of this safety
on the steering wheel must be at least heads in the area of the door or the rear
10 in (25 cm) or more. You should be information. Be sure to give the buyer this
side trim panel where the front side im-
able to accomplish this by a combina- Operator’s Manual.
pact air bag and/or the rear side impact
tion of adjustments to the seat and air bag* inflates. This could result in se-
steering wheel. If you have any prob- rious injuries or death should the air bag
lems, please see an authorized be triggered. Always sit nearly upright,
Mercedes-Benz Center. properly use the seat belts and appropri-
앫 Do not lean with your head or chest ate size infant or child restraint system.
close to the steering wheel or dash- 앫 Children 12 years old and under must
board. never ride in the front seat, except in a
앫 Keep hands on the outside of steering Mercedes-Benz authorized
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in- BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
side the rim can increase the risk and which operates with the BabySmartTM
potential severity of hand/arm injury system installed in the vehicle to deacti-
when driver front air bag inflates. vate the passenger front air bag when it
is properly installed. Otherwise they will
be struck by the air bag when it inflates
in a crash. If this happens, serious or fa-
tal injury will result.
62
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G To help avoid the possibility of injury, please

follow these guidelines:
Please contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Accident research shows that the safest (1) Occupants, especially children, should Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
place for children in an automobile is in the never place their bodies or lean their (1-800-367-6372) for details.
rear seat. Should you choose to place a child heads in the area of the door where the
12 years old or under in the front passenger front side impact air bag and/or rear i
seat of your vehicle, you must properly use side impact air bag* inflates. This could Air bags are designed to activate only
a BabySmartTM child restraint which will result in serious injuries or death should in certain frontal impacts (front
turn off the passenger front air bag. the front side impact air bag and/or rear air bags) and in side impacts (front side
BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any side impact air bag* be activated. impact air bags, rear side impact
side impact air bag (front side impact (2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use air bags* and head protection window
air bag and/or rear side impact air bag*). the seat belts and use an appropriately curtain air bags) which exceed preset
It should be noted that with respect to both sized infant or child restraint system for thresholds.
front side impact air bags and rear side im- all children 12 years old or under. Only during these types of impacts, if of
pact air bags* there is a possibility for a side (3) Always wear seat belts properly. sufficient severity to meet the deploy-
air bag related injury if occupants, especial- ment tresholds, will they provide their
ly children, are not properly seated or re- If you believe that, even with the use of
supplemental protection.
strained when next to a side air bag which these guidelines, it would be safer for your
needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in rear seat occupants to have both rear door The driver and passengers should
order to do its job. mounted side air bags* deactivated, then always wear their seat belts. Otherwise
deactivation can be accomplished upon it is not possible for air bags to provide
your written request to do so at an autho- their supplemental protection.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional
cost.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In cases of other frontal impacts, Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
앫 No modifications of any kind may be
angled impacts, roll-overs, other side emergency tensioning device and made to any components or wiring of
impacts, rear collisions, or other acci- air bag the SRS. This includes changing or re-
dents, the air bags will not be activat- moving any component or part of the
ed. The driver and passengers will then Warning! G SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges, etc. over the steering
be protected by the fastened seat
belts. wheel hub, passenger front air bag
앫 Damaged seat belts or belts that were
cover, outboard sides of the front seat
We caution you not to rely on the highly stressed in an accident must be
backrests, door trim panels, or door
replaced and their anchoring points
presence of the air bags in order to frame trims, and installation of addition-
must also be checked. Only use belts in-
avoid wearing your seat belt. al electrical/electronic equipment on or
stalled or supplied by an authorized
near SRS components and wiring. Keep
Your vehicle was originally equipped Mercedes-Benz Center.
area between air bags and occupants
with air bags that are designed to acti- 앫 Air bags and emergency tensioning free from objects (e.g. packages, purs-
vate in certain impacts exceeding a devices (ETDs) are designed to function es, umbrellas, etc.).
preset threshold to reduce the poten- on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or
앫 Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
tial and severity of injury. It is important ETD that was activated must be
They could tear.
to your safety and that of your passen- replaced.
gers that you replace deployed air bags 앫 Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
and repair any malfunctioning air bags
to make sure that the vehicle will con- 앫 Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this
tinue to provide supplemental crash may severely weaken them. In a crash
protection for occupants. they may not be able to provide ade-
quate protection.
64
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Front air bags

앫 Do not hang items such as coat hangers 앫 For your protection and the protection
from the coat hooks or handles over the of others, when scrapping the air bag
door. These items may turn into projec- unit or emergency tensioning device,
tiles and cause head and other injuries our safety instructions must be fol-
when curtain air bag is deployed. lowed. These instructions are available
앫 Never place your feet on the instrument from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always Center.
keep both feet on the floor in front of the 앫 Given the considerable deployment
seat. speed, required inflation volume, and
앫 Air bag system components will be hot the textile structure of the air bags,
after an air bag has inflated. Do not there is the possibility of abrasions or
touch. other, potentially more serious injuries 1 Driver’s air bag
resulting from air bag deployment. 2 Passenger front air bag
앫 In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS Driver and front passenger air bags are
inoperative or causing unintended When you sell your vehicle we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent deployed
air bag deployment. Work on the SRS
must therefore only be performed by owner that it is equipped with an SRS by 앫 in the event of a frontal impact
qualified technicians. Contact an autho- alerting them to the applicable section in
앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. the Operator’s Manual.
threshold
앫 independently of the front side impact
air bags and/or rear side impact
air bags*
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The air bags will not deploy in impacts Front side impact air bags, rear side im- The front side impact air bags, rear side
which do not exceed the system’s pact air bags*, window curtain air bags impact air bags* and window curtain
deployment thresholds. You will then be air bags are deployed:
The window curtain air bags 1 fill up the
protected by the fastened seat belts.
area between the A and C pillars (see 앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle
The passenger front air bag will only be arrows).
앫 in impacts exceeding a preset
deployed if:
deployment threshold
앫 the front passenger seat is occupied 앫 independently of the front air bags
앫 the 56 indicator lamp in the
The front passenger side impact air bag
center console is not lit (컄 page 75)
will only deploy if the system senses that
앫 the impact exceeds a preset the front passenger seat is occupied.
deployment threshold
The front side impact air bags, rear side
! impact air bags* and window curtain
air bags are not deployed in impacts which
Do not place objects heavier than
do not exceed the system’s deployment
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger 1 Window curtain air bag
threshold.
seat. This could cause the front or side 2 Front side impact air bags
impact air bag on the front passenger 3 Rear side impact air bags*
side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
the system’s deployment threshold.
66
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Seat belts
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all Always fasten your seat belt before driving Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
50 states, the District of Columbia, the off. Always make sure your passengers are backrest in an excessively reclined position
U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. properly restrained, even those sitting in the as this can be dangerous. You could slide
rear and pregnant women. under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po- under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-
occupants should have their seat belts fas-
sition your seat belt greatly increases your domen or neck. That could cause serious or
tened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
For more information on seat belts, see accident. You and your passengers should seat belt provide the best restraint when the
“Fastening the seat belt” (컄 page 42). always wear seat belts. wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
i If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
For information on infants and children can be considerably more severe without
traveling with you in the vehicle and your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
Warning! G
restraint systems for infants and
children, see “Children in the vehicle” likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
(컄 page 72). ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
or killed.
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
death is lessened if you are properly wearing use a seat belt for more than one person at
your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as a time.
they are designed if the occupants are prop-
erly wearing their seat belts.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G Warning! G 앫 Seat belts can only work when used

properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this sec-
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
tion, as that could result in serious inju-
stressed in an accident must be replaced 앫 Each occupant should wear their seat ries in case of an accident.
and their anchoring points must also be belt at all times, because seat belts help 앫 Never wear the shoulder belt under your
checked. reduce the likelihood of and potential arm, against your neck or off your shoul-
Only use seat belts which have been severity of injuries in accidents, includ- der. In a crash, your body would move
approved by Mercedes-Benz. ing rollovers. The integrated restraint too far forward. That would increase the
system includes SRS (driver air bag, chance of head and neck injuries. The
Do not make any modifications to the seat passenger front air bag, front side im- belt would also apply too much force to
belts. This can lead to unintended activation pact air bags, rear side impact the ribs or abdomen, which could se-
of the ETDs or to failure. air bags*, head protection window cur- verely injure internal organs such as
tain air bags for side windows), ETD your liver or spleen.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
(seat belt emergency tensioning device),
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may 앫 Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
and front seat knee bolsters.
not be able to provide adequate protection. objects in or on your clothing, such as
The system is designed to enhance the eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these
Have all work carried out only by qualified protection offered to properly belted oc- might cause injuries.
technicians. Contact an authorized cupants in certain frontal (front air bags
Mercedes-Benz Center. and ETD) and side (front side impact 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible
air bags, rear side impact air bags*, win- on your hips and not across the abdo-
dow curtain air bags and ETD) impacts men. If the belt is positioned across your
which exceed preset deployment abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
thresholds. in a crash.
68
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Depending on vehicle production date, Enhanced seat belt reminder system

앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one
your vehicle is equipped with either a seat
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat When the engine is started the seat belt
belt around a person and another per- belt reminder system or an enhanced seat
telltale < illuminates for a maximum of
son or other objects. belt reminder system as follows:
6 seconds and a warning chime sounds to
앫 Belts should not be worn twisted. In a remind you and your passengers to fasten
Seat belt reminder system
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width your seat belts.
of the belt to manage impact forces. The When the engine is started the seat belt
twisted belt against your body could If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the
telltale < illuminates for a maximum of
cause injuries. front passenger’s seat belt (with the front
6 seconds and a warning chime sounds to
passenger seat occupied and with all
앫 Pregnant women should also use a remind you and your passengers to fasten
doors closed) are not fastened,
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion your seat belts.
should be positioned as low as possible 앫 and the vehicle speed does not exceed
on the hips to avoid any possible pres- For more information on the seat belt 15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt tell-
sure on the abdomen. telltale <, see “Practical hints” tale < remains illuminated for as
(컄 page 355).
앫 Never place your feet on the instrument long as either the driver’s or front pas-
panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always senger’s seat belt is not fastened.
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫 and the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph For more information on the seat belt i
(25 km/h), the seat belt telltale < telltale <, see “Practical hints” The ETDs for the front seats will only
starts flashing and a warning chime (컄 page 355). activate if the respective front seat belt
sounds with increasing intensity until is fastened (latch plate properly
both the driver’s and front passenger’s Emergency tensioning device (ETD), inserted into buckle).
seat belt are fastened, or for a maxi- seat belt force limiter
mum of 60 seconds from the time the The ETDs for the rear outer seats will
The seat belts for the front and rear outer activate with or without the respective
vehicle speed exceeded 15 mph
seats are equipped with emergency seat belt fastened.
(25 km/h) if either the driver’s or front
tensioning devices and belt force limiters.
passenger’s seat belt remains unfas-
tened. The ETD is designed to activate in the In an impact, emergency tensioning
following cases: devices remove slack from the belts in
If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat
앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts such a way that the seat belts fit more
belt remains unfastened after 60 sec-
exceeding a preset severity level. snugly against the body. Belt force limiters
onds, the seat belt telltale < stops
reduce the force exerted by the seat belts
flashing and the warning chime stops 앫 if the restraint systems are operational on occupants during a crash.
sounding. The seat belt telltale < and functioning correctly.
then continues to be illuminated for as See 1 indicator lamp (컄 page 60).
long as either the driver’s or front pas- Warning! G
senger’s seat belt are not fastened.
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
The seat belt telltale < will only go out
was activated must be replaced.
if both the driver and front passenger’s
seat belt (with the front passenger seat oc- When scrapping the emergency tensioning
cupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is device, our safety instructions must be
standing still and a front door is opened. followed. These are available at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
! Active head restraint You cannot remove the active head re-
Do not place objects heavier than straints on the driver’s and passenger’s
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger The active head restraints are intended to seats.
seat. This could cause the front or side offer the driver and front passenger in- For removal of the active head restraints
impact air bag on the front passenger creased protection from head and neck in- we recommend that you contact an autho-
side and, with the seat belt fastened to jury. In the event of a rear-end collision, rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
secure the object, the ETD to deploy in the active head restraints on the driver’s
and front passenger’s seats are designed
a crash which exceeds the system’s de-
to move forward in the direction of travel, Warning! G
ployment threshold.
providing the head with increased support
Only use seat- or head restraint covers
earlier on in the collision sequence. The ac-
which have been tested and approved by
tive head restraints move forward whether
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
the seat is occupied or not.
Using other seat- or head restraint covers
may interfere with or prevent the activation
Warning! G of the active head restraints. Contact your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for avail-
Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to ability.
the head restraint posts. Otherwise, the ac-
tive head restraints may not be able to func-
tion properly or offer the intended degree of
protection in the event of an accident.
For information on resetting the activated

active head restraints, see “Resetting acti-
vated head restraints” (컄 page 391).
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle

If an infant or child is traveling with you in
For your protection, drive only with properly the vehicle: Do not leave children unattended in the
positioned head restraints. vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
앫 Secure the child using an infant or child
Adjust head restraints so that the center of restraint system. The children could
restraint appropriate to the age and
the head restraint supports the back of the size of the child. 앫 injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
head at eye level. This will reduce the poten- 앫 be seriously or fatally injured through
앫 Make sure the infant or child is proper-
tial for injury to the head and neck in the excessive exposure to extreme heat or
event of an accident or similar situation.
ly secured at all times while the vehicle
cold
is in motion.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat Do not expose the child restraint system to
head restraints. Head restraints are intend- Infant and child restraint seats and infor- direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
ed to help reduce injuries during an mation on choosing an appropriate re- metal parts, for example, could become very
accident. straint system can be obtained from any hot, and the child could be burned on these
Mercedes-Benz Center. parts.
For information on head restraint adjust-
ment, see “Seats” (컄 page 35).
72
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Infant and child restraint systems To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
If children open a door, they could
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
앫 injure other persons Only use a BabySmartTM compatible child
belt can again be used in the usual
restraint for the front passenger seat in
앫 get out of the car and injure themselves manner.
this vehicle.
or be injured by following traffic
We recommend all infants and children be
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
properly restrained at all times while the Warning! G
passenger or cargo compartment unless
they are firmly secured in place. For more in- vehicle is in motion.
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
formation, see “Loading” (컄 page 248) and All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
“Useful features” (컄 page 256). seat belt have special seat belt retractors belt retractor will be deactivated.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo for secure fastening of child restraints.
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event To fasten a child restraint, follow child i
of restraint instructions for mounting. Then For information on child seats with an-
앫 strong braking maneuvers pull the shoulder belt out completely and chor fittings for tether anchorages, see
let it retract. During seat belt retraction, “Installation of infant and child re-
앫 sudden changes of direction
a ratcheting sound can be heard to indi- straint systems” (컄 page 77).
앫 an accident cate that the special seat belt retractor is
activated. The belt is now locked. Push For information on child seat anchors -
down on child restraint to take up any LATCH-type (컄 page 79).
slack.
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
! !
The use of infant or child restraints is A statement by the child restraint man- Warning! G
required by law in all 50 states, the ufacturer of compliance with this stan-
Children 12 years old and under must never
District of Columbia, the U.S. territo- dard can be found on the instruction
ride in the front seat, except in a
ries and all Canadian provinces. label on the restraint and in the
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
Infants and small children should be instruction manual provided with the
compatible child seat, which operates with
restraint.
seated in an appropriate infant or child the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
restraint system properly secured by a When using any infant or child restraint hicle to deactivate the passenger front
lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a system, be sure to carefully read and air bag when it is properly installed. Other-
child restraint lower anchorage system follow all manufacturer’s instructions wise they will be struck by the air bag when
that complies with U.S. Federal Motor for installation and use. it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 or fatal injury will result.
Please read and observe warning labels
and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant According to accident statistics, children
Standards 213 and 210.2.
or child restraints. are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufactur-
er’s instructions.
74
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation

Occupants, especially children, should nev- Children too big for child restraint systems
system
er place their bodies or lean their heads in must ride in back seats using regular seat
the area of the door or the rear side trim belts. Position shoulder belt across chest The 56 indicator lamp is located on
panel where the front side impact air bag and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster the center console.
and/or the rear side impact air bag* in- seat may be necessary to achieve proper
flates. This could result in serious injuries or belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
death should the air bag be triggered. Al- they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
ways sit nearly upright, properly use the belt fits properly without a booster.
seat belts and appropriate size infant or When the child restraint is not in use,
child restraint system. remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
Infants and small children should never the seat belt to prevent the child restraint
share a seat belt with another occupant. from becoming a projectile in the event of
During an accident, they could be crushed an accident.
between the occupant and seat belt. Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
1 Front passenger front air bag off
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is hicle; even if the children are secured in a
indicator lamp
significantly increased if the child restraints child restraint system. Unsupervised chil-
are not properly secured in the vehicle and dren in a child restraint system may use ve- Special BabySmartTM compatible child
the child is not properly secured in the child hicle equipment and may cause an accident seats, designed for use with the
restraint. and/or serious personal injury. Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are
required for use with the BabySmartTM
air bag deactivation system. With the
special child seat properly installed, the
passenger front air bag will not deploy.
75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The indicator lamp will be illuminated, ex- Self-test BabySmartTM without special
cept with the SmartKey removed or in child seat installed Warning! G
starter switch position 0.
After turning the SmartKey in the starter The BabySmartTM air bag deactivation sys-
i switch to position 1 or 2, tem will ONLY work with a special child seat
the 56 indicator lamp comes on designed to operate with it. It will not work
The system does not deactivate the
for approximately 6 seconds and then with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
side impact air bag (front side impact
goes out. compatible.
air bag and/or rear side impact
air bag*) and the emergency tension- If the 56 indicator lamp should not Never place anything between seat cushion
ing device. come on or is continuously lit, the system and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
is not functioning. You must see an the effectiveness of the deactivation sys-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before tem. The bottom of the child seat must
seating any child on the front passenger make full contact with the passenger seat
seat. cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
For more information, see “Practical hints” could cause injuries to the child in case of an
(컄 page 357). accident, instead of protecting the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
76
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Installation of infant and child restraint

Warning! G Warning! G systems
When using a BabySmartTM compatible Do not place powered-on laptops, cell This vehicle is equipped with tether
child seat on the front passenger seat, the phones, electronic tags such as those used anchorages for a top tether strap at each
passenger front air bag will not deploy only in ski passes and like electronic devices on of the rear seating positions.
if the 56 indicator lamp (컄 page 75) the front passenger seat. Signals from such
remains illuminated. devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
Please be sure to check system. Such signal interference may cause
the 56 indicator lamp every time the 56 indicator lamp (컄 page 75)
you use the special system child seat. not to come on during self-test or be contin-
Should the 56 indicator lamp go out uously lit, indicating that the system is not
while the restraint is installed, please check functioning.
installation. If the 56 indicator lamp
remains out, do not use the BabySmartTM
restraint to transport children on the front
1 Cover of top anchorage ring
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired. 왘 Make sure the rear backrest is locked
in its upright position (컄 page 253). 컄컄
77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 Once the top tether anchorage hook is

Warning! G attached, the child restraint itself can be
secured. Tighten the top tether strap
Always lock backrest in its upright position according to the child restraint
when rear seat bench is occupied by pas- manufacturer’s instructions.
sengers, or the extended cargo area is not in
use. Check for secure locking by pushing i
and pulling on the backrest. For safety, make sure the hook has
attached to the ring beyond the safety
왘 Remove cover 1 from anchorage catch, as illustrated.
ring 3. 2 Hook
3 Anchorage ring 왘 Reinstall cover 1 after removing the
왘 Guide tether strap between head
tether strap.
restraint and top of seat back. 왘 Securely fasten hook 2, which is part
Head restraint must be installed (if of the tether strap, to anchorage
removable) and positioned such that ring 3.
the top tether strap can pass freely
between the head restraint and top of
seat back.
Make sure the tether strap is not
twisted.
78
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type

The child seat must be firmly attached in the i
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH- right and left side anchors 1. Non-LATCH-type child seats may also
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) be used and can be installed using the
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
type anchors (at each of the outer rear vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child
loose during an accident which could result
seats) for the installation of a LATCH-type seat according to the manufacturer’s
in serious injury or death to the child.
child seat with the matching mounting instructions.
fittings. Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be
The LATCH-type anchors are located be-
replaced.
Warning! G Do not leave children unattended in the
tween the seat cushion and the backrest.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
ride in seats using regular seat belts. child restraint system.
Position shoulder belt across chest and
shoulder, not face or neck. i
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve With a child seat installed in the left
proper belt positioning for children over rear seat, the seat belt for the center
41 lbs until they reach a height where a seat occupied by a passenger must op-
lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a erate freely. Guide seat belt between
booster. its seat cushion mount and backrest
mount along outside of right side child 1 Anchors
Install child seat according to manufactur-
seat anchor. 왘 Install child seat according to the
er’s instructions.
manufacturer’s instructions.
79
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Blocking of rear door window operation Activating override switch

Warning! G 왘 Slide override switch 3 to the right.
You can block the rear door window
operation (for instance when you have Activate the override switch when children The rear door windows can no longer
children riding in the rear passenger are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. be operated using the respective
compartment). The children may otherwise injure them- switch located in the rear doors.
selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-
The override switch is located on the door i
dow opening.
control panel of the driver’s door.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Operation of the rear door windows
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with the switches located on the door
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave control panel of the driver’s door is still
children unattended in the vehicle, or with possible.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment can cause an Deactivating override switch
accident and/or serious personal injury. 왘 Slide override switch 3 to the left.
The rear door windows can be operated
again using the respective switch
located in the rear doors.
1 Deactivating override switch
2 Activating override switch For more information, see “Power win-
3 Override switch dows” (컄 page 238).
80
Safety and Security
Panic alarm*
왔 Panic alarm*
An audible alarm and flashing exterior i (2) this device must accept any inter-
lamps will operate for approximately USA only: ference received, including interfer-
21/2 minutes. This device complies with Part 15 of ence that may cause undesired
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to operation of the device.
the following two conditions: Any unauthorized modification to this
(1) This device may not cause harmful device could void the user’s authority
interference, and to operate the equipment.
(2) this device must accept any inter-
Activating
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired 왘 Press and hold button 1 for at least
operation. 1 second.
Any unauthorized modification to this
1 Â button Deactivating
device could void the user’s authority
i to operate the equipment.
왘 Press button 1 again.
Canada only:
Only vehicles equipped with an i or
anti-theft alarm system* have Canada only: 왘 Insert SmartKey in starter switch.
SmartKeys with integrated panic This device complies with RSS-210 of
button 1. Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interfer-
ence, and
81
Safety and Security
In this section you will find information on i ABS

the following driving safety systems: In winter operation, the maximum
앫 effectiveness of the ABS and ESP® is
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
only achieved with winter tires Warning! G
앫 BAS (Brake Assist System)
(컄 page 336), or snow chains as re-
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
앫 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) quired.
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
Warning! G the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
앫 Excessive speed, especially in turns the brake pressure so that the wheels do
앫 Wet and slippery road surfaces not lock during braking. This allows you to
앫 Following another vehicle too closely maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS, BAS and ESP® cannot reduce this The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
risk. proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
Always adjust your driving style to the
prevailing road and weather conditions. On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
respond even to light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 24) comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
82
Safety and Security
Braking Emergency brake maneuver

At the instant one of the wheels is about to 왘 Keep continuous full pressure on the
Warning! G
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal. The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
the regulating mode.
Warning! G it increase braking or steering efficiency
왘 Keep firm and steady pressure on the beyond that afforded by the condition of the
brake pedal while experiencing the When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS vehicle brakes and tires or the traction af-
pulsation. and the ESP® are also switched off. forded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents,
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels including those resulting from excessive
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure
may lock during hard braking, reducing speed in turns, following another vehicle too
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
steering capability and extending the brak- closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, atten-
namely braking power and ability to steer
ing distance. tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
the vehicle.
dents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped
The pulsating brake pedal can be an vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
indication of hazardous road conditions less or dangerous manner which could jeop-
and functions as a reminder to take extra ardize the user’s safety or the safety of
care while driving. others.
For more information, see the “Practical

hints” section (컄 page 350) and
(컄 page 360).
83
Safety and Security
BAS ESP®
Warning! G
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
emergency situations. If you apply the The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of operational as soon as the engine is run-
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can ning and monitors the vehicle’s traction
provides full brake boost, thereby poten- it increase braking efficiency beyond that (force of adhesive friction between the
tially reducing the braking distance. afforded by the condition of the vehicle tires and the road surface) and handling.
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
왘 Apply continuous full braking pressure The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, includ-
until the emergency braking situation is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
ing those resulting from excessive speed in
over. applying brakes to the appropriate wheel
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
and by limiting the engine output, the ESP®
The ABS will prevent the wheels from or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is
locking. skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
especially useful while driving off and on
When you release the brake pedal, the capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must
wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®
brakes function again as normal. The BAS never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
also stabilizes the vehicle during braking
is then deactivated. ous manner which could jeopardize the
maneuvers.
user’s safety or the safety of others.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the
Warning! G speedometer flashes when the ESP® is
engaged.
If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake sys-
tem is still functioning normally, but without The ESP® warning lamp v in the
the additional brake boost available that speedometer comes on when you switch
BAS would normally provide in an emergen- on the ignition. It goes out when the engine
cy braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking is running.
distance may increase.
84
Safety and Security
!
Warning! G Warning! G Because of the ESP®’s automatic
operation, the engine must be turned
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of
off (SmartKey in starter switch
ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
position 0 or 1) when
speedometer. In this case, proceed as it increase the traction afforded. The ESP®
follows: cannot prevent accidents, including those 앫 the parking brake is being tested on
앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle resulting from excessive speed in turns or a brake test dynamometer
as possible. hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and 앫 the vehicle is being towed with the
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The front axle raised
앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
capabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle
tor. Active braking action through the ESP®
must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to gerous manner which could jeopardize the may otherwise seriously damage the
the prevailing road conditions. brake system.
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid. For more information, see the “Practical
i hints” section (컄 page 354) and
The ESP® cannot prevent accidents result-
The ESP® will only function properly if (컄 page 361).
ing from excessive speed.
you use wheels of the recommended
tire size (컄 page 429).
85
Safety and Security
Switching off the ESP® ! The switch is located on the upper part of
Turn on the ESP® immediately if the the center console.
Warning! G aforementioned circumstances do not
apply anymore.
The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circum- When you switch off the ESP®
stances described below. Disabling of the
앫 the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
dard driving maneuvers. 앫 the engine output is not limited, which
Do not switch off the ESP® when a Minis-
allows the drive wheels to spin and
pare wheel or a collapsible tire is mounted.
thus cut into surfaces for better grip
앫 the traction control will still brake a 1 ESP® switch (off/on)
To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off spinning wheel
왘 With the engine running, Press
the ESP® in driving situations where it 앫 the ESP® continues to operate when switch 1.
would be advantageous to have the drive you are braking
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for The ESP® warning lamp v in the
better grip such as: i speedometer comes on.
앫 when driving with snow chains When the ESP® is switched off and one The ESP® is deactivated.
or more drive wheels are spinning, the
앫 in deep snow ESP® warning lamp v in the speed-
앫 in sand or gravel ometer flashes. However, the ESP® will
then not stabilize the vehicle.
86
Safety and Security
Switching on the ESP®

Warning! G 왘 Press ESP® switch 1.
When the ESP® warning lamp v is The ESP® warning lamp v in the
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is speedometer goes out.
switched off.
You are now again in normal driving
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- mode with the ESP® switched on.
ing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®.
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP®
switched off. This may cause serious
damage to the drivetrain which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
87
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer Anti-theft alarm system* i

If the alarm stays on for more than
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized Once the alarm system has been armed, a
30 seconds, a call to the Response
persons from starting your vehicle. visual and audible alarm is triggered when
Center is initiated automatically by the
someone opens
Tele Aid system* (컄 page 264)
Activating
앫 a door provided Tele Aid service was
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter subscribed to and properly activated,
앫 the trunk
switch. and that necessary cellular service and
앫 the hood GPS coverage are available.
Deactivating The alarm will stay on even if the activating
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33). element (e. g. a door) is immediately
closed.
i
The alarm system will also be triggered
Starting the engine will also deactivate when
the immobilizer.
앫 someone attempts to raise the vehicle
In case the engine cannot be started (only vehicles with tow-away alarm)
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact 앫 opening the vehicle with the
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center mechanical key
or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the 앫 someone opens a door from the inside
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
앫 someone opens the trunk with the
emergency release button
88
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming the alarm system i

The indicator lamp is in the center console. If the turn signal lamps do not flash
three times, one of the following
elements may not be properly closed:
앫 a door
앫 the trunk
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
1 Indicator lamp (vehicles without
tow-away alarm)
1 Indicator lamp (vehicles with tow-away 왘 Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
alarm) The turn signal lamps flash three times
and an acoustic signal sounds three
times (if equipped and feature activat-
ed), to indicate that the alarm system is
activated.
Indicator lamp 1 begins to flash after
approximately 30 seconds after arming
the alarm system.
89
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Disarming the alarm system Tow-away alarm* Arming the tow-away alarm
왘 Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey. 왘 Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
Depending on vehicle production date,
The turn signal lamps flash once and an your vehicle may not be equipped with the The tow-away alarm is automatically
acoustic signal sounds once (if tow-away alarm. armed after about 30 seconds.
equipped and feature activated), to
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual i
indicate that the alarm system is dis-
and audible alarm will be triggered when
armed. When you unlock the vehicle, the
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
tow-away protection disarms
i i automatically. The tow-away alarm
The alarm system will rearm automati- remains disarmed until you lock the
If the alarm stays on for more than
cally after approximately 40 seconds if vehicle again.
30 seconds, a call to the Response
neither a door nor the trunk lid was
Center is initiated automatically by the
opened. Disarming the tow-away alarm
Tele Aid system* (컄 page 264) provid-
ed Tele Aid service was subscribed to To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm,
Canceling the alarm and properly activated, and that neces- switch off the tow-away alarm feature
To cancel the alarm: sary cellular service and GPS coverage before towing the vehicle, or when parking
are available. on a surface subject to movement, such as
왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey. a ferry or auto train.
or
왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
90
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
The switch is located on the center i Canceling the tow-away alarm

console. You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm To cancel the alarm:
while the ignition is switched on.
왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
왘 Press tow-away alarm off switch 1.
or
Indicator lamp 2 in the tow-away
alarm off switch comes on briefly. 왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
왘 Exit the vehicle.
왘 Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed
1 Tow-away alarm off switch until you lock the vehicle again.
2 Indicator lamp
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 33).
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
91
92
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Climate control
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Audio system
Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
93
Controls in detail
In the “Controls in detail” section you will SmartKey

find detailed information on how to oper-
ate the equipment installed on your vehi- Your vehicle comes supplied with two
cle. If you are already familiar with the SmartKeys, each with remote control and
basic functions of your vehicle, this section a removable mechanical key.
will be of particular interest to you. The locking tabs for the mechanical key
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba- portion of the two SmartKeys are a
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the different color to help distinguish each
“Getting started” section of this manual. SmartKey unit.
The corresponding page numbers are giv- The SmartKey provides an extended oper-
en at the beginning of each segment. SmartKey with remote control
ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when 1 ‹ Lock button
For more information on locking and
you are in close proximity to it. 2 Š Opening button for trunk
unlocking, see “Getting started”
3 Mechanical key locking tab
(컄 page 32) and (컄 page 54). The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks: 4 Œ Unlock button
앫 the doors 5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button* (컄 page 81).
앫 the trunk
앫 the fuel filler flap i
Canada only:
Only vehicles equipped with an
anti-theft alarm system* have
SmartKeys with integrated panic
button 6.
94
Controls in detail
i i
Warning! G USA only: Canada only:
This device complies with Part 15 of This device complies with RSS-210 of
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to Industry Canada. Operation is subject
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
the following two conditions: to the following two conditions:
children unattended in the vehicle, or with (1) This device may not cause harmful (1) This device may not cause interfer-
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible interference, and ence, and
for children to open a locked door from the
(2) this device must accept any inter- (2) this device must accept any inter-
inside, which could result in an accident
ference received, including interfer- ference received, including interfer-
and/or serious injury.
ence that may cause undesired ence that may cause undesired
operation. operation of the device.
! Any unauthorized modification to this Any unauthorized modification to this
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid device could void the user’s authority device could void the user’s authority
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of to operate the equipment. to operate the equipment.
electromagnetic radiation.
i
You can also open or close the power
windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof
using the SmartKey, see “Summer
opening feature” (컄 page 241) and
“Convenience closing feature”
(컄 page 241).
95
Controls in detail
Factory setting Global unlocking Global locking

왘 Press button Œ. 왘 Press button ‹.
i
Your vehicle may be equipped with an 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once. 앫 All turn signal lamps flash three
acoustic lock and unlock confirmation 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once times.
signal feature. If your vehicle is (if equipped and feature activated). 앫 An acoustic signal sounds three
equipped with this feature and the fea- times (if equipped and feature acti-
ture is activated, an acoustic signal will 앫 The locking knobs in the doors
vated).
sound when the vehicle is locked or un- move up.
locked using the SmartKey. 앫 The locking knobs in the doors
앫 The anti-theft alarm system* is dis-
move down.
To determine whether or not your vehi- armed.
cle is equipped with this feature, con- 앫 The anti-theft alarm system* is
The vehicle will lock again automatically
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz and reactivate the anti-theft alarm armed.
Center. If equipped and you wish to ac- system* within approximately 40 seconds
tivate or deactivate the feature, or ad- of unlocking if: Selective setting
just its signal volume, also contact an If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
앫 neither a door nor the trunk is opened
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. to reprogram the SmartKey so that
앫 the SmartKey is not inserted in the pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
starter switch door and the fuel filler flap.
앫 the central locking switch is not 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
activated simultaneously for about 5 seconds.
Battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 94)
flashes twice.
96
Controls in detail
The SmartKey will then function as follows: Global locking !

왘 Press button ‹. If you can no longer lock or unlock the
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler vehicle with the SmartKey, then either
flap 앫 All turn signal lamps flash three
the batteries in the SmartKey are dis-
times.
왘 Press button Œ once. charged, the SmartKey is malfunction-
앫 An acoustic signal sounds three ing or the vehicle battery is drained.
앫 All turn signal lamps flash once. times (if equipped and feature acti-
앫 Try second SmartKey.
앫 An acoustic signal sounds once vated).
(if equipped and feature activated). 앫 Check the batteries in the
앫 The locking knobs in the doors
SmartKey (컄 page 98) and replace
앫 The locking knob in the driver’s move down.
them if necessary (컄 page 393).
door moves up.
앫 The anti-theft alarm system* is
앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock
앫 The anti-theft alarm system* is disarmed.
the driver’s door (컄 page 386) and
armed.
the trunk (컄 page 387).
Restoring to factory setting
Global unlocking 앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
driver’s door (컄 page 387) and the
왘 Press button Œ twice. simultaneously for about 6 seconds un-
trunk (컄 page 103).
til battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 94)
앫 All turn signal lamps flash once.
flashes twice. 앫 Have the vehicle battery and the
앫 An acoustic signal sounds once battery connections checked
The SmartKey is set to factory setting
(if equipped and feature activated). (컄 page 411).
again.
앫 The locking knobs in the doors If the SmartKey is malfunctioning,
move up. contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
앫 The anti-theft alarm system* is dis- Center.
armed.
97
Controls in detail
Checking the batteries Unlocking and opening the trunk Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
왘 Press button ‹ or Œ. You can unlock and open the trunk If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
separately. you should do the following:
Battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 94)
comes on briefly to indicate that the A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft 왘 Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
SmartKey batteries are in order. (1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘 Press button Š until trunk lid 왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
i
unlocks and begins to open. mechanical key immediately to your
If battery check lamp 5 does not
car insurance company.
come on briefly during check, then the !
SmartKey batteries are discharged. 왘 If necessary, have the mechanical lock
The trunk lid swings open upwards
replaced.
Replace the batteries (컄 page 393). automatically. Always make sure there
is sufficient overhead clearance. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
You can obtain the required batteries
will be glad to supply you with a replace-
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
i ment.
Center.
If the trunk does not open, it is still
i locked separately (컄 page 103).
If the batteries are checked within
signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the ‹ or Œ button will lock or
unlock the vehicle accordingly.
98
Controls in detail
Opening the doors from the inside To cancel the alarm, do one of the Opening the trunk
following:
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions 앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the Opening the trunk from the outside
are safe to do so. SmartKey. A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter (1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
switch. The handle is located above the rear
license plate recess.
Front doors
왘 Pull on door handle 2 on the
respective front door to open door.
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
1 Locking knob Rear doors

2 Inside door handle 왘 Pull up locking knob 1 on the
respective rear door to unlock door.
i
왘 Pull on door handle 2 on the 1 Handle
If the vehicle has previously been
locked with the SmartKey, opening a respective rear door to open door.
door from the inside will trigger the
anti-theft alarm system*.
99
Controls in detail
The vehicle must be unlocked. Opening the trunk from the inside 왘 Press switch 1 until the trunk begins
to open.
왘 Pull on handle 1. You can open the trunk from the inside if
the vehicle is stationary. The indicator lamp in the switch
The trunk opens.
remains lit as long as the trunk is open.
A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
! (1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid. !
The remote trunk opening switch is locat- The trunk lid swings open upwards
automatically. Always make sure there
ed on the driver’s door. automatically. Always make sure there
is sufficient overhead clearance.
i
i
If the trunk does not open, it is still
locked separately (컄 page 103). If the trunk does not open, it is still
locked separately (컄 page 103).
The trunk can also be opened using
The trunk can also be opened using
button Š on the SmartKey or from its
button Š on the SmartKey or from its
inside in an emergency, see “Trunk emer-
inside in an emergency, see “Trunk emer-
gency release” (컄 page 102).
1 Remote trunk opening switch with indi- gency release” (컄 page 102).
cator lamp
100
Controls in detail
Closing the trunk i

Warning! G Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
opening when closing the trunk. Be espe- i
cially careful when small children are If the vehicle was previously centrally
around. locked, the trunk will lock automatical-
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ly after closing it. The turn signals will
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it flash three times to confirm locking.
1 Handle
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
2 Handles
왘 Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on an accident and/or serious personal injury.
handle 1 or handles 2.
왘 Close trunk lid with hands placed flat
on trunk lid. Warning! G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, ex-
haust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
101
Controls in detail
Trunk emergency release Illumination of the emergency release i

button: If the vehicle has previously been
With the emergency release button, the
앫 The button flashes 30 minutes after locked with the SmartKey, opening the
trunk can be opened from inside the trunk.
opening the trunk. trunk from the inside using the emer-
The emergency release button is located gency release button will trigger the
앫 The button flashes 60 minutes after
on the inside of the trunk lid. anti-theft alarm system*.
closing the trunk.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the
i following:
The emergency release button unlocks
앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the
and opens the trunk while the vehicle is
SmartKey.
standing still or in motion.
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
i
The emergency release button does
not open the trunk lid if the vehicle
1 Emergency release button battery is discharged or disconnected.
왘 Briefly press emergency release
button 1.
The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid
opens.
!
automatically.
102
Controls in detail
Valet locking 왘 Pull the mechanical key out of the Automatic central locking
SmartKey (컄 page 386).
i The doors and the trunk automatically lock
왘 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
when the ignition is switched on and the
To deny any unauthorized person ac- lid lock.
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
cess to the trunk, lock it separately
왘 Turn the mechanical key clockwise to approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
with the mechanical key. Leave only
position 2 and remove the mechani-
the SmartKey less its mechanical key You can open a locked door from the
cal key in that position to lock the
with the vehicle. inside. Open door only when conditions
trunk.
are safe to do so.
The lock is located next to the handle The trunk remains locked even when the
vehicle is centrally unlocked. i
above the rear license plate recess.
The doors unlock automatically after an
i accident if the force of the impact
You can only cancel the separate trunk exceeds a preset threshold.
locking mode by means of the
To prevent the vehicle door locks from
mechanical key.
locking, deactivate the automatic
central locking when the vehicle
왘 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock. 앫 is pushed or towed
왘 Turn the mechanical key counterclock- 앫 is on a test stand

wise to neutral position 1 and remove
1 Neutral position the mechanical key in that position to You can deactivate the automatic locking
2 Locked unlock the trunk. mode using the control system, see “Set
automatic locking” (컄 page 147).
왘 Close the trunk (컄 page 101). You can now open the trunk
(컄 page 99).
103
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking from the inside The switches are located in the center i
console. You can open a locked door from the
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
inside. Open door only when conditions
trunk from inside using the central locking
are safe to do so.
or unlocking switch. This can be useful, for
example, if you want to lock the vehicle If the vehicle was previously centrally
before starting to drive. locked using the SmartKey, it will not
unlock using the central unlocking
You cannot lock or unlock the fuel filler flap
switch 2.
with the central locking or unlocking
switch. If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch 1
Warning! G 1 Central locking switch
앫 while in the selective remote con-
trol mode, only the door opened
2 Central unlocking switch
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the from the inside is unlocked.
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it 앫 while in the global remote control
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave mode, the complete vehicle is
children unattended in the vehicle, or with unlocked when a door is opened
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper- from the inside.
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
104
Controls in detail
Locking
왘 Press central locking switch 1.
If all doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
Unlocking
왘 Press central unlocking switch 2.
The vehicle unlocks.
105
Controls in detail
Seats
For information on seat adjustment, see You cannot remove the active head re- Rear seat head restraints
“Adjusting” (컄 page 35). straints on the driver’s and passenger’s
seat.
Front seat active head restraints For removal of the active head restraints Warning! G
we recommend that you contact an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. For safety reasons, always drive with the
Warning! G rear head restraints in the upright position
i when the rear seats are occupied.
For your protection, drive only with properly Adjust the head restraint in such a way Keep the area around head restraints clear
positioned head restraints. that it is as close to the head as of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
Adjust head restraint so that the head re- possible. folding operation of the head restraints.
level. This will reduce the potential for injury For information on head restraint
to the head and neck in the event of an ac- adjustment, see “Seats” (컄 page 35).
cident or similar situation. For information on active head restraints,
see “Active head restraint” (컄 page 71).
head restraints. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
106
Controls in detail
Seats
Head restraint height (rear outer seats) i Folding head restraints back with
Adjust the head restraint in such a way release button
that it is as close to the head as The rear seat head restraints can be folded
possible. backward for increased visibility.
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
1 Release button
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
Raising
to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
왘 Manually adjust the height of the head cident or similar situation. 1 Release button
restraint by pulling it upward. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat 왘 Push release button 1.
If the head restraint is fully retracted, head restraints. Head restraints are
The head restraint will fold backward.
push release button 1 and pull the intended to help reduce injuries during an
head restraint out. accident. i
You can also fold the rear outer seat
Lowering head restraints back using the switch
왘 To lower the head restraint, push in the center console (컄 page 108).
release button 1 and push down on
the head restraint.
107
Controls in detail
Seats
Folding head restraints back with Placing head restraints upright Head restraint tilt (rear outer seats)
switch in the center console
Two different head restraint angle
positions are available:
왘 Press the release button (컄 page 107)
and tilt the head restraint to the
desired position.
Removing and installing rear seat head

restraints (rear outer seats)
왘 Pull the head restraint forward until it

i
1 Switch for rear seat head restraints locks into position. Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that it is as close to the head as
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 45). possible.
왘 Press switch 1.
Warning! G
The rear seat head restraints will fold Make sure the head restraints engage when i
backward. placing them upright. Otherwise their The rear center seat head restraint
protective function cannot be assured. cannot be removed.
108
Controls in detail
Seats
Lumbar support*
Warning! G
The curvature of the driver’s seat can be
For your protection, drive only with properly adjusted to help enhance lower back sup-
positioned head restraints. port and seating comfort.
Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
cident or similar situation.
1 Release button
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
Removing rear seat head restraints
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent. 왘 Fold back head restraint (컄 page 107).
Do not interchange head restraints from 왘 Pull head restraint to its highest 1 Adjustment lever
front and rear seat. position.
왘 Move adjustment lever 1 in direction
왘 Push release button 1 and pull out of arrows until you have reached a
head restraint. comfortable seating position.
Installing rear seat head restraints

왘 Insert head restraint and push it down
until it engages.
왘 Push button 1 and adjust head
restraint to desired position.
109
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat heating Level Switching on seat heating
3 Three indicator lamps on 왘 Press switch 1 once.

Both switches for the front seats are locat-
ed in the center console. The red indicator (highest level). Three red indicator lamps 2 in the
lamps in the switch come on to show heat- After approximately 5 minutes, switch come on.
ing level you have selected. seat heating is automatically 왘 Continue pressing switch 1 until
switched to level 2. desired seat heating level is reached.
2 Two indicator lamps on.
Switching off seat heating
After approximately 10 minutes,
seat heating is automatically 왘 Press switch 1 repeatedly until all
switched to level 1. indicator lamps 2 go out.
1 One indicator lamp on i
(lowest level).
If one or more of the indicator
After approximately 20 minutes, lamps 2 on the seat heating switch
seat heating is automatically are flashing, there is insufficient volt-
1 Seat heating switch
switched off. age due to too many electrical consum-
2 Indicator lamps
off No indicator lamp on. ers are turned on. The seat heating
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33). switches off automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on
again automatically as soon as
sufficient voltage is available.
110
Controls in detail
Memory function
왔 Memory function
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver With the memory function you can store up The following settings are stored for the
should check and adjust the seat height, to three different settings. front passenger seat when using the but-
seat position fore and aft, and seat back- tons (if so equipped depending on vehicle
The following settings are stored for the
rest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate equipment configuration) on the passen-
driver’s seat when using the buttons on the
control, reach and comfort. The head re- ger door:
driver’s door:
straint should also be adjusted for proper
앫 Front passenger seat, backrest and
height. See also the section on air bags 앫 Driver’s seat, backrest and head
head restraint position
(컄 page 61) for proper seat positioning. restraint position
앫 Steering wheel position
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation
Warning! G
앫 Exterior rear view mirrors
and comfort. Both the interior and exterior Do not activate the memory function while
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for driving. Activating the memory function
adequate rear vision. while driving could cause the driver to lose
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small chil- control of the vehicle.
dren should be seated in a properly se-
cured restraint system that complies with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.
111
Controls in detail
Memory function
The memory button and memory position Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory
switch are located on the door.
왘 Adjust the seat, steering wheel and !
exterior rear view mirrors to the
Do not operate the power seats using
desired position (컄 page 35).
the memory button if the seat backrest
왘 Turn memory position switch 2 to the is in an excessively reclined position.
desired memory position. Doing so could cause damage to front
왘 Press memory button 1. or rear seats.
왘 Release memory button 1 and press 왘 Turn memory position switch 2 to the
memory position switch 2 within desired memory position.
3 seconds.
1 Memory button 왘 Press and hold memory position
All settings are stored to the selected switch 2 until the seat, steering wheel
2 Memory position switch
position. and exterior rear view mirrors have
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33). completely moved to the stored
or positions.
왘 Open the respective door. i
Releasing the memory position switch
stops movement to the stored
positions immediately.
112
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing exterior rear view mirror 왘 Press button 3.

parking position
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
For easier parking, you can adjust the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so 왘 Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
that you can see the right rear wheel as with button 2 so that you see the rear
soon as you engage reverse gear R. wheel and the road curb.
For information on activating the parking 왘 Press memory button 1.
position feature, see “Activating exterior 왘 Within 3 seconds, press bottom of ad-
rear view mirror parking position” justment button 2.
(컄 page 170). 1 Memory button
2 Adjustment button The parking position is stored if the
3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror does not move.
mirror button
i
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
If the mirror does move, repeat the
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33). above steps. After the setting is stored,
you can move the mirror again.
113
Controls in detail
Lighting
For information on how to switch on the Exterior lamp switch M Off

headlamps and use the turn signals, see Daytime running lamp mode
“Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 48) The exterior lamp switch is located on the (컄 page 116)
and “Turn signals” (컄 page 49). dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
U Automatic headlamp mode
i Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 116)
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than C Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
the country where the vehicle is regis- license plate lamps, side marker
tered, you must have the headlamps lamps, instrument panel lamps)
modified for symmetrical low beams. B Low beam headlamps (or high
Relevant information can be obtained beam headlamps when the
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz combination switch is pushed
Center. forward) and parking lamps
Exterior lamp switch
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
‡ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps
† Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp
114
Controls in detail
Lighting
i
With the SmartKey removed from the
Warning! G The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
starter switch and the driver’s door the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
open, a warning sounds if the parking times.
lamps or low beam headlamps are 앫 the headlamps may switch off unexpect-
switched on. edly when the system senses bright
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
ambient light, for example light from
The message Switch off lights. oncoming traffic. position U.
appears in the multifunction display 앫 the headlamps will not be automatically With the SmartKey in starter switch
switched on under foggy conditions. position 1, only the parking lamps will
Manual headlamp mode To minimize risk to you and to others, switch on and off automatically.
The low beam headlamps and the parking activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp When the engine is running, the low
lamps can be switched on and off with the switch to B when driving or when traffic beam headlamps, the tail and parking
exterior lamp switch. and/or ambient lighting conditions require lamps, the license plate lamps, and the
you to do so. side marker lamps will switch on and
Automatic headlamp mode In low ambient lighting conditions, only off automatically.
The following lamps switch on and off switch from position U to B with the
automatically depending on the brightness vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
of the ambient light: Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
앫 Low beam headlamps
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
앫 Tail and parking lamps may result in an accident.
앫 License plate lamps
앫 Side marker lamps
115
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode Canada only: USA only:

왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to The daytime running lamp mode is manda- By default, the daytime running lamp mode
position M or U. tory and therefore in a constant mode. is deactivated. Activate the daytime
running lamp mode using the control
When the engine is running, the low beam When the engine is running, and you shift
system, see “Set daytime running lamp
headlamps are switched on. from a driving position to position N or P,
mode (USA only)” (컄 page 144).
In low ambient light conditions, the the low beam headlamps will switch off
following lamps will switch on additionally: with a three-minute delay. When the engine is running, and you turn
When the engine is running, and you the exterior lamp switch to position C
앫 Tail and parking lamps or B, the manual headlamp mode has
앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to priority over the daytime running lamp
position C, the parking lamps mode.
앫 Side marker lamps switch on additionally.
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
For nighttime driving you should turn the 앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to on (컄 page 114).
exterior lamp switch to position B to position B, the manual headlamp
permit activation of the high beam head- mode has priority over the daytime
lamps. running lamp mode.
i The corresponding exterior lamps
With the daytime running lamp mode switch on (컄 page 114).
activated and the exterior lamp switch
in position M, the high beam head-
lamps cannot be switched on.
The high beam flasher is available at all
times.
116
Controls in detail
Lighting
Locator lighting and night security Fog lamps i

illumination Fog lamps cannot be switched on with
The locator lighting and the night security Warning! G the exterior lamp switch in
illumination are described in the “Control position U. For switching on the fog
system” section, see “Set locator lighting” In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to
(컄 page 145) and “Setting night security only switch from position U to B with position B first.
illumination” (컄 page 146). the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly Front fog lamps
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
왘 Switch on the low beam headlamps
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
(컄 page 114).
may result in an accident.
왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
i
Fog lamps will operate with the parking The front fog lamps switch on.
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
on. Fog lamps should only be used in exterior lamp switch comes on
conjunction with low beam headlamps. (컄 page 114).
Consult your State or Province Motor
왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch.
Vehicle Regulations regarding permis-
sible lamp operation. The front fog lamps switch off.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
117
Controls in detail
Lighting
Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only) Combination switch High beam
왘 Switch on the front fog lamps 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
(컄 page 117). position B or U (컄 page 114).
left of the steering column.
왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to 왘 Push the combination switch in
second stop. direction of arrow 1 to switch on the
The rear fog lamp is switched on. high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
lamp A in the instrument cluster
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄 page 114).
왘 Pull the combination switch in direction
왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
of arrow 2 to its original position to
stop.
switch off the high beam.
The rear fog lamp switches off.
Combination switch The high beam headlamp indicator
The yellow indicator lamp † in the 1 High beam lamp A in the instrument cluster
exterior lamp switch goes out. 2 High beam flasher goes out.
The front fog lamps remain lit.
High beam flasher
왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 2.
118
Controls in detail
Lighting
Hazard warning flasher Switching on hazard warning flasher Switching off hazard warning flasher
왘 Press hazard warning flasher 왘 Press hazard warning flasher switch 1
The hazard warning flasher can be
switch 1. again.
switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey removed from the starter All turn signals are flashing. i
switch.
i If the hazard warning flasher has been
The hazard warning flasher switches on activated automatically, press hazard
With the hazard warning flasher
automatically when an air bag deploys.
activated and the combination switch warning flasher switch 1 once to
The hazard warning flasher switch is set for either left or right turn, only the switch it off.
located on the upper part of the center respective turn signals will operate
console. when the SmartKey is in the starter
switch position 1 or 2.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
119
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting Deactivating automatic control Activating automatic control

왘 Press the = symbol on rocker 왘 Press rocker switch 3 to center
The controls are located in the overhead
switch 3. position.
control panel.
The interior lighting remains switched The interior lighting switches on in
off in darkness, even when you darkness, when you
앫 unlock the vehicle 앫 unlock the vehicle
앫 open a door 앫 open a door
앫 remove the SmartKey from the 앫 remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch starter switch
The interior lighting switches off after a
preset time (컄 page 147).
1 Rear interior lights on/off i
2 Right front reading lamp on/off If the door remains open, the interior
3 Rocker switch for automatic control lamps switch off automatically after
system approximately 5 minutes, when the
4 Left front reading lamp on/off SmartKey is removed or in starter
! switch position 0.
Leaving an interior light switch in the An interior lamp switched on manually
ON position for extended periods of does not go out automatically.
time with the engine turned off could
result in a discharged battery.
120
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual control Door entry lamps Trunk lamp
Switching front/rear interior lights on For better orientation in the dark, the cor- The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is
and off responding front door entry lamps will opened.
switch on in darkness when you open a
왘 Press the W symbol on rocker If the trunk remains open, the trunk light-
front door and the automatic control is ac-
switch 3 or the rear interior light ing switches off automatically after ap-
tivated.
switch 1 to switch on the desired proximately 10 minutes.
interior light. The door entry lamps will switch off when
the corresponding door is closed.
왘 Press the rocker switch 3 to center
position or the rear interior light i
switch 1 again to switch off the If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
respective interior light. switch to position 0 and switch off the
exterior headlamps, the door entry
Switching front reading lamp on and off lamps will remain lit for approximately
왘 Press front reading lamp switch 2 5 minutes.
or 4 to switch on the desired front
reading lamp.
왘 Press front reading lamp switch 2
or 4 again to switch off the respective
front reading lamp.
121
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument Instrument cluster illumination

cluster, see “At a glance” (컄 page 24). Warning! G
Use reset button 1 to adjust the
No messages will be displayed if either the illumination brightness for the instrument
instrument cluster or the multifunction dis- cluster.
play is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
i
mation about your driving conditions, such The instrument cluster illumination is
as speed or outside temperature, warning/ dimmed or brightened automatically to
indicator lamps, malfunction/warning mes- suit ambient light conditions.
sages or the failure of any systems. Driving The instrument cluster illumination will
characteristics may be impaired. also be adjusted automatically when
1 Reset button you switch on the vehicle’s exterior
If you must continue to drive, please do so lamps.
The instrument cluster is activated when with added caution. Visit an authorized
you Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
To brighten illumination
앫 open a door
왘 Turn reset button 1 clockwise.
앫 switch on the ignition (컄 page 33) The instrument cluster illumination will
앫 press reset button 1 brighten.
앫 switch on the exterior lighting To dim illumination

You can change the instrument cluster 왘 Turn reset button 1 counterclock-
settings in the Instrument cluster submenu wise.
of the control system (컄 page 138). The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.
122
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature gauge ! Trip odometer

Excessive coolant temperature triggers
The coolant temperature gauge is on the 왘 Make sure you are viewing the trip
a warning in the multifunction display
left side in the instrument cluster (컄 page 368). odometer and main odometer in the
(컄 page 24). multifunction display (컄 page 125).
The engine should not be operated with
왘 If it is not displayed, press button è
the coolant temperature above 248°F
Warning! G (120°C). Doing so may cause serious or ÿ on the multifunction steering
engine damage which is not covered by wheel (컄 page 126) until the trip
앫 Driving when your engine is badly odometer appears in the multifunction
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
overheated can cause some fluids which display.
may have leaked into the engine
compartment to catch fire. You could be i 왘 Press and hold the reset button in the
seriously burned. instrument cluster (컄 page 122) until
During severe operating conditions,
the trip odometer is reset.
앫 Steam from an overheated engine can e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant
cause serious burns and can occur just temperature may rise close to 248°F
by opening the hood. Stay away from (120°C).
the engine if you see or hear steam com-
ing from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
123
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Tachometer Outside temperature indicator The temperature sensor is located in the

front bumper area. Due to its location, the
The red marking on the tachometer sensor can be affected by road or engine
(컄 page 24) denotes excessive engine Warning! G heat during idling or slow driving. There-
speed. fore, the accuracy of the displayed temper-
The outside temperature indicator is not de- ature can only be verified by comparison to
! signed to serve as an ice-warning device and a thermometer placed next to the sensor,
Avoid driving at excessive engine is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. not by comparison to external displays
speeds, as it may result in serious Indicated temperatures just above the freez- (e.g. bank signs, etc.).
engine damage that is not covered by ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. garage), you will notice a delay before the
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
lower temperature is displayed.
is interrupted if the engine is operated
The outside temperature is indicated in the A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
within the red marking.
multifunction display (컄 page 125). atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
perature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
124
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display
the SmartKey in the starter switch is Warning! G
turned to position 1. The control system
enables you to A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
앫 call up information about your vehicle focus when driving.
앫 change vehicle settings For your safety and the safety of others,
For example, you can use the control selecting features through the multifunction
system to find out when your vehicle is steering wheel should only be done by the
next due for service, to set the language driver when traffic and road conditions
for messages in the instrument cluster permit it to be done safely.
display, and much more. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph 1 Trip odometer
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is 2 Main odometer
i covering a distance of 44 feet 3 Current program mode
The displays for the audio systems (approximately 14 m) every second. (automatic transmission)
(radio, CD player) will appear in English,
4 Current gear selector lever
regardless of the language selected.
The control system relays information to position/gear range
the multifunction display. (automatic transmission)
5 Digital clock
6 Status indicator (outside tempera-
ture/digital speedometer)
125
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel 1 Multifunction display Depending on the selected menu

(컄 page 129), pressing the buttons on the
The displays in the multifunction display Operating the control system multifunction steering wheel will alter what
and the settings in the control system are 2 Telephone*: is shown in the multifunction display.
controlled by the buttons on the multifunc- Press button
The information available in the multifunc-
tion steering wheel.
s to take a call tion display is arranged in menus, each
to dial a call containing a number of functions or sub-
t to end a call menus.
to reject an incoming call The individual functions are then found
3 Selecting the submenu or setting within the relevant menu (radio or CD op-
the volume: erations under Audio, for example). These
Press button functions serve to call up relevant informa-
tion or to customize the settings for your
æ up/to increase
vehicle.
ç down/to decrease
4 Menu systems:
Press button
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu:
Press button
j for next display
k for previous display
126
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the In the Settings menu, instead of functions i
functions within each menu, as being you will find a number of submenus for The headings used in the menus table
arranged in a circular pattern. calling up and changing settings. For are designed to facilitate navigation
instructions on using these submenus, see within the system and are not neces-
앫 If you press button è or ÿ
“Submenus in the Settings menu” sarily identical to those shown in the
repeatedly, you will pass through each
(컄 page 136). control system displays.
menu one after the other.
The number of menus available in the sys- The first function displayed in each
앫 If you press button k or j
tem depends on which optional equipment menu will automatically show you
repeatedly, you will pass through each
is installed in your vehicle. which part of the system you are in.
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
127
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus. overview of the individual menus.
128
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Menu 7

Standard AUDIO NAV* Vehicle status Settings Trip computer Telephone*
display message memory
(컄 page 130) (컄 page 131) (컄 page 134) (컄 page 134) (컄 page 135) (컄 page 150) (컄 page 152)
Run Flat Select radio Show route guid- Call up vehicle mal- Reset to Fuel consumption Load phone
Indicator* station ance instructions, function, warning and factory statistics after book
(Canada only) current direction system status messag- settings start
traveled es stored in memory1
Commands/submenus
Digital speed- Select satellite Instrument Fuel consumption Search for

ometer or out- radio station* cluster sub- statistics since name in
side temperature (USA only) menu the last reset phone book
Call up main- Operate Time/Date Distance to emp-
tenance service CD player* submenu ty
display
Check engine oil Lighting
level submenu
Vehicle
submenu
Convenience
submenu
1
The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
129
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu The following functions are available: Display digital speedometer or outside
temperature
In the standard display, the main odometer Function Page
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
and the trip odometer are shown in the Run Flat Indicator* (Canada 318
until you see the digital speedometer.
multifunction display. only)
Call up digital speedometer or 130 The current vehicle speed is shown in
outside temperature the multifunction display.
Call up maintenance service 338

display
Check engine oil level 299
1 Trip odometer
2 Main odometer
1 Digital speedometer
If another display is shown instead of the
standard display: i
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly Select either the display of the digital
until you see the standard display. speedometer or the outside tempera-
왘 Press button k or j to select ture indicator (컄 page 139).
the functions in the standard display
menu.
130
Controls in detail
Control system
AUDIO menu Select radio station 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly

until the desired station is found.
왘 Turn on the radio (컄 page 200).
The functions in the Audio menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently Vehicles with COMAND*: i
have turned on. Refer to separate operating You can only store new stations using
instructions. the corresponding feature on the radio
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message Audio off appears in the 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly (컄 page 208).
multifunction display. until the currently tuned station Vehicles with COMAND*:
appears in the multifunction display. Refer to separate operating
The following functions are available:
instructions.
Function Page
You can also operate the radio in the
Select radio station 131 usual manner.
Select satellite radio station* 132
(USA only)
Operate CD player* 132
1 Waveband setting
2 Station frequency
131
Controls in detail
Control system
Select satellite radio station* i 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly

(USA only) For more information on satellite radio until the settings for the CD currently
operation, see “Introduction to satellite being played appear in the
The satellite radio is treated as a radio
radio* (USA only)” (컄 page 209). multifunction display.
application.
왘 Select satellite radio with the Vehicles with COMAND*:
corresponding soft key (SAT) in the Refer to separate operating
radio menu. instructions.
Operate the CD player*
i
The COMAND* system and the CD
changer* can play audio CDs as well as
CDs with MP3 files. 1 Current CD (for CD changer*)
2 Current track
Selecting CD track
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
왘 Turn on the radio and select CD or until the desired track is selected.
1 SAT mode and preset number
CD changer* (컄 page 219).
2 Channel name or number i
Vehicles with COMAND*:
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly Refer to separate operating To select a CD from the CD changer*
until the desired channel is found. instructions. magazine, press a number on the audio
system or the COMAND* system key
pad located in the center dashboard.
132
Controls in detail
Control system
For more information on CD operation, see 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly i

“CD mode” (컄 page 214) and for the CD until the settings for the CD currently Level of information displayed will vary
changer*, see (컄 page 218). being played appear in the depending on the information con-
multifunction display. tained on the CD with MP3 files insert
Selecting CD MP3-track (vehicles with in the single CD player of the
COMAND* and/or CD changer*) COMAND* system.
왘 Turn on the radio and select the To select a CD from the CD changer*
CD changer* (컄 page 219) or turn on magazine, press a number on the audio
COMAND* and select CD or system or the COMAND* system key
CD changer*. pad located in the center dashboard.
Refer to separate operating
For more information on MP3, see “MP3
instructions.
notes” (컄 page 216), and for operating,
i 1 MP3 mode (vehicles with COMAND*) see “MP3 playback” (컄 page 217).
A CD with MP3 files insert in the CD 2 Current track
changer* is handled by the 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
audio/COMAND* system like an audio until the desired track is selected.
CD. Information contained on the CD
with MP3 files will not shown in the
multifunction display or in the au-
dio/COMAND* display.
133
Controls in detail
Control system
NAV* menu Vehicle status message memory menu

safety checks performed on the vehicle and
by bringing the vehicle to an authorized
The NAV menu contains the functions Use the vehicle status message memory
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the mal-
needed to operate your navigation system. menu to scan malfunction and warning
function and warning messages
messages that may be stored in the
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly (컄 page 358).
system. Such messages appear in the mul-
until the message NAV appears in the
tifunction display and are based on condi-
multifunction display. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
tions or system status the vehicle’s system
앫 If COMAND* is switched off, the mes- has recorded. until the vehicle status message
sage NAV off appears in the multifunc- memory appears in the multifunction
The vehicle status message memory menu display.
tion display.
only appears if there are any messages
앫 With COMAND* switched on but route stored. If the vehicle status message memory
guidance not activated, the direction of menu does not appear, then there are
travel and, if available, the name of the no messages stored.
street currently traveled on appear in Warning! G
the multifunction display.
Malfunction and warning messages are only
앫 With COMAND* switched on and route indicated for certain systems and are inten-
guidance activated, the direction of tionally not very detailed. The malfunction
travel and maneuver instructions ap- and warning messages are simply a remind-
pear in the multifunction display. er with respect to the operation of certain
Please refer to the COMAND* manual for systems and do not replace the owner’s
instructions on how to activate the route and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
guidance system*. the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and
134
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle status messages have been Should the vehicle’s system record any Settings menu
recorded conditions while driving, the number of
messages will reappear in the multifunc- In the Settings menu there are two
If conditions have occurred causing status
tion display when the SmartKey in the functions:
messages to be recorded, the number of
starter switch is turned to position 0 or 앫 The function Reset to factory
messages appears in the multifunction
removed from the starter switch. settings, with which you can reset all
display:
the settings to the original factory
i
settings.
The vehicle status message memory
will be cleared when you turn the 앫 A collection of submenus with which
SmartKey in the starter switch to you can make individual settings for
position 1 or 2. You will then only see your vehicle.
high-priority messages in the multi- 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
function display (컄 page 358). until the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
1 Number of messages
왘 Press button k or j.
The stored messages will now be
displayed in the order in which they
have occurred. For malfunction and
warning messages, see “Vehicle status
messages in the multifunction display”
(컄 page 358).
135
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting all settings i

You can reset all the functions of all The settings you have changed will not
submenus to the factory settings. be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button a second
왘 Press the reset button in the
time. After approximately 5 seconds,
instrument cluster (컄 page 122) for
the Settings menu reappears in the
approximately 3 seconds.
The request to press the reset button
For safety reasons, the following
once more to confirm appears in the
function are not reset while driving:
앫 the Hdlamp mode function in the 왘 Press button ç.
Lighting submenu The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
Submenus in the Settings menu
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
왘 Press button j. Scroll down with button ç, scroll up
The collection of the submenus with button æ.
appears in the multifunction display. With the selection marker on the desired
submenu, use the button j to access
the individual functions within that sub-
왘 Press the reset button once more. menu. Once within the submenu, you can
The functions of all the submenus will use the button j to move to the next
reset to factory settings. function or the button k to move to the
previous function within that submenu.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
136
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can Detailed instructions on making individual
be changed within the various menus. settings can be found on the following
pages.
Instrument cluster Time/Date Lighting Vehicle Convenience

Select speedometer Time synchronization with head Set daytime running lamp Set automatic lock- Activate easy-entry/exit
display mode unit* mode (USA only) ing feature
Select language Set time (hours) Set locator lighting Set parking position for
exterior rear view mirror
Select display (speed Set time (minutes) Set night security
display or outside illumination
temperature) for status
indicator
Select automatic time change Set interior lighting de-
(Daylight Saving Time (DST) layed shut-off
summer/Standard time winter)
Set date (month)
Set date (day)
Set date (year)
137
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu Select speedometer display mode Select language

Access the Instr.Cl. submenu via the 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
Settings menu. Use the Instr.Cl. button æ or ç to the Instr.Cl. button æ or ç to the Instr.Cl.
submenu to change the instrument cluster submenu. submenu.
display settings.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
The following functions are available: until the message Disp.Unit until the message Language appears in
Speed/odo appears in the multifunction the multifunction display.
Function Page
display. The selection marker is on the current
Select speedometer display 138
The selection marker is on the current setting.
mode
setting.
Select language 138
Select display (speed display or 139
outside temperature) for status
indicator
왘 Press button æ or ç to set

speedometer unit to Km or Miles.
138
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button æ or ç to select Select display (digital speedometer or 왘 Press button æ or ç to select
the language to be used for the outside temperature) for status the desired setting.
multifunction display messages. indicator
The selected display is then shown
Available languages: 왘 Move the selection marker with continuously in the lower display.
button æ or ç to the Instr.Cl.
앫 German (Deutsch) The other display now appears in the
submenu.
앫 English (English) menu of the standard display:
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 앫 Digital speedometer
앫 French (francais) until the message Status line
display appears in the multifunction or
앫 Italian (italiano)
display. 앫 Outside temperature
앫 Spanish (Español)
The selection marker is on the current
앫 Dutch (Nederlands) setting.
앫 Danish (Dansk)
앫 Swedish (Svenska)
앫 Portuguese (Português)
앫 Turkish (Türkçe)
139
Controls in detail
Control system
Time/Date submenu Time synchronization with head unit* Set the time (hours)
Access the Time/Date submenu via the This function can only be seen on vehicles This function can be seen in vehicles with
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date with COMAND* and navigation module*. audio system, or in vehicles with
submenu to change the instrument cluster COMAND* if the time synchronization with
왘 Move the selection marker with
display settings. head unit* feature was set to Off.
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
The following functions are available: submenu. i
Function Page 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Vehicles with COMAND*:
until the message Time synchro. For information on setting the time,
Time synchronization with 140
w/Head Unit appears in the multifunc- refer to the separate COMAND
head unit*
tion display. operating instructions.
Set time (hours) 140
Set time (minutes) 141 setting. 왘 Move the selection marker with
Select automatic time change 142 button æ or ç to the Time/Date
(Daylight Saving Time (DST) submenu.
summer/Standard time winter) 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
Set date (month) 142 until the message Time Hours appears
in the multifunction display.
Set date (day) 143
Set date (year) 143
왘 Press button æ or ç to select

the desired setting.
140
Controls in detail
Control system
The selection marker is on the hour Set the time (minutes) The selection marker is on the minute
setting. setting.
This function can be seen in vehicles with
audio system, or in vehicles with
COMAND* if the time synchronization with
head unit* feature was set to Off.
i
For information on setting the time,
refer to the separate COMAND
operating instructions.
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the

hour. minutes.
submenu.
until the message Time Minutes
appears in the multifunction display.
141
Controls in detail
Control system
Select automatic time change (Daylight 왘 Move the selection marker with
Saving Time (DST) summer/Standard button æ or ç to the Time/Date
time winter) submenu.
This function can be seen in vehicles with 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
audio system, or in vehicles with until the message Date Set MM appears
COMAND* if the time synchronization with in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the month
왘 Move the selection marker with setting.
submenu. 왘 Press button æ or ç to select if
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly the changeover between summer and
until the message Change-over winter time should be automatic or
Summer / Winter time appears in the manual.
Set the date (month)
setting. This function can be seen in vehicles with
audio system, or in vehicles with
COMAND* if the time synchronization with
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the
month.
i
For information on setting the date,
refer to the separate COMAND
operating instructions.
142
Controls in detail
Control system
Set the date (day) The selection marker is on the day Set the date (year)
setting.
This function can be seen in vehicles with This function can be seen in vehicles with
audio system, or in vehicles with audio system, or in vehicles with
COMAND* if the time synchronization with COMAND* if the time synchronization with
head unit* feature was set to Off. head unit* feature was set to Off.
i i
Vehicles with COMAND*: Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the date, For information on setting the date,
refer to the separate COMAND refer to the separate COMAND
operating instructions. operating instructions.
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the

왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
day.
button æ or ç to the Time/Date button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu. submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Date Set day until the message Date Set YY appears
appears in the multifunction display. in the multifunction display. 컄컄
143
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 The selection marker is on the year Lighting submenu Set daytime running lamp mode
setting. (USA only)
Access the Lighting submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Lighting i
submenu to change the lamp and lighting
This function is not available in
settings on your vehicle.
countries where the daytime running
The following functions are available: lamp mode is mandatory and therefore
in a constant mode.
Function Page
Set daytime running lamp mode 144 왘 Move the selection marker with
(USA only) button æ or ç to the Lighting
Set locator lighting 145 submenu.
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the Set night security illumination 146 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
year.
Set interior lighting delayed 147 until the message Hdlamp mode appears
shut-off in the multifunction display.
144
Controls in detail
Control system
The selection marker is on the current In low ambient light conditions the Set locator lighting
setting. following lamps will switch on additionally:
With the locator lighting feature activated
앫 Parking lamps and the exterior lamp switch in
position U, the following lamps will
앫 Tail lamps
switch on during darkness when the vehi-
앫 License plate lamps cle is unlocked with the SmartKey:
앫 Side marker lamps 앫 Parking lamps
For more information on the daytime 앫 Tail lamps
running lamp mode, see “Lighting”
(컄 page 114).
왘 Press button æ or ç to select i
앫 Front fog lamps
manual operation (Manual) or daytime For safety reasons, resetting the set-
running lamp mode (Constant) tings to factory settings (컄 page 135) The locator lighting switches off when the
activated. while driving will not deactivate the driver’s door is opened.
daytime running lamp mode. If you do not open a door after unlocking
With daytime running lamp mode activated
and the exterior lamp switch in The following message appears in the the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps
position M or U, the low beam multifunction display: will switch off automatically after approxi-
headlamps are switched on when the Lighting - Cannot be completely mately 40 seconds.
engine is running. reset to factory sets. while 왘 Move the selection marker with
driving. button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu. 컄컄
145
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Set night security illumination i

until the message Surround lighting (Headlamps delayed shut-off) You can reactivate this function within
appears in the multifunction display. 10 minutes by opening a door.
Use this function to set whether or not the
The selection marker is on the current exterior lamps illuminate during darkness
setting. after exiting the vehicle and all doors 왘 Move the selection marker with
closed. button æ or ç to the Lighting
With the delayed shut-off feature activated submenu.
and the exterior lamp switch in 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
position U before the engine is turned until the message Hdlamp delay off
off, the following lamps will switch on appears in the multifunction display.
when the engine is turned off and remain
lit for approximately 15 seconds:
setting.
앫 Parking lamps
앫 Tail lamps
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
the locator lighting function On.
position U when exiting the vehicle 앫 Front fog lamps
(컄 page 114).
If after turning off the engine you do not
The locator lighting feature is open a door or do not close an opened
activated. door, the lamps will automatically switch
off after 60 seconds.
146
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch Set interior lighting delayed shut-off 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
the delayed shut-off feature Off or On. the delayed shut-off feature Off or On.
Use this function to set whether or not the
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to interior lighting to remains lit during dark-
Vehicle submenu
position U before turning off the ness for approximately 10 seconds after
engine (컄 page 114). you have removed the SmartKey from the Access the Vehicle submenu via the
starter switch. Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu
The headlamps delayed shut-off
to make general vehicle settings.
feature is activated. 왘 Move the selection marker with
You can temporarily deactivate the button æ or ç to the Lighting The following function is available:
delayed shut-off feature: submenu.
Function Page
왘 Before exiting the vehicle, turn the Set automatic locking 147
until the message Int. light delay
SmartKey in the starter switch to
off appears in the multifunction
position 0. Set automatic locking
display.
왘 Then turn it to position 2 and back to Use this function to activate or deactivate
position 0. the automatic central locking. With the
setting.
The delayed shut-off feature is automatic central locking system
deactivated. It will reactivate as soon activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at
as you reinsert the SmartKey in the vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
starter switch. (15 km/h).
button æ or ç to the Vehicle
submenu. 컄컄
147
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Convenience submenu Activate easy-entry/exit feature

until the message Automatic door lk.
Access the Convenience submenu via the Use this function to activate and
appears in the multifunction display.
Settings menu. Use the Convenience deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature
The selection marker is on the current submenu to change the settings for a (컄 page 39).
setting. number of convenience features.
The following functions are available: Warning! G
Function Page You must make sure no one can become
Activate easy-entry/exit feature 148 trapped or injured by the moving steering
Set parking position for exterior 149 wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
rear view mirror activated.
To cancel steering wheel movement, do one
of the following:
앫 Move steering column stalk
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch (컄 page 38).
the automatic central locking On or Off. 앫 Press memory position switch
(컄 page 112).
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
148
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Move the selection marker with Set parking position for exterior rear 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
button æ or ç to the view mirror until the message Mirror set.
Convenience submenu. parking aid appears in the
Use the Mirror set. parking aid function
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly to select whether the passenger-side
until the message Easy-entry feature exterior rear view mirror should be turned The selection marker is on the current
appears in the multifunction display. downward during parking maneuvers when setting.
reverse gear R is engaged. For additional
information, see “Activating exterior rear
setting.
view mirror parking position”
(컄 page 170).
button æ or ç to the
Convenience submenu.

function On or Off.
the easy-entry feature On or Off.
149
Controls in detail
Control system
Trip computer menu Fuel consumption statistics after start i

왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly All statistics stored since the last
Use the trip computer menu to call up
until the first function of the trip engine start will be reset approximately
statistical data on your vehicle.
computer menu appears in the 4 hours after the SmartKey in the
The following information is available: multifunction display. starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
Function Page 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message After start appears Resetting will not occur if you turn the
Fuel consumption statistics after 150
in the multifunction display. SmartKey back to position 1 or 2
start
within this time period.
Fuel consumption statistics 151
since last reset
Distance to empty 151
1 Distance driven since start

2 Time elapsed since start
3 Average speed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start
150
Controls in detail
Control system
Fuel consumption since last reset Resetting fuel consumption statistics Distance to empty
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33).
until the first function of the trip until the first function of the trip
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
computer menu appears in the computer menu appears in the
until the first function of the trip
multifunction display. multifunction display.
computer menu appears in the
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly multifunction display.
until the message After reset appears until the reading that you want to reset 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
in the multifunction display. appears in the multifunction display. until the message Distance appears in
왘 Press and hold the reset button in the the multifunction display.
instrument cluster (컄 page 122) until
The calculated range based on the
the value is reset to 0.
current fuel tank level appears in the
1 Distance driven since last reset

2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average speed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since last
reset
151
Controls in detail
Control system
TEL menu* 앫 If the telephone is off, the message

Never operate radio transmitters equipped
PHONE OFF appears in the multifunction
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
display.
Warning! G out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is 앫 If the telephone is on:
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
A driver’s attention to the road must always The telephone will then search for a
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system,
be his/her primary focus when driving. For network. During this time the multi-
possibly resulting in an accident and
your safety and the safety of others, we function display is empty.
personal injury.
recommend that you pull over to a safe
As soon as the telephone has found a
location and stop before placing or taking a
You can use the functions in the TEL menu network, the message READY appears in
telephone call. If you choose to use the
to operate your telephone, provided it is the multifunction display.
telephone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the connected to a hands-free system and
telephone when weather, road and traffic switched on.
conditions permit. 왘 Switch on the telephone and Audio or
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from COMAND*.
using a cellular telephone while driving a 왘 Press button ÿ or è on the
vehicle. steering wheel repeatedly until the
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph message TEL appears in the
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is multifunction display.
covering a distance of 44 feet Which messages will appear in the
(approximately 14 m) every second. This standby message indicates that your
multifunction display depends on whether
telephone is ready for use and you can
your telephone is switched on or off:
operate it using the control system.
152
Controls in detail
Control system
Answering a call Ending a call 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly

until the desired name appears in the
When your telephone is ready to receive 왘 Press button t.
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
You have ended the call. The standby
the multifunction display you will then see The stored names are displayed in
message appears in the multifunction
the message: ascending or descending alphabetical
display.
order.
Dialing a number from the phone book
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
until the message TEL appears in the
왘 Press button j or k.
왘 Press button s.
The control system reads the phone 1 Name from the phone book 컄컄
You have answered the call. The
duration of the call appears in the book which is stored in the telephone.
multifunction display. This may take several minutes. The
message Please wait appears in the
i multifunction display.
If you do not wish to accept a call, When the message Please wait
press button t. disappears, the phone book has been
loaded.
153
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 i Redialing
If you press and hold button j The control system stores the most
or k for longer than 1 second, the recently dialed phone numbers. This
system scrolls rapidly through the list eliminates the need to search through your
of names until you release the button entire phone book.
again.
Cancel the quick search mode by until the message TEL appears in the
pressing button t. multifunction display.
왘 Press button s.
왘 Press button s. 앫 If no connection is made, the
control system stores the dialed The first number in the redial memory
The system dials the selected phone appears in the multifunction display.
number. number in the redial memory.
앫 If the connection is successful, the until the desired name appears in the
name of the party you called and multifunction display.
the duration of the call will appear
in the multifunction display. 왘 Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
154
Controls in detail
왔 Automatic transmission
For more information on driving with an
automatic transmission see “Automatic Warning! G
transmission” (컄 page 45).
Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear structing the pedals’ range of movement.
shifting process to your individual driving Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
style by continually adjusting the shift cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
points up or down. These shift point adjust- the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
ments are performed based on current have sufficient clearance.
operating and driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the i Gearshift pattern for automatic
automatic transmission reacts by transmission
During the brief warm-up, transmission
adjusting its shift program. The automatic transmission selects indi-
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
vidual gears automatically, depending on:
catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperature. 앫 the gear selector lever
position D (컄 page 157) with
gear ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 (컄 page 160)
앫 the selected program mode (M/C/S)
(컄 page 161) and (컄 page 165)
앫 the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄 page 158)
앫 the vehicle speed
155
Controls in detail
An additional indication of the current gear !

selector lever position can be found on the Allow engine to warm up under low
cover of the shifting-gate. load use. Do not place full load on the
The indicators come on when you activate engine until the operating temperature
a switch (e.g. unlocking the vehicle or has been reached.
opening a door) and go out after approxi- Shift into reverse gear R or parking
mately 15 minutes. position P only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Warning! G Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
1 Current gear range/gear selector lever extended period when driving off on
position It is dangerous to shift the gear selector slippery road surfaces. This may cause
2 Current program mode lever out of P or N if the engine speed is serious damage to the drivetrain which
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
The current gear range/gear selector lever firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
position and program mode (M/C/S) Limited Warranty.
accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
appear in the multifunction display. could lose control of the vehicle and hit
When the gear selector lever is in
someone or something. Only shift into gear
position D, you can influence transmission
when the engine is idling normally and when
shifting by:
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
앫 limiting the gear range
앫 changing gears manually
156
Controls in detail
Gear selector lever position Effect Effect

The SmartKey can only be ë Neutral
Effect removed from the starter switch
No power is transmitted from the
ì Park position with the gear selector lever in
engine to the drive axle. When
position P. With the SmartKey
Gear selector lever position the brakes are released, the
removed, the gear selector lever
when the vehicle is parked. Place vehicle can be moved freely
is locked in position P.
gear selector lever in position P (pushed or towed).
only when vehicle is stopped. If the vehicle’s electrical system To avoid damage to the trans-
The park position is not intended is malfunctioning, the gear mission, never engage N while
to serve as a brake when the selector lever could remain driving.
vehicle is parked. Rather, the locked in position P
driver should always set the (컄 page 388). If the ESP® is deactivated or
parking brake in addition to malfunctioning:
í Reverse gear
placing the gear selector lever in Move gear selector lever to N
position P to secure the vehicle. Place gear selector lever in only if the vehicle is in danger of
position R only when vehicle is skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
stopped. ê Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All five forward
gears are available.
157
Controls in detail
! Driving tips
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any Warning! G
other reason with gear selector lever Accelerator position
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
in N can result in transmission damage
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it Your driving style influences the
that is not covered by the
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave transmission’s shifting behavior:
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Less throttle Earlier upshifting
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
More throttle Later upshifting
Warning! G could move the gear selector lever from
position P, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. Kickdown
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in position P Use kickdown when you want maximum
is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not acceleration.
intended to or capable of preventing your 왘 Press the accelerator past the point of
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people resistance.
or objects.
The transmission shifts into a lower
Always set the parking brake in addition to
gear.
shifting to position P (컄 page 54).
왘 Ease on the accelerator when you have
When parked on an incline, turn the front
reached the desired speed.
wheels towards the road curb.
The transmission shifts up again.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
158
Controls in detail
Stopping Maneuvering Working on the vehicle

When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights: When you maneuver in tight areas,
왘 Leave the transmission in gear.
e.g. when pulling into a parking space: Warning! G
왘 Control the vehicle speed by gradually
왘 Hold the vehicle with the brake. When working on the vehicle, set the
releasing the brakes.
When you stop longer with the engine parking brake and move gear selector lever
왘 Accelerate gently. to position P. Otherwise the vehicle could
idling and/or on an hill:
왘 Never abruptly step on the accelerator. roll away.
왘 Set the parking brake.
왘 Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
159
Controls in detail
Gear ranges The selected gear range appears in the Effect

multifunction display (컄 page 156). If you
With the gear selector lever in position D press on the accelerator when the engine ç The transmission shifts through
and driving in the automatic shift has reached its rpm limit, the transmission second gear only.
program C or S (컄 page 161), you can will upshift beyond any gear range limit Allows the use of engine’s
select a gear range for the automatic selected. braking power when driving:
transmission to operate within:
앫 on steep downgrades
Gear selector lever (컄 page 162): Effect
앫 in mountainous regions
You can limit the gear range by pressing é The transmission shifts through
the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and fourth gear only. 앫 under extreme operating
reverse the gear range limit by pressing è The transmission shifts through conditions
the gear selector lever to the right (D+). third gear only. æ The transmission operates in
Steering wheel gearshift control With this selection you can use first gear only.
(컄 page 163): the braking effect of the engine. For maximum use of engine’s
You can limit the gear range by pressing braking effect on very steep or
the respective downshift button on the lengthy downgrades.
steering wheel gearshift control, and
reverse the gear range limit by pressing
the respective upshift button on the
steering wheel gearshift control.
160
Controls in detail
Automatic shift program The current gear selector lever position 왘 Press program mode selector
and the selected program mode (C/S) are switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of
The program mode selector switch is indicated in the multifunction display the desired program mode appears in
located on the lower part of the center (컄 page 156). the multifunction display.
console.
! Select C for comfort driving:
Never change the program mode when 앫 The vehicle starts out in second
the gear selector lever is out of gear (both forward and reverse) for
position P. This could result in a gentler starts. This does not apply if
change of driving characteristics for full throttle is applied or gear
which you may not be prepared. range 1 is selected.
앫 Traction and driving stability are
i improved on icy roads.
The last selected program 앫 Upshifts occur earlier even when
mode (C or S) is switched on when the you give more gas. The engine then
1 Program mode selector switch engine is restarted. operates at lower rpms and the
M Manual For manual gear shifting, wheels are less likely to spin.
see “Manual shift pro-
gram” (컄 page 165)
C Comfort For comfort driving
S Sport For standard driving
161
Controls in detail
Gear selector lever one-touch Downshifting Upshifting

gearshifting
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to
Even with an automatic transmission, you Warning! G the right in the D+ direction.
can change the gears manually and limit or The transmission will shift from the current
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
extend the gear range for automatic shift- gear to the next higher gear as permitted
in order to obtain braking action. This could
ing with the gear selector lever in by the shift program. This action simul-
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
position D and driving in the automatic taneously extends the gear range of the
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
program mode C or S. transmission.
prevent this type of loss of control.
! Canceling gear range limit
Allow engine to warm up under low 왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to
왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever
load use. Do not place full load on the the left in the D- direction.
in the D+ direction until D reappears in
engine until the operating temperature The transmission will shift from the current the multifunction display.
has been reached. gear to the next lower gear as permitted by
The transmission will shift from the current
Shift into reverse gear R or parking the shift program. This action simulta-
gear range directly to gear range D.
position P only when the vehicle is neously limits the gear range of the
stopped. transmission (컄 page 160).
Shifting into optimal gear range
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an i 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever
extended period when driving off on To avoid overrevving the engine when in the D- direction.
slippery road surfaces. This may cause the gear selector lever is moved to
serious damage to the drivetrain which The transmission will automatically select
the D- direction, the transmission will
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz the gear range suited for optimal
not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
Limited Warranty. acceleration and deceleration. This may
max. speed would be exceeded.
involve shifting down one or more gears.
162
Controls in detail
Steering wheel gearshift control ! The steering wheel gearshift buttons are
one-touch gearshifting Allow engine to warm up under low located to the left and right of the steering
load use. Do not place full load on the wheel.
The steering wheel gearshift control pro- engine until the operating temperature
vides an alternative method for changing has been reached.
the gears manually and limiting or extend-
ing the gear range for automatic shifting Shift into reverse gear R or parking
with the gear selector lever in position D position P only when the vehicle is
and driving in the automatic program stopped.
mode C or S. Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
i slippery road surfaces. This may cause
For information on using the steering serious damage to the drivetrain which
wheel gearshift control in manual pro- is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz 1 Left button: downshift
gram mode M, see “Manual shift pro- Limited Warranty. 2 Right button: upshift
gram” (컄 page 165).
i
i You cannot shift with the steering
To avoid overrevving the engine when wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
downshifting with steering wheel selector lever is in position P, N or R.
gearshift buttons, the transmission will The last selected program
not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s mode (C or S) is switched on when the
max. speed would be exceeded. engine is restarted in the automatic
program mode.
163
Controls in detail
The following instructions describe opera- Downshifting The transmission will shift to the next
tion of the steering wheel gearshift control higher gear as permitted by the shift
when driving in the automatic program
mode C or S.
Warning! G program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the transmission
when you are driving in the automatic
For instructions on operating the steering On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
program mode (C or S).
wheel gearshift control and gear selector in order to obtain braking action. This could
lever in the manual program mode M, see result in drive wheel slip and reduced
Canceling gear range limit
“Manual shift program” (컄 page 165). vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control. 왘 Press and hold button 2 on the right
side of the steering wheel until D
왘 Briefly press button 1 on the left side reappears in the multifunction display.
of the steering wheel. The transmission will shift from the current
The transmission will shift to the next gear range directly to gear range D.
lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously limits Shifting into optimal gear range
the gear range of the transmission 왘 Press and hold button 1 on the left
(컄 page 160) when you are driving in the side of the steering wheel.
automatic program mode (C or S).
The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal
Upshifting
acceleration and deceleration. This may
왘 Briefly press button 2 on the right involve shifting down one or more gears.
side of the steering wheel.
164
Controls in detail
Manual shift program ! The program mode selector switch is

Allow engine to warm up under low located on the lower part of the center
In addition to the automatic shift load use. Do not place full load on the console.
program C or S, your vehicle is equipped engine until the operating temperature
with the manual shift program M. has been reached.
In the manual program mode M, Shift into reverse gear R or parking
system-controlled automatic gearshifting position P only when the vehicle is
is switched off and you need to change the stopped.
gears by manually upshifting or downshift-
ing using the steering wheel gearshift but- Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
tons to the left and right of the steering extended period when driving off on
wheel (컄 page 163) or the gear selector slippery road surfaces. This may cause
lever. serious damage to the drivetrain which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz 1 Program mode selector switch
Limited Warranty. M Manual For manual gear shifting
C Comfort For comfort driving
S Sport For standard driving
165
Controls in detail
The current gear selector lever position Activating manual shift program Upshifting
and the selected program mode (M/C/S)
왘 Press program mode selector !
are indicated in the multifunction display
switch 1 repeatedly until the M for the
(컄 page 156). In the manual program mode M, the
manual program mode M appears in
transmission will not upshift, even if
i the multifunction display.
the engine has reached its overrevving
For information on automatic program The transmission switches to the range. Shift up to the next gear before
modes C or S, see “Automatic shift manual program mode M. Automatic the engine has reached its overrevving
program” (컄 page 161), “Gear selector shifting is switched off. The gear range range. Make absolutely certain that the
lever one-touch gearshifting” is not limited. engine speed does not reach the red
(컄 page 162), and “Steering wheel You can change the gears manually when marking on the tachometer
gearshift control one-touch gearshift- the gear selector lever is in position D. You (컄 page 24). Otherwise the engine
ing” (컄 page 163). can upshift or downshift through the gears could be damaged which is not covered
in succession. by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i
The manual program mode M will not
be stored. When the engine is turned
off with the manual program mode M
selected, the transmission will go to
the automatic program mode (C or S)
when the engine is restarted.
166
Controls in detail
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to Downshifting Kickdown

the right in the D+ direction.
Using the kickdown when driving in the
or Warning! G manual program mode M is not possible.
왘 Briefly press button 2 on the right
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift Deactivating manual shift program
side of the steering wheel
(컄 page 163). 왘 Press the program mode selector
The transmission shifts to the next switch (컄 page 165) repeatedly
higher gear. until C or S appears in the multifunction
prevent this type of loss of control.
display.
If, instead of the manual program mode
or
symbol M, the p symbol appears in the 왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to
multifunction display (컄 page 156), shift to the left in the D- direction. 왘 Restart the engine.
the next higher gear. The fuel supply will
or The transmission will go to the
otherwise be interrupted to prevent the
왘 Briefly press button 1 on the left side automatic program mode (C or S).
engine from overrevving.
of the steering wheel (컄 page 163). The manual program mode M is not
stored.
The transmission shifts to the next
lower gear.
i
When you brake or stop, the transmis-
sion shifts down to a gear from which
you can easily accelerate or take off.
167
Controls in detail
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode)
If vehicle acceleration becomes less re-

sponsive or sluggish or the transmission
no longer shifts, the transmission is most
likely operating in limp-home (emergency
operation) mode. In this mode only second
gear and reverse gear can be selected.
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
왘 Move gear selector lever to P.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Wait at least 10 seconds before
restarting.
왘 Restart the engine.
왘 Move gear selector lever to position D
(for second gear) or R.
왘 Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
168
Controls in detail
Good visibility
왔 Good visibility
For information on the windshield wipers, i Rear view mirrors
see “Windshield wipers” (컄 page 50). The headlamps will automatically be
For more information on setting the rear
cleaned when you have
Headlamp cleaning system* view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 40).
앫 switched on the headlamps
The button is located on the left side of the and Auto-dimming rear view mirrors
dashboard.
앫 operated the windshield wipers The reflection brightness of the exterior
with windshield washer fluid rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
15 times the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when
When you switch off the ignition, the
counter resets. 앫 the ignition is switched on
and
For information on filling up the washer 앫 incoming light from headlamps falls on
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system the sensor in the interior rear view
and headlamp cleaning system*” mirror.
(컄 page 304).
1 Headlamp washer button The rear view mirror will not react if
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33). 앫 reverse gear R is engaged
왘 Press button 1. 앫 the interior lighting is turned on
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
169
Controls in detail
Good visibility
! Activating exterior rear view mirror

Warning! G Electrolyte drops coming into contact parking position
with the vehicle paint finish can be Follow these steps to activate the mirror
The auto-dimming function does not react if
completely removed only while in the parking position so that the passenger-
incoming light is not aimed directly at
liquid state and by applying plenty of side exterior rear view mirror will be turned
sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
water. downward to the stored position.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not The buttons are located above the exterior
react, for example, if the rear window Warning! G lamp switch.
sunshade* is in raised position.
Glare can endanger you and others. Exercise care when using the passen-
ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
Warning! G for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may interior rear view mirror or glance over your
escape from the mirror housing if the mirror shoulder before changing lanes.
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
allow the liquid to come into contact with button
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view
In case it does, immediately flush affected mirror button
area with water, and seek medical help if
왘 Make sure you have stored a parking
necessary.
position for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror (컄 page 113).
170
Controls in detail
Good visibility
왘 Make sure the Mirror set. parking Sun visors 1 Mounting

aid function in the Convenience 2 Mirror cover
submenu of the control system is The sun visors protect you from sun glare 3 Mirror lamp
switched to On (컄 page 149). while driving. 4 Sun visor
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33). 왘 Swing sun visor 4 down when you
왘 Press button 2 for the passenger-side
Warning! G experience glare.
exterior rear view mirror. 왘 To use illuminated mirror, lift up mirror
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
왘 Place the gear selector lever in reverse Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
cover 2.
gear R. while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare i
can endanger you and others.
The passenger-side exterior rear view If sun visor 4 is disengaged from
mirror will be turned downward to the mounting 1 with mirror cover 2
stored position. open, mirror lamp 3 will switch off.
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
previously stored driving position: i
앫 10 seconds after you shifted out of re- If sunlight enters through a side
verse gear R window, close mirror cover 2
(if open), disengage sun visor 4 from
앫 immediately once your vehicle exceeds mounting 1 and pivot to the side.
a speed of approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h)
앫 immediately when you press button 1
for the driver’s side mirror
171
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window sunshade* !

Warning! G Make sure the movement of the rear
window sunshade is not restricted by
Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
objects on the rear window shelf. Oth-
erwise, the sunshade or the objects
When operating the rear window sunshade, with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
could be damaged.
make sure there is no danger of anyone be- children unattended in the vehicle, or with
ing harmed by the raising or lowering proce- access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment can cause an 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33).
dure.
accident and/or serious personal injury. Always raise the sunshade fully for its
The raising or lowering procedure can be
immediately halted by briefly pressing the support against the window frame.
switch. The switch is located in the center console.
Raising or lowering the sunshade
Briefly press switch again to raise or lower
the rear window sunshade completely. 왘 Press switch 1 briefly.
The sunshade is raised or lowered com-
pletely.
Stopping the raising or lowering

procedure
왘 Press switch 1 again.
The sunshade stops.
1 Rear window sunshade switch
172
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster Activating !

왘 Press button F or 1 in the If the rear window defroster switches
The rear window defroster uses a large off too soon and the indicator lamp
climate control panel (컄 page 175) or
amount of power. To keep the battery starts flashing, this means that too
automatic climate control panel*
drain to a minimum, switch off the many electrical consumers are
(컄 page 185).
defroster as soon as the rear window is operating simultaneously and there is
clear. The indicator lamp on the button
insufficient voltage in the battery. The
comes on.
The defroster is automatically deactivated system responds automatically by
after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of op- deactivating the rear window defroster.
Deactivating
eration depending on the outside tempera- As soon as the battery has sufficient
ture. 왘 Press button F or 1 again. voltage, the rear window defroster
The indicator lamp on the button goes automatically turns itself back on.
Warning! G out.
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be

removed from the rear window before
driving. Visibility could otherwise be
impaired, endangering you and others.
173
Controls in detail
Climate control
174
Controls in detail
Climate control
Item Item
1 Left side defroster vent, fixed 1 Air volume control
2 Left side air vent, adjustable 2 Left side temperature control
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control 3 Right side temperature control
for left side air vent 4 Air distribution control
4 Thumbwheel for air volume control 5 Rear window defroster
for left center air vent
6 AC cooling on/off
5 Left center air vent, adjustable
Climate control panel (USA only)
7 Air distribution and air volume
6 Right center air vent, adjustable (automatic mode)
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control 8 Air recirculation
for right center air vent
9 Front defroster
8 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right side air vent
9 Right side air vent, adjustable
a Right side defroster vent, fixed
b Climate control panel
Climate control panel (Canada only)

i
For draft-free ventilation, move the
sliders for the air vents 2, 5, 6
and 9 to the middle position.
175
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational when- Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and i
ever the engine is running. You can oper- odors are filtered out before outside air en- Severe conditions (e.g. strong air
ate the climate control system in either the ters the passenger compartment through pollution) may require replacement of
automatic or manual mode. The system the air distribution system. the filter before its scheduled interval.
cools or heats the interior depending on A clogged filter will reduce the air
The air conditioning will not engage (no
the selected interior temperature and the volume to the interior.
cooling) if the mode A/C is deactivated
current outside temperature.
(컄 page 182). If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off, see
Warning! G Warning! G “Summer opening feature”
(컄 page 241). The climate control will
When operating the climate control, the air
Follow the recommended settings for heat- then adjust the interior temperature to
that enters the passenger compartment
ing and cooling given on the following pag- the set value much faster.
through the air vents can be very hot or very
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
cold (depending on the set temperature). Keep the air intake grille in front of the
impairing visibility and endangering you and
This may cause burns or frostbite on unpro- windshield free of snow and debris.
others.
tected skin in the immediate area of the air Do not obstruct air flow by placing
vents. Always keep sufficient distance be- objects on the air flow-through exhaust
tween unprotected parts of the body and the slots below the rear window.
air vents. If necessary, use the air distribu-
tion control (컄 page 178) to direct the air to
air vents in the vehicle interior that are not
in the immediate area of unprotected skin.
176
Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating the climate control Operating the climate control system 왘 Use temperature controls 2 and 3
system in automatic mode (컄 page 175) to separately adjust the
air temperature on each side of the
i passenger compartment.
Warning! G When operating the climate control The temperature of the vehicle interior
system in automatic mode, you will is adjusted automatically.
When the climate control is switched off, the
only rarely need to adjust the tempera-
outside air supply and circulation are also
ture, air volume and air distribution. Deactivating
switched off. Only choose this setting for a
short time. Otherwise the windows could In automatic mode, cooling with dehu- 왘 Press button U (컄 page 175) again.
fog up, impairing visibility and endangering midify is switched on. This function can
The indicator lamp on the button goes
you and others. be switched off if necessary.
out. The automatic operation of air vol-
ume and air distribution switches off.
Deactivating Activating
왘 Set air volume control 1 (컄 page 175) 왘 Press button U (컄 page 175) while
to position 0. the engine is running.
The indicator lamp on the button
Reactivating comes on. The air volume and air distri-
왘 Set air volume control 1 (컄 page 175) bution are adjusted automatically.
to any speed.
177
Controls in detail
Climate control
Setting the temperature Decreasing Adjusting air distribution and volume

왘 Turn temperature control 2 and/or
Use temperature controls 2 and 3 Use air distribution control 4
3 (컄 page 175) slightly counterclock-
(컄 page 175) to separately adjust the air (컄 page 175) to adjust the air distribution.
wise.
temperature on each side of the passenger The following symbols are located on the
compartment. You should raise or lower The climate control system will corre- controls:
the temperature setting in small incre- spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). perature. Symbol Function
The climate control will adjust to the set a Directs air through the center,
temperature as fast as possible. i side and rear passenger
If you turn the temperature control compartment air vents
Increasing counterclockwise until it stops for one Z Directs air to the windshield
side of the vehicle, you decrease the and the side defroster vents
왘 Turn temperature control 2 and/or
temperature for the other side at the
3 (컄 page 175) slightly clockwise. b Directs air into the entire
same time.
The climate control system will corre- vehicle interior
spondingly adjust the interior air tem- Y Directs air to the footwells
perature.
왘 Press button U (컄 page 175).
i
If you turn the temperature control The indicator lamp on the button goes
clockwise until it stops for one side of out. The automatic air distribution is
the vehicle, you increase the tempera- switched off. The air distribution is
ture for the other side at the same controlled according to the selected
time. control setting.
178
Controls in detail
Climate control
왘 Turn air distribution control 4 Adjusting air volume Activating

(컄 page 175) to the desired symbol.
왘 Press button P or 0
Six blower speeds are available.
(컄 page 175).
Opening center and side air vents 왘 Press button U (컄 page 175).
왘 Turn thumbwheels 3, 4, 7 and 8 The indicator lamp in the button goes comes on.
(컄 page 175) upward. out. The automatic air volume control
The air conditioning switches
The center air vents 5 and 6 and side is switched off. The air volume is
automatically to the following functions:
air vents 2 and 9 are open. adjusted according to the currently
selected setting. 앫 maximum blowing and heating
Closing center and side air vents power
왘 Use the air volume control 4
왘 Turn thumbwheels 3, 4, 7 and 8 (컄 page 175) to adjust the air volume. 앫 air flows onto the windshield and
(컄 page 175) downward. the front side windows
Front defroster 앫 the air recirculation mode is
The center air vents 5 and 6 and side
air vents 2 and 9 are closed. switched off
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
Deactivating
You can also defog the windshield and the
side windows. 왘 Press button P or 0
(컄 page 175) again.
i
Keep this setting selected only until the out. Defrosting is turned off.
windshield or the side windows are
clear again. i
The cooling remains switched on.
179
Controls in detail
Climate control
Windshield fogged on the outside Air recirculation mode Activating

왘 Press button , (컄 page 175).
i Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
Keep this setting selected only until the unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle The indicator lamp on the button
windshield is clear again. from the outside (e.g. before driving comes on.
through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the i
왘 Switch the windshield wipers on
(컄 page 50). air in the passenger compartment. The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside tempera-
왘 Press button U (컄 page 175). tures.
Warning! G
The indicator lamp on button , is
comes on. Air distribution and air vol- Fogged windows impair visibility, endanger- not lit when the air recirculation mode
ume are adjusted automatically. ing you and others. If the windows begin to is automatically switched on.
If the automatic mode of the climate con- fog on the inside, switching off the air A quantity of outside air is added after
trol is switched off: recirculation mode immediately should clear approximately 30 minutes.
interior window fogging. If interior window
왘 Turn air distribution control 4
fogging persists, make sure the air
to a or Y (컄 page 175).
conditioning (컄 page 182) is activated, or
Warning! G
press button P or 0.
Never operate the side windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof if there is the possibility
of anyone being harmed by the closing pro-
cedure.
180
Controls in detail
Climate control
In the event that the closing procedure

Deactivating i
causes potential danger, the closing of the 왘 Press button , (컄 page 175). Press and hold button , for approx.
side windows can be immediately halted by 2 seconds. The side windows and or
pressing or pulling the respective window tilt/sliding sunroof will return to their
out.
switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding previous position. You can release
sunroof can be immediately halted by i button , once the opening proce-
moving the tilt/sliding sunroof switch in the The air recirculation mode is deactivat- dure has begun. The windows and
overhead control panel in any direction. ed automatically: tilt/sliding sunroof continue opening
until they have reached their previous
The closing of the side windows and
앫 after 5 minutes if the outside position.
tilt/sliding sunroof can be reversed by again
temperature is below
pressing and holding the , button. A window or tilt/sliding sunroof will
approximately 41°F (5°C)
only return to its previous position if it
앫 after 5 minutes if the air condition- has not been moved to another posi-
i
ing is turned off tion using the respective window
Press and hold button , for approx.
앫 after 30 minutes if the outside switch or tilt/sliding sunroof switch af-
2 seconds. The side windows and
temperature is above ter it was closed with button ,. A
tilt/sliding sunroof will close. You can
approximately 41°F (5°C) window or tilt/sliding sunroof that was
release button , once the closing
moved will remain in its current posi-
procedure has begun. The windows
tion if button , is used to re-open
and tilt/sliding sunroof continue clos-
the remaining windows or tilt/sliding
ing until they are fully closed.
sunroof.
181
Controls in detail
Climate control
Air conditioning Deactivating Activating

It is possible to deactivate the air condi- Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
The cooling function, only operational
tioning (cooling) function of the climate dehumidify the air with the air condition-
when the engine is running, cools the vehi-
control system. The air in the vehicle will ing.
cle interior down to the selected tempera-
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
ture. The cooling function also 왘 Press button 2 (컄 page 175).
dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior, 왘 Press button 2 (컄 page 175). The indicator lamp on the button
thus preventing the windows from fogging The indicator lamp on the button goes comes on.
up. out.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
i The cooling function switches off after R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
Condensation may drip out from under- a short delay. which are harmful to the ozone layer.
neath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
!
If the air conditioning cannot be turned
on again, this indicates that the air
Warning! G conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
compressor has turned itself off.
If you turn off the cooling function, the Have the air conditioning checked at
vehicle will not be cooled when weather the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
conditions are warm. The windows can fog Center.
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
182
Controls in detail
Climate control
Rear passenger compartment The air vents for the rear passenger Adjusting air distribution
adjustable air vents compartment are located in the rear
왘 Push the slide for the left center
center console.
vent 1 or right center vent 3 to the
The air conditioning for the rear passenger
left, right, up or down.
compartment is controlled via the climate
control panel (컄 page 174). The air flow is directed in the corre-
sponding direction.
i
The temperature at the center air vents i
for the rear passenger For draft-free ventilation, push
compartment 1 and 3 is the same as slides 1 and 3 upward.
at the dashboard center air vents.
Adjusting air volume
1 Left center air vent 왘 Turn thumbwheel 2 up or down.
2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
center air vents The air volume is increased or
3 Right center air vent decreased.
183
Controls in detail
184
Controls in detail
Item Item
1 Left side defroster vent, fixed 1 Left side air distribution control
2 Left side air vent, adjustable 2 Front defroster
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control 3 Temperature control, left, raising
for left side air vent 4 Display
4 Thumbwheel for air volume control 5 Air volume control, raising
for left center air vent
6 Temperature control, right, raising
5 Left center air vent, adjustable
Automatic climate control panel
7 Rear window defroster
6 Right center air vent, adjustable
8 Right side air distribution control
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent 9 Charcoal filter
8 Thumbwheel for air volume control a AC cooling on/off
for right side air vent Residual heat/ventilation
9 Right side air vent, adjustable b Temperature control, right, lowering
a Right side defroster vent, fixed c Air volume control, lowering
b Automatic climate control panel d Temperature control, left, lowering
e Air recirculation
i f Automatic climate control on/off
For draft-free ventilation, move the (complete system)
sliders for the air vents 2, 5, 6,
g Air distribution and air volume
and 9 to the middle position.
(automatic mode)
185
Controls in detail
The automatic climate control is operation- Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and i
al whenever the engine is running. You can odors are filtered out before outside air Severe conditions (e.g. strong air
operate the automatic climate control sys- enters the passenger compartment pollution) may require replacement of
tem in either the automatic or manual through the air distribution system. the filter before its scheduled interval.
mode. The system cools or heats the inte- A clogged filter will reduce the air
The air conditioning will not engage (no
rior depending on the selected interior volume to the interior.
cooling) if the mode A/C is deactivated
temperature and the current outside tem-
(컄 page 194). If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
perature.
the interior before driving off, see
Warning! G “Summer opening feature”
Warning! G (컄 page 241). The automatic climate
Follow the recommended settings for control will then adjust the interior
When operating the automatic climate
heating and cooling given on the following temperature to the set value much fast-
control, the air that enters the passenger
pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up, er.
compartment through the air vents can be
impairing visibility and endangering you and
very hot or very cold (depending on the set Keep the air intake grille in front of the
others.
temperature). This may cause burns or frost- windshield free of snow and debris.
bite on unprotected skin in the immediate Do not obstruct air flow by placing
area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient objects on the air flow-through exhaust
distance between unprotected parts of the slots below the rear window.
body and the air vents. If necessary, use the
air distribution control (컄 page 189) to
direct the air to air vents in the vehicle
interior that are not in the immediate area of
unprotected skin.
186
Controls in detail
Deactivating the automatic climate Operating the automatic climate con- Activating
control system trol system in automatic mode
왘 Press button U (컄 page 185) while
the engine is running.
i
Warning! G When operating the automatic climate
comes on. The air volume and air distri-
control system in automatic mode, you
When the automatic climate control is bution are adjusted automatically.
will only rarely need to adjust the
switched off, the outside air supply and cir-
temperature, air volume and air
culation are also switched off. Only choose
distribution.
this setting for a short time. Otherwise the
windows could fog up, impairing visibility In automatic mode, cooling with dehu-
and endangering you and others. midify is switched on. This function can
be switched off if necessary.
Deactivating 1 Temperature, left
왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 185).
i 2 Blower speed
The automatic climate control system 3 Temperature, right
The indicator lamp on the button can be switched on or off separately for
comes on. 왘 Use temperature controls 3 and
the left and right sides of the passenger
d or 6 and b (컄 page 185) to sepa-
compartment, as required.
Reactivating rately adjust the air temperature on
each side of the passenger compart-
왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 185).
ment.
The temperature of the vehicle interior
out.
is adjusted automatically.
187
Controls in detail
Deactivating Increasing Decreasing

왘 Press button U (컄 page 185) again. 왘 Press temperature button 3 왘 Press temperature button b
and/or 6 (컄 page 185) until the de- and/or d (컄 page 185) until the de-
sired temperature appears in the con- sired temperature appears in the con-
out. The automatic operation of air vol-
trol panel display 4 (컄 page 185). trol panel display 4 (컄 page 185).
ume and air distribution switches off.
The automatic climate control system The automatic climate control system
Setting the temperature will correspondingly adjust the interior will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature. air temperature.
Use temperature controls 3 and d for
the left side or 6 and b for the right side i i
(컄 page 185) to separately adjust the air If you increase the temperature for one If you decrease the temperature for
temperature on each side of the passenger side of the vehicle to the highest ad- one side of the vehicle to the lowest ad-
compartment. You should raise or lower justable value then you will see the justable value then you will see the
the temperature setting in small incre- message HI in the display. This also in- message LO in the display. This also de-
ments, preferably starting at 22°C (72°F). creases the temperature for the other creases the temperature for the other
The automatic climate control will adjust side of the vehicle at the same time. side of the vehicle at the same time.
to the set temperature as fast as possible.
188
Controls in detail
Adjusting air distribution 왘 Turn air distribution control 1 or 8 Opening center and side air vents
(컄 page 185) to the desired symbol.
왘 Turn thumbwheels 3, 4, 7 and 8
Use air distribution controls 1 and 8
The indicator lamp on the button U (컄 page 184) upward.
(컄 page 185) to separately adjust the air
(컄 page 185) goes out.
distribution on each side of the passenger The center air vents 5 and 6 and side
compartment. The following symbols are The automatic air distribution is air vents 2 and 9 (컄 page 185) are
found on the controls: switched off. The air distribution is open.
controlled according to the selected
Symbol Function control setting. Closing center and side air vents
a Directs air through the center,
i 왘 Turn thumbwheels 3, 4, 7 and 8
side and rear passenger (컄 page 184) downward.
compartment air vents You can also turn the air distribution
control to a position between two sym- The center air vents 5 and 6 and side
Z Directs air to the windshield bols. air vents 2 and 9 (컄 page 184) are
and the side defroster vents closed.
b Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior
Y Directs air to the footwells
189
Controls in detail
Adjusting air volume Front defroster The air conditioning switches

automatically to the following functions:
Use button U (컄 page 185) for auto- You can use this setting to defrost the
앫 cooling on to dehumidify
matic mode or air volume controls windshield, for example if it is iced up.
or Q (컄 page 185) to adjust air volume You can also defog the windshield and the 앫 maximum blowing and heating
manually. side windows. power
Seven blower speeds are available. 앫 air flows onto the windshield and
i
the front side windows
왘 Press button to decrease Keep this setting selected only until the
or Q (컄 page 185) to increase air windshield or the side windows are 앫 the air recirculation mode is
volume to the desired level. clear again. switched off
The indicator lamp on the button U
Activating Deactivating
goes out.
왘 Press button P(컄 page 185). 왘 Press button P (컄 page 185) again.
The automatic air distribution remains
switched on. The indicator lamp on the button The indicator lamp on the button goes
comes on. out.
The previous settings are once again in
effect.
i
The cooling remains switched on.
190
Controls in detail
Windshield fogged on the outside Air recirculation mode Activating

왘 Press button , (컄 page 185).
i Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
Keep this setting selected only until the unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle The indicator lamp on the button
windshield is clear again. from the outside (e.g. before driving comes on.
through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the i
왘 Switch the windshield wipers on
(컄 page 50). air in the passenger compartment. The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside tempera-
If the automatic mode of the automatic cli- tures.
mate control is switched off: Warning! G
The indicator lamp on the button ,
왘 Turn air distribution control 1 or 8 Fogged windows impair visibility, endanger- is not lit when the air recirculation
to a or Y (컄 page 185). ing you and others. If the windows begin to mode is automatically switched on.
fog on the inside, switching off the air A quantity of outside air is added after
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL recirculation mode immediately should clear approximately 30 minutes.
interior window fogging. If interior window
If the left and right air distribution controls
fogging persists, make sure the air
as well as the airflow volume control are
conditioning (컄 page 185) is activated, or
set to U (컄 page 185) and there is a
press button P.
high need for cooling, the display
“MAXCOOL” appears.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior (when side windows
and tilt/sliding sunroof are closed).
191
Controls in detail
i Deactivating
Warning! G Press and hold button , for approx. 왘 Press button , (컄 page 185) again.
2 seconds. The side windows and
Never operate the side windows and the The indicator lamp on the button goes
tilt/sliding sunroof will close. You can
tilt/sliding sunroof if there is the possibility out.
release button , once the closing
of anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure has begun. The windows i
procedure.
and tilt/sliding sunroof continue clos- The air recirculation mode is deactivat-
In the event that the closing procedure ing until they are fully closed.
causes potential danger, the closing of the ed automatically:
side windows can be immediately halted by 앫 after 5 minutes if the outside tem-
pressing or pulling the respective window perature is below
switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding approximately 5°C (41°F)
sunroof can be immediately halted by
앫 after 5 minutes if the air condition-
moving the tilt/sliding sunroof switch in the
ing is turned off
overhead control panel in any direction.
앫 after 30 minutes if the outside tem-
perature is above approximately
5°C (41°F)
pressing and holding the button ,.
192
Controls in detail
i Charcoal filter Activating

Press and hold button , for approx. 왘 Press button e (컄 page 185).
An activated charcoal filter markedly
2 seconds. The side windows and or
reduces bad odors and removes pollutants The indicator lamp on the button
tilt/sliding sunroof will return to their
from air entering the passenger compart- comes on.
previous position. You can release
ment. The charcoal filter can be activated
button , once the opening proce- i
or deactivated.
dure has begun. The windows and The activated charcoal filter should be
tilt/sliding sunroof continue opening The system switches automatically to the
switched off when windows fog up on
until they have reached their previous air recirculation mode, if the
the inside, or if the passenger compart-
position. 앫 charcoal filter is switched on ment needs to be quickly heated or
A window or tilt/sliding sunroof will 앫 carbon monoxide (CO) or nitrogen cooled down.
only return to its previous position if it oxide (NOX) concentration of the out-
has not been moved to another posi- side air increases beyond a predeter- i
tion using the respective window mined level The activated charcoal filter should be
switch or tilt/sliding sunroof switch af-
switched off when windows fog up on
ter it was closed with button ,. i the inside, or if the passenger compart-
A window or tilt/sliding sunroof that The automatic air recirculation mode ment needs to be quickly heated or
was moved will remain in its current po- does not function if the A/C mode is cooled down.
sition if button , is used to re-open deactivated (indicator lamp on
the remaining windows or tilt/sliding button 9 not lit), or if the
sunroof. outside temperature has fallen
below 5°C (41°F).
193
Controls in detail
i Air conditioning
Warning! G Press and hold button e for approx.
The cooling function, only operational
2 seconds. The side windows and or
Never operate the side windows and the when the engine is running, cools the vehi-
tilt/sliding sunroof will return to their
tilt/sliding sunroof if there is the possibility cle interior down to the selected tempera-
previous position. You can release
of anyone being harmed by the closing pro- ture. The cooling function also
button e once the opening proce-
cedure. dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
dure has begun. The windows and
In the event that the closing procedure thus preventing the windows from fogging
tilt/sliding sunroof continue opening
causes potential danger, the closing of the up.
until they have reached their previous
side windows can be immediately halted by position.
pressing or pulling the respective window
i
switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding A window or tilt/sliding sunroof will Condensation may drip out from under-
sunroof can be immediately halted by only return to its previous position if it neath the vehicle. This is normal and
moving the tilt/sliding sunroof switch in the has not been moved to another posi- not an indication of a malfunction.
overhead control panel in any direction. tion using the respective window
switch or tilt/sliding sunroof switch af-
ter it was closed with button e. A Warning! G
window or tilt/sliding sunroof that was
pressing and holding the button e. moved will remain in its current posi- If you turn off the cooling function, the
tion if button e is used to re-open vehicle will not be cooled when weather
Deactivating the remaining windows or tilt/sliding conditions are warm. The windows can fog
sunroof. up more quickly. Window fogging may
왘 Press button e (컄 page 185).
impair visibility and endanger you and
The indicator lamp on the button goes others.
out.
194
Controls in detail
Deactivating The air conditioning uses the refrigerant i

R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs How long the system will provide
It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
which are harmful to the ozone layer. heating depends on
tioning (cooling) function of the automatic
climate control system. The air in the ! 앫 the coolant temperature
vehicle will then no longer be cooled or
If the air conditioning cannot be turned 앫 the temperature set by the operator
dehumidified.
on again, this indicates that the air
왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 185). conditioning is losing refrigerant. The The blower will run at speed setting 1
compressor has turned itself off. regardless of the air distribution
The indicator lamp on the button goes control setting.
out. Have the air conditioning checked at
The cooling function switches off after the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Activating
a short delay. Center.
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 33).
Activating Residual heat and ventilation 왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 185).
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can With the engine switched off, it is possible The indicator lamp on the button
dehumidify the air with the air condi- to continue to heat or ventilate the interior comes on.
tioning. for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 185) again. use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
comes on.
195
Controls in detail
Deactivating The air vents for the rear passenger Adjusting air distribution
compartment are located in the rear
왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 185). 왘 Push the slide for the left center
center console.
vent 1 or right center vent 3 to the
left, right, up, or down.
out.
The residual heat is automatically turned The air flow is directed in the
off: corresponding direction.
앫 when the ignition is switched on i

앫 after about 30 minutes For draft-free ventilation, push
slides 1 and 3 upward.
앫 if the battery voltage drops
Adjusting air volume
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents 1 Left center air vent 왘 Turn thumbwheel 2 up or down.
2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
center air vents The air volume is increased or
The air conditioning for the rear passenger decreased.
compartment is controlled via the auto- 3 Right center air vent
matic climate control panel (컄 page 185).
i
The temperature at the center air vents
for the rear passenger
compartment 1 and 3 is the same as
at the dashboard center air vents.
196
Controls in detail
Audio system
왔 Audio system
Audio and telephone, operation Operating safety
These instructions are intended to help

you become familiar with your Warning! G
Mercedes-Benz audio system. They con-
tain useful tips and a detailed description Any alterations made to electronic
of the user functions. components can cause malfunctions.
The radio, amplifier, CD changer*, satellite
Warning! G radio* and telephone* are interconnected.
When one of the components is not opera-
In order to avoid distraction which could tional or has not been removed/replaced
lead to an accident, the driver should enter properly, the function of other components
system settings with the vehicle at a may be impaired.
standstill and operate the system only when This condition might seriously impair the
road and traffic conditions permit. Always operating safety of your vehicle.
pay full attention to traffic conditions first
We recommend that you have any service
before operating system controls while
work on electronic components carried out
driving.
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
197
Controls in detail
Audio system
Operating and display elements
198
Controls in detail
Audio system

1 CD changer mode selector 214 9 Speed dialing memory g Soft keys 200
(telephone) in descending h Volume 201
AUX mode selector 205
order
2 Single CD mode selector 218 j Switching on/off 200
a Accepting a call 227
3 Radio mode selector (telephone) k Manual tuning/seek tuning 207
(radio)
4 Mute function (radio) 208 b Telephone mode selector 223
Track search, reverse (CD) 221
Pause (CD) 222 c Speed dialing memory 224
5 Volume distribution 203 (telephone) in ascending l Manual tuning/seek tuning 207
order (radio)
6 Sound settings 201
d Terminating a call 228 Track search, 221
7 Display fast forward (CD)
(telephone)
8 Alphanumeric keypad
e CD slot
f CD ejection 218
199
Controls in detail
Audio system
Button and soft key operation Operation i

If the radio is switched on without the
In these instructions, the alphanumeric
Switching the unit on/off SmartKey in the starter switch, it will
keypad (right side of radio panel) and the
automatically switch off again after
function buttons (left side of radio panel)
Switching on approx. 30 minutes.
are referred to as “buttons”. The four keys
below the display panel are referred to as 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch If your vehicle is equipped with a
“soft keys”. to position 1 or 2. telephone, the display may prompt you
to enter your PIN (GSM network) or
! 왘 If the audio system was on as you
code (TDMA or CDMA network).
removed the SmartKey from the starter
Do not press directly in the display
switch, the audio system will
face. Otherwise, the display will be
automatically come back on as you
damaged.
turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2.
or
왘 Press M button.
200
Controls in detail
Audio system
Switching off i
왘 Remove SmartKey from starter switch. If your vehicle equipment includes a
Mercedes-Benz specified mobile
or
telephone*, you can adjust its volume
왘 Press M button. separately from the volume of the
audio system while the telephone is
i being used.
Should excessively high temperatures
왘 Press + or – soft key to increase or
occur while the audio system is being Adjusting sound functions decrease tone level accordingly.
operated, the display will dim. If tem-
peratures continue to rise, HIGH TEMP The bass and treble functions are called up or
will appear in the display, after which by pressing the O button.
왘 Press RES soft key briefly to reset bass
the audio system will be switched off Settings for bass and treble are stored tones to their center level.
for a cooling-down period. separately for the AM and FM wavebands,
The radio switches back to the
weather band, CD mode and telephone
standard radio menu 8 seconds after
Adjusting the volume mode.
the last soft key is pressed.
왘 Turn rotary control of N button.
Bass
The volume will increase or decrease
왘 Press O button repeatedly until
depending on the direction turned.
BASS appears in the display.
201
Controls in detail
Audio system
Adjusting treble Sound system* 왘 Press X or Y soft key repeatedly

until the desired sound setting has
왘 Press O button repeatedly until You can either program the sound settings
been reached.
TREBLE appears in the display. manually (컄 page 201) or choose settings
via preset sound characteristics. The sound is set accordingly.
You can select from among the following or
settings: 왘 Press RES soft key briefly.
앫 STANDARD: conventional stereo sound.
The sound setting is reset depending
앫 SURROUND: the sound is set for better on the sound source activated.
three-dimensional acoustic character-
앫 Radio mode: STANDARD
istics.
왘 Press + or – soft key to increase or 앫 CD/AUX mode: SURROUND
decrease tone level accordingly. 앫 SPEECH: the sound is optimized for the
spoken word. 앫 Telephone: SPEECH
or
왘 Press O button repeatedly until The radio switches back to the
왘 Press RES soft key briefly to reset treble
STANDARD, SURROUND, or SPEECH appears standard radio menu 8 seconds after
tones to their center level.
in the display. the last soft key is pressed.
202
Controls in detail
Audio system
Returning sound functions to factory Vehicles with sound system*:

settings
The sound setting is reset depending
왘 Press O button to call up settings on the sound source activated.
menu in the display.
앫 Radio mode: STANDARD
앫 CD/AUX mode: SURROUND
앫 Telephone: SPEECH
왘 Press V or W soft key.
standard radio menu 4 seconds The volume is distributed accordingly
after the last soft key is pressed. between the front and rear of the
vehicle.
왘 Press RES soft key briefly; the respec- Adjusting volume distribution
or
tive sound function is reset to its center Call up fader and balance functions by
level. 왘 Press RES soft key briefly.
pressing the P button.
or The fader is reset to its center level.
Fader The radio switches back to the
왘 Press and hold RES soft key until RESET
appears in the display. 왘 Press P button repeatedly until standard radio menu 8 seconds after
FADER appears in the display. the last soft key is pressed.
The sound settings for bass and treble
are returned to their center level and
the volume is set to a predefined level.
203
Controls in detail
Audio system
Adjusting balance Returning volume distribution to Telephone* muting

factory settings
왘 Press P button repeatedly until If your vehicle equipment includes a
BALANCE appears in the display. 왘 Press P button to call up settings Mercedes-Benz specified mobile
menu in the display. telephone*, you can adjust its volume
separately from the volume of the audio
system while the telephone is being used.
왘 Press X or Y soft key.

왘 Press RES soft key briefly; the
The volume is distributed between the
respective volume distribution is reset
left and right sides of the vehicle.
to its center (flat) level.
or
or
왘 Press RES soft key briefly.
왘 Press and hold RES soft key until RESET
The balance is reset to its center level. appears in the display.
The radio switches back to the The volume distribution settings for
standard radio menu 8 seconds after fader and balance are set to their
the last button is pressed. center level.
204
Controls in detail
Audio system
Connecting an external audio source Radio operation Calling up wavebands for radios
(AUX) to the radio* without SAT
An optional dealer-installed cinch-connec- Selecting radio mode 왘 Press FM or AM soft key to switch
tor* for connecting an external audio between FM and AM.
왘 Press b button.
source may become available for your
The FM and AM wavebands are called
vehicle model. Feature description is
Calling up wavebands up one after another.
based on preliminary information at time
of printing. Contact an authorized You can choose from among the FM, AM or
Mercedes-Benz Center for availability. and WB wavebands. 왘 Press WB soft key.
You can adjust the volume (컄 page 201), Weather band (컄 page 208). The weather band menu is called up.
the sound settings (컄 page 201) and the
volume distribution (컄 page 203) for the i The waveband currently selected
AUX input. FM waveband: 87.7......107.9 MHz appears in the upper left-hand corner
of the display.
AM waveband: 530......1710 KHz
Calling up AUX mode
왘 Press and hold Q button until AUX
appears in the display.
Canceling AUX mode

왘 Press any audio source button.
205
Controls in detail
Audio system
Calling up wavebands for radios Selecting a station Direct frequency input

with SAT
The following options are available for 왘 Select desired waveband.
왘 Press FM, AM, or WB soft key repeatedly selecting a station:
until desired waveband has been
앫 Direct frequency input (컄 page 206)
selected.
앫 Manual tuning (컄 page 207)
The FM, AM, and WB wavebands are
called up one after another. 앫 Automatic seek tuning (컄 page 207)
The waveband currently selected 앫 Scan search (컄 page 207)
appears in the upper left-hand corner 앫 Station memory (컄 page 207)
of the display. 왘 Press * button.
앫 Automatic station memory (Autostore)
왘 Enter desired frequency with
(컄 page 208)
buttons 1 to R.
The station search proceeds in the
following frequency increments: i
앫 200 KHz in FM range You can only enter frequencies within
the respective waveband.
앫 10 KHz in AM range
If a button is not pressed within
4 seconds, the radio will return to the
last station tuned.
206
Controls in detail
Audio system
Manual tuning Scan search Station memory

왘 Select desired waveband. 앫 Starting scan search You can store ten AM and ten FM stations
in the memory.
왘 Press S or T button for approx. 왘 Select desired waveband.
3 seconds. 앫 Storing stations
왘 Press button repeatedly until desired 왘 Tune in desired station.
frequency has been reached.
왘 Press and hold desired station
Step-by-step station tuning takes place button 1 to R until a brief
in ascending or descending order. Each signal tone is heard.
time the button is pressed, the radio
The frequency is stored on the
tunes further by 0.2 MHz. During
selected station button.
manual tuning, the radio is muted. 왘 Press SC soft key.
앫 Calling up stations
SC will appear in the display. The
Automatic seek tuning radio briefly tunes in all receivable 왘 Press desired station button 1
왘 Select desired waveband. stations on the waveband selected. to R briefly.
왘 Press S or T button briefly. 앫 Ending scan search
The radio will tune to the next highest 왘 Press SC soft key or S or T.
or next lowest receivable frequency. The station last played will be
selected and SC disappears from
i
the display.
If no station is received after two
consecutive scans of the complete
frequency range, then the scan stops
at the frequency from which it began.
207
Controls in detail
Audio system
Autostore – automatic station memory 앫 Calling up stations Weather band

The Autostore memory function provides 왘 Press desired station button 1
an additional memory level. The station to R.
memory for manually stored stations is not
앫 Leaving the Autostore memory level
overwritten.
왘 Press FM or AM soft key briefly.
앫 Calling up Autostore memory level and
storing stations Interrupting radio mode
The radio mode is interrupted by an 왘 Press WB soft key.
incoming call on the telephone*
The weather band station last received
(컄 page 227).
is tuned in.
앫 Mute on
왘 Press U button. Selecting a weather band station
directly
The radio mode is interrupted and
왘 Press AS soft key briefly. 왘 Select desired weather band station
MUTED appears in the display.
The radio switches to the Autostore with buttons 1 to 7.
앫 Mute off
memory level. AS and SEARCH If a station cannot be tuned in, a search
appear in the display and the radio 왘 Press U button. is automatically started.
finds the ten stations with the The radio mode is again active.
strongest signals. These stations
are stored on the station
buttons 1 to R in order of
signal strength.
208
Controls in detail
Audio system
Search Scan search Introduction to satellite radio*

(USA only)
왘 Press S or T button to tune in 앫 Starting scan search
the next receivable weather band
왘 Press SC soft key. SIRIUS satellite radio provides 100 chan-
station.
SC will appear in the display. The nels of digital-quality radio, among others
i radio briefly tunes in all receivable music, sports, news, and entertainment,
weather band stations. free of commercials. SIRIUS satellite radio
If no weather band station is received
uses a fleet of high-power satellites to
after three consecutive scans of the 앫 Ending scan search broadcast 24 hours per day, coast to
complete frequency range, then the
scan stops at the channel with which it 왘 Press SC soft key or S or T. coast, in the contiguous U.S.
began and NO WB FOUND appears in the The weather band station last This diverse, satellite-delivered program-
display. played will be selected and SC ming is available for a monthly subscrip-
disappears from the display. tion fee.
If this happens, switch back to
For more information and service
standard radio mode.
availability, call the SIRIUS Service
Center (컄 page 210), or contact
www.siriusradio.com
209
Controls in detail
Audio system
i i Calling up the SAT main menu

Additional satellite radio equipment Satellite radio service may be unavail- 왘 Press SAT soft key.
and a subscription to a satellite radio able or interrupted from time to time
SAT is displayed in the upper left-hand
service provider are required for the for a variety of reasons, such as envi-
corner of the display.
satellite radio operation described ronmental or topographic conditions
here. and other things beyond the service Prior to activation of the satellite radio
provider’s or our control. Service might service (컄 page 210).
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for details and availability for also not be available in certain places After activation of satellite radio
your vehicle. (e.g., in tunnels, parking garages, or service (컄 page 211).
within or next to buildings) or near
Note that categories and channels other technologies. Prior to activation of the satellite radio
shown in illustrations are dependent on
service
programming content delivered by the Program categories
service provider. Programming content
is subject to change. Therefore, The channels are categorized. Categories
channels and categories shown in allow you to tune to stations broadcasting
illustrations and descriptions a certain type of program (category mode)
contained in this manual may differ (컄 page 212).
from the channels and categories
delivered by the service provider.
The telephone number of the SIRIUS
Service Center (888-539-7474) is
displayed.
210
Controls in detail
Audio system
왘 Press ESN soft key. i Selecting a station

The twelve-digit electronic serial The system will tune to a default The following options are available:
number (ESN) of the SAT tuner* station if no station had been selected
앫 Selecting a station using the selected
installed in your vehicle is displayed. previously.
category (컄 page 212).
This information is required to call the 앫 Tuning via station presets
SIRIUS Service Center for an activation (컄 page 211).
request.
앫 Tuning via scan search (컄 page 213).
i 앫 Tuning via manual channel input
Credit card information may also be (컄 page 212).
required for your application.
앫 Tuning via the program category list
The activation process takes approxi- (컄 page 212).
mately 5 to 10 minutes after calling the The first channel 001 is called up and the
SIRIUS Service Center. PTY system changes to All categories. Tuning via station presets
If no station can be received, ACQUIRING Ten satellite radio station presets are
After activation of the satellite radio appears in the display. available.
service
If the Satellite radio service is not You can access the presets via number
The satellite radio main menu appears. activated, ACQUIRING will also appear in the keys.
The radio station selected last is audible, radio display and NO SAT will appear in the
provided it can be received. multifunction display.
211
Controls in detail
Audio system
Accessing via number keys 왘 Press * button. 앫 Selecting a category

왘 Enter number of preset you wish to Input line appears in the main radio 왘 Press PTY soft key.
select, e.g. 1. menu.
The radio plays the station stored 왘 Use number keys to enter desired
under this number and the PTY function channel within 8 seconds, e.g. 1
changes to the category corresponding 6.
to the station. The system tunes to channel 16.
Tuning via manual channel input The station you have selected begins to
play.
The current PTY category of the
i station is displayed.
You can only enter available channel 왘 Press <<< or >>> soft key.
numbers. This switches between the
individual categories.
Tuning via the program category list
When changing the category, the
Example: tuning in channel 16 The category list contains all currently channel selected last in the new
receivable categories of programs. It is category becomes audible.
arranged alphabetically.
212
Controls in detail
Audio system
The system will automatically switch to Tuning via scan search Obtaining additional text information
a station of the selected category if the
Scan search is characterized as follows: Additional text information (artist, title)
currently selected station is not of the
related to the current channel can be
selected category. Otherwise, the 앫 Scan search plays a channel for
displayed.
currently selected station remains approx. 8 seconds and then skips to
tuned. the next channel within the current cat- 왘 Press INF soft key.
egory. The title being played is displayed.
앫 Tuning a station within the selected
category 앫 Scan search can be terminated
왘 Press INF soft key again.
manually.
The channels identified for the The name of the artist performing the
currently selected category are 왘 Press SC soft key.
title being played is displayed.
arranged numerically. Only one entry is The search starts. SC appears in the
visible at a time. display. i
왘 Press S or T button briefly. If a button is not pressed within
왘 Press SC soft key again.
4 seconds, the radio will return to the
The next station within the category The search stops. standard display.
is started.
or
왘 Press and hold S or T
button for approx. 3 seconds until
desired station has been reached.
213
Controls in detail
Audio system
Storing stations Calling up the ESN information menu CD mode

왘 Tune in desired station. 왘 Press INF soft key.
왘 Press and hold desired station 왘 Press ESN soft key. Safety precautions
button 1 to R until a brief signal The twelve-digit electronic serial
tone is heard. number (ESN) of the SAT tuner* Warning! G
The frequency is stored on the selected installed in your vehicle is displayed.
The single CD player and the CD changer*
station button.
왘 Press RET soft key to exit the menu. are Class 1 laser products. There is a danger
The radio saves the current station at of invisible laser radiation if the housing is
the memory preset selected. The opened or damaged.
memory preset selected appears in the Do not open the housing. The single CD
status line, e.g. S3. player and the CD changer* do not contain
any parts that can be serviced by the user.
i For safety reasons, have any service work
There are ten presets available. which may be necessary performed only by
An existing entry is overwritten in the qualified personnel.
memory list when a new entry is given.
214
Controls in detail
Audio system
! Do not use CDs with an 8 cm diameter, not

Warning! G If you affix stickers to the CDs, they can even with a CD adapter. Attempting to play
become warped due to the heat that CDs with an 8 cm diameter or playing such
In order to avoid distraction which could CDs with an adapter may cause damage to
develops in the CD drive or
lead to an accident, the driver should insert the CD drive. Such damage is not covered
CD changer*.
CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
In certain situations, the CDs can then
operate the audio system only if permitted
no longer be ejected and cause Should excessively high or low tempera-
by road, weather and traffic conditions.
damage to the drive. Such damage is tures occur while in CD changer mode*,
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz CD ERROR will appear in the display, and the
(approximately 50 km/h), your car covers a
Limited Warranty. CD will be muted until the temperature has
distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)
every second. reached an acceptable level for the system
! to continue operation.
General notes Your CD drive or CD changer* has been The single CD player play audio CDs, the
designed to play CDs which CD changer* can play audio CDs as well as
The system may not be able to play audio correspond to the EN 60908 standard. CDs with MP3 files.
CDs with copy protection. You can therefore only use CDs with a
Playing copied CDs may cause maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.
malfunctions during playback. If you insert thicker data carriers, e.g.
ones that have data on both sides (one
side with DVD data, the other side with
audio data), they cannot be ejected and
will damage the drive.
215
Controls in detail
Audio system
Tips on handling CDs MP3 notes Compatible MP3 data carriers

앫 Handle CDs carefully to prevent The CD changer* can play audio CDs as The CD changer can read the following
interference during playback. well as CDs with MP3 files. data carriers in MP3 mode:
앫 Avoid scratches, fingerprints and dust 앫 CD-DA
Information on MP3 data carriers
on the CDs. 앫 CD-R
앫 Do not write on CDs or apply any labels i 앫 CD-RW
or other material to them. CD media, CD burning software and
앫 Clean CDs from time to time with a CD writers are available in great vari- Compatible file systems and compres-
commercially available cleaning cloth. ety. Due to this variety, it cannot be sion methods
Never wipe the CD in a circular motion; guaranteed that the CD changer will be
able to play every user-written CD. Use Romeo or Joliet. Depending on file for-
instead, wipe it in a straight line start-
mat used, up to 128 characters are possi-
ing in the center and moving outward. The burning process can lead to data ble.
Do not use solvents, anti-static sprays, errors and aging of the medium may re-
etc. for cleaning. sult in data loss. Therefore, the The following compression methods are
CD changer may be restricted in its compatible:
앫 Replace the CD in its case after use.
ability to play MP3 data carriers; it may 앫 MP3
앫 Protect CDs from heat and direct play them with reduced sound quality,
sunlight. 앫 WMA
or it may not be able to play them at all.
앫 WAV
Problems may be encountered during
playback of user-written CDs with a
storage capacity of more than 700 MB.
These CDs do not meet valid standards
as of this printing.
216
Controls in detail
Audio system
Compatible bit and sampling rates Information on copyright MP3 playback

Fixed and variable bit rates of up to The music tracks that you create for use in You can play a CD with MP3 files on the
320 kBit/s are possible. MP3 mode or that you play in MP3 mode CD changer* as you would any standard
are subject to copyright laws under appli- audio CD. All of the functions described for
The following table lists possible sampling
cable international and national regula- the CD changer also apply for the playback
rates:
tions. of CDs with MP3 files. Keep in mind that
MPEG1 44.1 KHz, 48 KHz, the single CD player in the audio system
In many countries, the reproduction of
Audio Layer3 32 KHZ unit is not able to read CDs with MP3 files.
copyrighted materials is not permitted,
MPEG2 22.5 KHz, 24 KHz, even if only for personal use, without the The first 99 tracks on the CD, including
Audio Layer3 16 KHz express prior consent of the copyright tracks in subdirectories, are recognized
holder. and played. Any additional tracks will not
MPEG2.5 11.025 KHz,
Please check the current copyright laws be played.
Audio Layer3 12 KHz, 8 KHz
for your country and comply with them. i
WMA 32 KHz, 44.1 KHz,
48 KHz These restrictions do not apply, for exam- Due to the branched data structure,
ple, to your own compositions and record- playback of the first track may be de-
ings, or for recordings for which layed slightly.
i
authorization has been obtained from the
Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of
copyright holder.
128 kBit/s or higher and with the spec-
ified sampling rates.
The use of rates other than those spec-
ified may lead to noticeably inferior
sound quality.
217
Controls in detail
Audio system
Operating the single CD player in the ! i

audio system unit If a CD is already loaded, it must be If you do not take the CD out of the CD
ejected before inserting a new CD. slot within approx. 15 seconds, the
Loading a CD Inserting a second CD in the slot with system automatically pulls the CD back
The single CD player in the audio system another CD still loaded will cause dam- in and plays it.
unit has capacity for one CD. The CD slot age to the CD drive not covered by the
If a CD is pulled back in, press
for loading the drive is located underneath Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
EJECT button for 5 seconds; the CD
the soft keys. will then be ejected.
i
i
If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or Operational readiness of CD changer*
Keep in mind that the single CD player
cannot be read, WRONG CD ERROR will ap-
in the audio system unit is not able to If a CD changer* has been installed in the
pear in the display.
read CDs with MP3 files. vehicle, it can be operated from the front
control panel of the audio system.
Ejecting a CD A loaded magazine must be installed to
왘 Make sure the system is switched on.
왘 Make sure the system is switched on. play CDs.
왘 Insert CD into CD slot. The label side of
the CD must face upwards. 왘 Press EJECT button. The CD changer* is located in the glove
box.
The system automatically pulls the CD The system ejects the CD. NO CD will
into the CD slot. The audio CD begins appear in the display.
to play. 왘 Remove CD from slot.
218
Controls in detail
Audio system
Loading/unloading the CD magazine 왘 Remove magazine 4 and pull Playing CDs

CD tray 3 fully out.
i Single CD player in the audio unit
왘 Place CD 1 in recess of tray, label side
The CD changer* may not be able to
up. 왘 Press i button.
play audio CDs with copy protection.
왘 Push tray into magazine in direction of CD 0 will appear in the upper left-hand
왘 Slide changer door to the right and arrow. corner of the display.
press g button. The CD will resume playback at the point
i
Magazine will be ejected. where it was switched off.
CDs which have been inserted
improperly or are unreadable will not
CD changer*
be played.
왘 Press Q button.
왘 Push magazine into CD changer* 2 in CD and the selected magazine slot
direction of arrow and close sliding number appear in the upper left-hand
door. corner of the display.
If you have not removed a CD since the last
time the CD audio source was activated,
the last CD listened to will begin to play at
1 CD the point where it was switched off.
2 CD changer After the last track on a CD has finished,
3 CD tray the next CD is automatically played.
4 CD magazine
219
Controls in detail
Audio system
Playing tracks Selecting CDs in the audio unit with CD i

changer* If there is no CD in the selected
You have the following options:
magazine slot, NO CD appears in the
앫 Audio system with CD changer*:
display with the corresponding slot
selecting CDs
number.
앫 Direct track entry
앫 Track skip forward/reverse Direct track entry
앫 Fast forward/reverse
앫 Scan 왘 You can select from among the
앫 Random tracks inserted CDs with buttons
R to 6.
앫 Repeat track
R = CD player in the audio unit
1 to 6 = CDs in the
CD changer* You can make a direct selection from
The magazine slot number of the among the tracks on a CD.
selected CD appears next to CD in the 왘 Press * button.
display, and the number of the
왘 Enter track number using buttons 1
currently played track appears next
to R.
to TRACK.
The number of the track being played
appears next to TRACK in the display.
You can only enter available track
numbers.
220
Controls in detail
Audio system
Skipping tracks forward/backward Fast forward/reverse Random play

앫 Skipping tracks forward 앫 Fast forward The random function (RDM) plays the
tracks of the current CD in random order.
왘 Press S button briefly. 왘 Press and hold S button until
The next track will be played. desired point has been reached. i
앫 Reverse When you start the RDM function, the
앫 Skipping tracks backward
왘 Press and hold T button until RPT function is automatically switched
왘 Press T button briefly. off.
desired point has been reached.
If the track has been playing for
more than 10 seconds, the unit i 앫 Switching on random
skips back to the beginning of the The track number and the relative time 왘 Press RDM soft key.
track currently playing. If less than of the track is shown in the display
10 seconds have been played, the during the search. RDM appears in the display.
unit skips back to the beginning of A randomly selected track is
the previous track. Scan played.
Pressing the T or S button 앫 Switching off random
앫 Starting scan
repeatedly will result in multiple tracks 왘 Press RDM soft key again.
왘 Press SC soft key.
being skipped.
SC will appear in the display.
Each track on the current CD will be
played for approx. 8 seconds in as-
cending order.
앫 Ending scan
왘 Press SC soft key or T or S.
221
Controls in detail
Audio system
Repeat Pause function Track and time display

The track being played is repeated until the The CD changer mode is interrupted by an
repeat function is switched off. incoming call on the telephone*
(컄 page 227).
i
앫 Switching on pause function
When you start the RPT function, the
RDM function is automatically
switched off.
왘 Press T soft key.
앫 Switching on repeat
The number of the track being played
왘 Press RPT soft key. and the elapsed playing time appear in
RPT appears in the display. the display.
앫 Switching off repeat 왘 Press U button. 왘 Press T soft key again.
왘 Press RPT soft key again. The CD changer mode is The total number of tracks and the total
interrupted and PAUSE appears in playing time of the CD appear in the
the display. display.
앫 Switching off pause function 왘 Press T soft key.
왘 Press U button. The standard CD playback menu
The CD changer mode is active appears in the display.
again.
222
Controls in detail
Audio system
GSM network phones Switching on the telephone PIN entry
Using your Mercedes-Benz specified Switching on the telephone

mobile telephone*, a number of functions
왘 Press h button.
and operating steps can be performed and
displayed in the audio system display. If the telephone was previously
switched off, PROCESSING appears in
Further operating instructions not covered
the display and you will then be
here can be found in the operating instruc-
prompted to enter your PIN.
tions for the multifunction steering wheel 왘 Enter PIN number using buttons 1
and the cellular telephone*. to R.
Switching off the telephone
If your audio system is set up for telephone 왘 If necessary, correct number entered
왘 Press h button for approximately
operation, the t symbol will appear in with the CLR soft key. Press soft key
3 seconds.
the display. briefly to delete the last digit entered;
PROCESSING appears in the display until
When you insert your Mercedes-Benz press soft key and hold to delete the
the telephone is off. Afterward,
specified mobile telephone* into the complete number.
PHONE OFF appears in the display.
telephone cradle, you will be prompted to 왘 Press OK soft key after entering correct
enter your PIN for 30 seconds PIN.
(컄 page 223). This display disappears
when you press any button. 왘 READY or ROAMING will appear in the
display.
When your mobile telephone is inserted
into the telephone cradle, you will see the
reception strength in the upper right-hand
223
Controls in detail
Audio system
i Placing a call 왘 If necessary, correct number entered

If the PIN is entered incorrectly three with the CLR soft key. Press soft key
times, NEED PUK will appear in the Entering a telephone number and briefly to delete the last digit entered;
display. Enter PUK via your telephone. starting the dialing process press soft key and hold to delete the
Please refer to the separate telephone complete number.
operating instructions for more 왘 After correct telephone number has
information. been entered, press s button.
Adjusting the volume i

If the telephone number has been
왘 Turn rotary control of N button
saved together with a name in the
during a telephone call.
왘 Enter desired telephone number using telephone book, the name will appear
The volume will increase or decrease buttons 1 to R. in the display.
depending on the direction turned.
The number can have up to 32 digits, Phone book
i but only twelve of these are visible in
The volume can be adjusted separately the display. The numbers stored in the phone book of
for telephone mode and audio mode. the telephone can be called up either by
name or number.
Adjusting sound In addition, incoming calls are stored in the
phone book.
왘 Adjust sound during a telephone call.
Sound adjustment (컄 page 201).
224
Controls in detail
Audio system
i 왘 Press MEM soft key or press 왘 Press button ‚ or ƒ

This is only possible, however, when button ‚ or ƒ. repeatedly until desired entry has
been reached.
the call information transmitted 왘 Press desired numerical key 2
includes the number of the person to 9. The stored entries are selected in
calling. If the telephone number is not alphabetical order with the
The stored entries are selected
transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored sub-entries.
according to the alphabetical order
in the phone book.
of the initial letters (e.g. for i
S -Schneider, press button 7
앫 Searching and calling up telephone Several sub-entries can be stored for
four times).
book entries by name each main entry (name). These entries
or are marked by a corresponding
You can access your mobile
왘 Press and hold button ‚ abbreviation that appears in the upper
telephone’s phone book using the
or ƒ. left-hand corner of the display. The
audio system. You can access both the
following abbreviations for sub-entries
main entries and the sub-entries of The system jumps from one initial are possible:
your phone book. letter to the next in ascending or
descending order. CEL = Mobile phone
HOM = Home
왘 Press and hold button ‚ WOR = Work
or ƒ until desired initial letter FAX = Fax
has been reached. PAG = Pager
or TEL = Main 컄컄
225
Controls in detail
Audio system
컄컄 왘 When you have selected a number, 왘 Press MEM soft key or press 앫 Speed dial
press s button. button ‚ or ƒ.
If you have stored telephone numbers
The call will be made. 왘 Press RCV soft key (received calls). as speed dial numbers in your
telephone, you can also enter these
앫 Viewing the telephone number of a The number of received calls and
with buttons 1 to R on the radio
telephone book entry then the call last received appear
head unit.
왘 Search for desired entry. briefly in the display.
왘 Select desired telephone number 왘 Press desired button 1 to R
왘 Press NUM soft key. briefly.
with button ‚ or ƒ.
The telephone number of the phone 왘 Press s button.
The letter R and the number of the
book entry appears in the display.
memory position appear in the The call will be made.
앫 Returning calls received upper left-hand corner of the
앫 Turbo dial
display. The numbers are stored in
the order of the calls received. If you have stored telephone numbers
as turbo dial numbers in your
왘 When you have selected a number, telephone, you can also enter these
press s button. with buttons 1 to R on the radio
The call will be made. head unit.
왘 Press desired button 1 to R
until the call is made.
226
Controls in detail
Audio system
Redial 왘 Press s button. Accepting an incoming call

If the number you have dialed is busy, you The telephone number last dialed If the telephone is active in the background
can again place calls to the last ten will appear in the display. (reception symbol is visible in the display),
telephone numbers dialed using the redial the audio source is muted when an incom-
왘 Select desired telephone number
function. ing call is received. A ringing tone can be
heard and the caller’s telephone number,
i The letter L and the number of the or the name under which the telephone
If you have activated the automatic memory position appears in the number has been saved in the phone book,
redial function on your telephone, the left-hand corner of the display. The appears in the display. If the caller’s
number of the person being called is numbers are stored in the order of number is not transmitted with the call,
automatically redialed after a short the calls received. CALL will appear in the display.
waiting period if there is a busy signal. 왘 When you have selected a number, 왘 Press s button.
Refer to the separate operating press s button.
instructions for the mobile telephone. The call is accepted.
The call will be made.
앫 Manual redial
227
Controls in detail
Audio system
Muting a call Talking with two callers at the same 왘 Press s button to accept a
time second call.
It is possible to mute a call; the caller is
then no longer able to hear you. If you wish to receive or place another call i
during an already active call, you can
앫 Mute on You will be notified of the second call
accept or place the second call and switch
왘 Press MUT soft key. acoustically, but you will not see this in
between the callers or combine them into
the display.
왘 MIC MUTE will appear in the display. one call. Note that the features described
here are depending on availability from
앫 Mute off You are connected with the second
your mobile phone service provider.
왘 Press MUT soft key again. caller; the first caller is kept on hold.
앫 Placing/accepting a second call
앫 Switching between calls
Terminating a call 왘 Place new call by entering
telephone number manually. 왘 Press 2 and s buttons.
왘 Press t button.
왘 Press s button. This switches between the calls.
The current call is terminated and the The non-active call is kept on hold.
muted audio source becomes active You are connected to the second
again. caller; the first caller is kept on
hold.
or
228
Controls in detail
Audio system
앫 Terminating a call TDMA or CDMA network phones Switching on the telephone

왘 Press t button.
Using your Mercedes-Benz specified Switching on the telephone
The current call is terminated. You mobile telephone*, a number of functions
왘 Press h button.
are again connected with the caller and operating steps can be performed and
previously placed on hold. displayed in the audio system display. If you have programmed an unlock
앫 Combining two calls code for the telephone, you must now
Further operating instructions not covered
enter the code.
왘 Press 3 and s buttons. here can be found in the operating instruc-
tions for the multifunction steering wheel
The calls are combined into one and the mobile telephone*.
call.
If your audio system is set up for telephone
앫 Terminating a combined call operation, the t symbol will appear in
왘 Press t button. the display.
The connection to both callers is When you insert your Mercedes-Benz
terminated. specified mobile telephone* into the 왘 Enter code using buttons 1
telephone cradle, you will be prompted to to R.
enter your PIN for 30 seconds
(컄 page 229). This display disappears 왘 If necessary, correct number entered
when you press any button. with the CLR soft key. Press soft key
briefly to delete the last digit entered;
When your mobile telephone is inserted press soft key and hold to delete the
into the telephone cradle, you will see the complete number. 컄컄
reception strength in the upper right-hand
229
Controls in detail
Audio system
컄컄왘 Press OK soft key after entering correct Adjusting sound 왘 If necessary, correct number entered
code. with the CLR soft key. Press soft key
왘 Adjust sound during a telephone call.
briefly to delete the last digit entered;
The telephone is unlocked. If you have Sound adjustment (컄 page 201).
press soft key and hold to delete the
entered an incorrect code, you must
complete number.
enter the correct code. Placing a call
왘 After correct telephone number has
Switching off the telephone Entering a telephone number and been entered, press s button.
starting the dialing process
왘 Press h button for approx. i
3 seconds.
If the telephone number has been
PROCESSING appears in the display until saved together with a name in the
the telephone is off. Afterward, phone book, the name will appear in
PHONE OFF appears in the display. the display.
Adjusting the volume Phone book

왘 Turn rotary control of N button The numbers stored in the phone book of
왘 Enter desired telephone number using
during a telephone call.
buttons 1 to R. the mobile telephone can be called up
The volume will increase or decrease either by name or number.
The number can have up to 32 digits,
depending on the direction turned. In addition, incoming calls are stored in the
but only twelve of these are visible in
the display. phone book.
i
The volume can be adjusted separately
for telephone mode and audio mode.
230
Controls in detail
Audio system
i 왘 Press MEM soft key or press 왘 Press button ‚ or ƒ

This is only possible, however, when button ‚ or ƒ. repeatedly until desired entry has
been reached.
the call information transmitted 왘 Press desired numerical key 2
includes the number of the person to 9. The stored entries are selected in
calling. If the telephone number is not alphabetical order with the
The stored entries are selected
transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored sub-entries.
according to the alphabetical order
in the phone book.
of the initial letters (e.g. for i
S -Schneider, press button 7
앫 Searching and calling up phone book Several sub-entries can be stored for
four times).
entries by name each main entry (name). These entries
or are marked by a corresponding
You can access your mobile
왘 Press and hold button ‚ abbreviation that appears in the upper
telephone’s phone book with the audio
or ƒ. left-hand corner of the display. The
system. You can access both the main
following abbreviations for sub-entries
entries and the sub-entries of your The system jumps from one initial are possible:
phone book. letter to the next in ascending or
descending order. CEL = Mobile phone
HOM = Home
왘 Press and hold button ‚ WOR = Work
or ƒ until desired initial letter FAX = Fax
has been reached. PAG = Pager
or TEL = Main 컄컄
231
Controls in detail
Audio system
컄컄 왘 When you have selected a number, 왘 Press MEM soft key or press 앫 Speed dial
press s button. button ‚ or ƒ.
If you have stored telephone numbers
The call will be made. 왘 Press RCV soft key (received calls). as speed dial numbers in your
telephone, you can also enter these
앫 Viewing the telephone number of a The number of received calls and
with buttons 1 to R on the radio
phone book entry then the call last received appear
unit.
왘 Search for desired entry. briefly in the display.
왘 Select desired telephone number 왘 Press desired button 1 to R
왘 Press NUM soft key. briefly.
The telephone number of the phone 왘 Press s button.
The letter R and the number of the
book entry appears in the display.
memory position appear in the The call will be made.
앫 Returning calls received upper left-hand corner of the
앫 Turbo dial
display. The numbers are stored in
the order of the calls received. If you have stored telephone numbers
as turbo dial numbers in your
왘 When you have selected a number, telephone, you can also enter these
press s button. with buttons 1 to R on the radio
The call will be made. unit.
왘 Press desired button 1 to R
until the call is made.
232
Controls in detail
Audio system
Redial 왘 Press s button. Accepting an incoming call

If the number you have dialed is busy, you The telephone number last dialed If the telephone is active in the background
can again place calls to the last ten will appear in the display. (reception symbol is visible in the display),
telephone numbers dialed using the redial the audio source is muted when an incom-
왘 Select desired telephone number
function. ing call is received. A ringing tone can be
heard and the caller’s telephone number,
i The letter L and the number of the or the name under which the telephone
If you have activated the automatic re- memory position appears in the number has been saved in the telephone
dial function on your mobile telephone, left-hand corner of the display. The book, appears in the display. If the caller’s
the number of the person being called numbers are stored in the order of number is not relayed, CALL will appear in
is automatically redialed after a short the calls received. the display.
waiting period if there is a busy signal. 왘 When you have selected a number, 왘 Press s button.
Refer to the separate operating instruc- press s button.
tions for the mobile telephone. The call is accepted.
The call will be made.
앫 Manual redial
233
Controls in detail
Audio system
Muting a call Accepting a second incoming call 앫 Switching between calls

It is possible to mute a call; the caller is If you receive another call during an 왘 Press s button.
then no longer able to hear you. already active call, you can accept the
This switches between the calls.
second call and switch between the two.
앫 Mute on The non-active call is kept on hold.
앫 Accepting a second call
왘 Press MUT soft key. 앫 Terminating a call
왘 Place new call by entering
왘 MIC MUTE will appear in the display. 왘 Press t button.
telephone number manually.
앫 Mute off The current call is terminated. The
i connection to the caller previously
왘 Press MUT soft key again.
You will be notified of the second call kept on hold is also interrupted;
Terminating a call acoustically, but you will not see this in however, reconnection is indicated
the display. by an acoustic signal.
왘 Press t button.
The current call is terminated and the You are connected to the second
muted audio source becomes active caller; the first caller is kept on hold.
again.
234
Controls in detail
Audio system
Placing a second call 앫 Terminating a call Emergency calls “911”

If you wish to place another call during an 왘 Press t button.
The following describes how to dial a “911”
already active call, you can place the
The current call is terminated. The emergency call using the audio system
second call and switch between the callers
connection to the caller previously head unit when a Mercedes-Benz specified
or combine them into one call. Note that
kept on hold is also interrupted; mobile phone* is inserted in the phone
this feature is dependent on availability
however, reconnection is indicated cradle*. Unless otherwise specified, the
from your mobile phone service provider.
by an acoustic signal. descriptions refer to the audio system
앫 Placing a second call head unit.
앫 Combining two calls
왘 Place a new call by entering Consult the separate telephone operating
왘 Press s button.
telephone number manually. instructions that came with your mobile
The calls are combined into one phone* for information on how to place a
왘 Press s button.
call. “911” emergency call on the mobile
You are connected to the second 앫 Terminating a combined call phone*.
caller; the first caller is kept on
hold. 왘 Press t button.
The connection to both callers is
Warning! G
terminated. The “911” emergency call system is a public
service. Using it without due cause is a crim-
inal offense.
235
Controls in detail
Audio system
The following conditions must be met for a GSM network phones Placing a “911” emergency call using
“911” emergency call: audio head unit with the phone
Placing a “911” emergency call using unlocked
앫 Telephone must be switched on.
audio head unit with the phone locked
왘 Press h button to switch to
앫 The corresponding mobile communica-
왘 Press h button to switch to telephone operation.
tions network must be available.
telephone operation.
왘 Enter 911 using the number keypad on
i PIN? appears in the audio display. the audio head unit.
Emergency calls may not be possible
왘 Enter 911 using the number keypad on 왘 Press s button for dialing to begin.
with all telephone networks or if certain
the audio head unit.
network services and/or telephone DIALING appears in the audio display
functions are active. Check with your 왘 Press OK soft key or s button for while the telephone establishes the
local service providers. dialing to begin. connection.
DIALING appears in the audio display 왘 Wait until the emergency call center
If you cannot make an emergency call, you while the telephone establishes the answers, then describe the emergency.
will have to initiate rescue measures connection.
yourself. i
왘 Wait until the emergency call center
If no SIM card is in the mobile phone,
answers, then describe the emergency.
NO SERVICE appears in the audio
display. In that case, you only can make
an emergency call on the mobile phone
itself, without the use of the head unit.
236
Controls in detail
Audio system
TDMA/CDMA network phones Placing a “911” emergency call using

audio head unit with the phone
Placing a “911” emergency call using unlocked
audio head unit with the phone locked
왘 Press h button to switch to
왘 Press h button to switch to telephone operation.
telephone operation.
왘 Enter 911 using the number keypad on
CODE? appears in the audio display. the audio head unit.
왘 Enter 911 using the number keypad on 왘 Press s button for dialing to begin.
the audio head unit.
DIALING appears in the audio display
왘 Press OK soft key or s button for while the telephone establishes the
dialing to begin. connection.
DIALING appears in the audio display 왘 Wait until the emergency call center
while the telephone establishes the answers, then describe the emergency.
connection.
왘 Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency.
237
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows

Warning! G If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
The side windows are opened and closed
When closing the power windows, make you are closing the window by pulling and
electrically. The switches for all the side
sure there is no danger of anyone being holding the switch, by pressing and holding
windows are on the driver’s door. The
harmed by the closing procedure. button ‹ on the SmartKey, or by press-
switches for the respective windows are
ing and holding button , or e on the
on the front passenger door and the rear The closing of the door windows can be im- automatic climate control panel, the auto-
doors. mediately halted by releasing the switch or, matic reversal function will not operate.
if switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
pulling the respective switch. SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
If the window encounters an obstruction children unattended in the vehicle, or with
that blocks its path in a circumstance where access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
you pulled the switch past the resistance vised use of vehicle equipment can cause an
point and released it to close the window, accident and/or serious personal injury.
the automatic reversal function will stop the
window and open it slightly.
1 Left front window

2 Right front window
3 Right rear window
4 Left rear window
5 Rear window override switch
(컄 page 80)
238
Controls in detail
Power windows
i Opening the windows Fully opening the windows

You can also open or close the power (Express-open)
왘 Press switch 1 to 4 to the resistance
windows using the SmartKey, see point. 왘 Press switch 1 to 4 past the
“Summer opening feature” resistance point and release.
The corresponding window will move
(컄 page 241) and “Convenience clos-
downwards until you release the The corresponding window opens
ing feature” (컄 page 241).
switch. completely.
Depending on current position, the win-
dows may also open or close when the Closing the windows Fully closing the windows
air recirculation button , in the (Express-close)
왘 Pull switch 1 to 4 to the resistance
control panel of the climate control
point. 왘 Pull switch 1 to 4 past the
(컄 page 175) or automatic climate
resistance point and release.
control* (Canada only) (컄 page 185), The corresponding window will move
or the charcoal filter button e in the upwards until you release the switch. The corresponding window closes
control panel of the automatic climate completely.
control* (Canada only) (컄 page 193) is Warning! G
pressed and held.
If you pull and hold the switch up when
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33). closing the window, and upward movement
of the window is blocked by some obstruc-
tion including but not limited to arms, hands,
fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not
operate.
239
Controls in detail
Power windows
! Synchronizing power windows

If the upward movement of the window Warning! G
is blocked during the closing The power windows must be
Driver’s door only: resynchronized each time
procedure, the window will stop and
If within 5 seconds you again pull the switch
open slightly. 앫 after the battery has been
past the resistance point and release, the
Remove the obstruction, pull the disconnected or discharged.
automatic reversal will not function.
switch again past the resistance point 앫 if the power windows cannot be fully
and release. Stopping windows opened (Express-open) or closed
If the window still does not close when (Express-close).
왘 Press or pull respective switch again.
there is no obstruction, then pull and 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33).
hold the switch again. The side window
왘 Pull the power window switches until
will then close without the obstruction
the side windows are closed.
sensor function.
왘 Hold the switches for approximately
1 second.
The power windows are synchronized.
240
Controls in detail
Power windows
Summer opening feature Convenience closing feature 왘 Aim transmitter eye at the driver’s door
handle. The SmartKey must be in close
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate proximity to the door handle.
the vehicle before driving off by simulta- Warning! G 왘 Press and hold button ‹ until the
neously:
When closing the windows and the tilt/slid-
앫 opening the side windows are completely closed.
ing sunroof, make sure that there is no dan-
앫 opening the tilt/sliding sunroof ger of anyone being harmed by the closing 왘 Release the ‹ button to stop
procedure. procedure.
If potential danger exists, proceed as fol- Make sure all windows and the tilt/sliding
lows: sunroof are properly closed before leaving
앫 Release button ‹ to stop the closing the vehicle.
procedure. To open, press and hold
button Œ. To continue the closing
procedure after making sure that there
is no danger of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure, press and hold
button ‹.
왘 Aim transmitter eye at the driver’s door
handle. The SmartKey must be in close
proximity to the door handle.
왘 Press and hold button Œ until the
have reached the desired position.
왘 Release button Œ to interrupt proce-
dure.
241
Controls in detail
Opening and closing the power With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a
tilt/sliding sunroof screen can be slid into the roof opening to Warning! G
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened and sunroof open, the screen will also retract. When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
closed electrically. The switch for the sure there is no danger of anyone being
tilt/sliding sunroof is on the overhead harmed by the closing procedure.
control panel. The opening/closing procedure of the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately
halted by releasing the switch or, if the
switch was moved past the resistance point
and released, by moving the switch in any
direction.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
Screen
shatter. This may result in an opening in the
roof.
Sunroof switch In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing

their seat belts or not wearing them properly
1 Push up to raise sunroof at rear
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
2 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear
opening also presents a potential for injury
3 Push forward to slide sunroof closed
for occupants wearing their seat belts
4 Push back to slide sunroof open
properly as entire body parts or portions of
them may protrude from the passenger
compartment.
242
Controls in detail
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the i Opening and closing the power
You can also open or close the tilt/slid- tilt/sliding sunroof
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave ing sunroof using the SmartKey, see 왘 To open, close, raise, or lower the
children unattended in the vehicle, or with “Summer opening feature” tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper- (컄 page 241) and “Convenience clos- switch to resistance point in the
vised use of vehicle equipment can cause an ing feature” (컄 page 241). required direction of arrows 1 to 4.
accident and/or serious personal injury. Depending on current position, the Release the sunroof switch when the
tilt/sliding sunroof may also open or tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
! close when the air recirculation desired position.
To avoid damaging the seals, do not button , in the control panel of the
transport any objects with sharp edges climate control (컄 page 175) or auto- Fully opening (Express-open) and
which can stick out of the tilt/sliding matic climate control* (Canada only) closing (Express-close) the power
sunroof. (컄 page 191), or the charcoal filter tilt/sliding sunroof
button e in the control panel of the
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if 왘 To open or close the tilt/sliding
automatic climate control* (Canada
there is snow or ice on the roof, as this sunroof, move the sunroof switch past
only) (컄 page 193) is pressed and held.
could result in malfunctions. the resistance point in the required
direction of arrow 1 to 4 and
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33). release.
or closed manually should an electrical
malfunction occur (컄 page 389). The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes
completely.
243
Controls in detail
Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33).
during Express-operation sunroof
왘 Move and hold the sunroof switch in di-
왘 Move the sunroof switch in any rection of arrow 1 (컄 page 242) until
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be
direction. the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at
synchronized
the rear.
i 앫 after the battery has been
왘 Hold the sunroof switch for
If the movement of the tilt/sliding disconnected or discharged
approximately 1 second.
sunroof is blocked during the closing 앫 after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will 왘 Check the Express-open feature
closed manually (컄 page 389)
stop and reopen slightly. (컄 page 243).
앫 after a malfunction
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens
앫 if the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open completely, the tilt/sliding sunroof is
smoothly synchronized. Otherwise repeat the
above steps.
244
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The driving system of your vehicle is Cruise control
described on the following pages: Warning! G
The cruise control automatically maintains
앫 Cruise control, with which the vehicle
the speed you set for your vehicle. The cruise control is a convenience system
can maintain a preset speed. designed to assist the driver during vehicle
The use of cruise control is recommended
For information on the BAS, ABS and ESP®, operation. The driver is and must always re-
for driving at a constant speed for extend-
see “Driving safety systems” (컄 page 82). main responsible for the vehicle’s speed and
ed periods of time. You can set or resume
for safe brake operation.
cruise control at any speed over 20 mph
(30 km/h). Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
The cruise control function is operated by travel at a steady speed.
means of the cruise control lever.
앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
The cruise control lever is the uppermost ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
lever on the left-hand side of the steering because conditions do not allow safe
column (컄 page 22). driving at a steady speed.
앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫 Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
245
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i !
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise Moving the gear selector lever to
control may not be able to maintain the position N while driving also cancels
set speed. Once the grade eases, the cruise control. However, the gear
set speed will be resumed. selector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving, except to
Canceling cruise control coast when the vehicle is in danger of
skidding (e.g. on icy roads).
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
1 Sets current or higher speed
i
왘 Step on the brake pedal.
2 Sets current or lower speed The last stored speed is canceled when
3 Cancels cruise control Cruise control is canceled. The last you turn off the engine.
4 Resumes at last set speed speed set is stored for later use.
or
Setting current speed
왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever to
왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired position 3.
speed.
Cruise control is canceled. The last
왘 Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise speed set is stored for later use.
control lever.
The current speed is set.
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
246
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed i Setting to last stored speed

When you use the cruise control lever (“Resume” function)
왘 Lift cruise control lever to position 1
and hold it up until the desired speed is to decelerate, the transmission will
reached. automatically downshift if the engine’s Warning! G
braking power does not brake the
왘 Release cruise control lever.
vehicle sufficiently. The speed stored in memory should only be
The new speed is set. set again if prevailing road conditions per-
Fine adjustment in 1 mph mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
i differences arising from returning to preset
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Depressing the accelerator pedal does speed could cause an accident and/or seri-
not deactivate cruise control. After Faster ous injury to you and others.
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last 왘 Briefly tip cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1. 왘 Briefly push cruise control lever to
speed set.
position 4.
Slower The cruise control resumes the last set
Setting a lower speed
왘 Briefly tip cruise control lever in speed.
왘 Depress cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it down until the direction of arrow 2. 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
desired speed is reached. pedal.
왘 Release cruise control lever.

The new speed is set.
247
Controls in detail
Loading
Roof rack* !
Load the roof rack in such a way that
the vehicle cannot be damaged while
Warning! G driving.
Only use roof racks approved by Make sure
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to 앫 you can fully raise the tilt/sliding
avoid damage to the vehicle. sunroof.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation in-
앫 you can fully open the trunk.
structions. Otherwise, an improperly at-
tached roof rack system or its load could 왘 Mount the roof rack only between the
become detached from the vehicle. fastening points (see arrows).
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of 왘 Secure the roof rack according to
220 lb (100 kg). manufacturer’s instructions for
Take into consideration that when the roof
installation.
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics
are different from those when operating the
vehicles without the roof rack loaded.
248
Controls in detail
Loading
Ski sack (Canada only) Unfolding and loading

왘 Fold armrest 3 down (arrow).
!
Do not sit on or lean your body weight
against the armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage
it.
왘 Pull handle 1 and swing cover 2

4 Hook and loop fastener
down.
1 Handle 왘 Unfasten hook and loop fastener 4.
2 Cover 왘 Pull ski sack into passenger compart-
3 Armrest ment and unfold. 컄컄
249
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄
5 Button 왘 From trunk, slide skis into ski sack. 6 Strap

왘 Open trunk lid. 왘 Tighten strap 6 by pulling at the loose
왘 Press button 5. Warning! G end (arrow) until the skis in the ski sack
are tightly secured.
The flap opens downward. The ski sack is designed for up to four pairs
of skis. Do not load the ski sack with other
objects.
Always fasten the ski sack securely. In an
accident, an unfastened ski sack can cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
250
Controls in detail
Loading
Unloading and folding Removing the ski sack

왘 Loosen the straps. You can remove the ski sack for cleaning
or drying.
왘 Disconnect hook 7 from eye 8.
왘 Unload skis.
왘 Close flap in trunk.
왘 Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise.
왘 Place folded ski sack inside recess of
backrest.
7 Hook
8 Eye 왘 Fasten hook and loop fastener.
왘 Connect hook 7 to eye 8. 왘 Close ski sack compartment cover.
Tighten strap by pulling at the loose 1 Button
end (arrow). 2 Ski sack frame
3 Flap
왘 Open trunk lid.
왘 Press button 1.
The flap 3 opens downward.
왘 Press button 1 firmly until ski sack
frame 2 is released.
왘 Pull ski sack frame 2 with ski sack
out.
251
Controls in detail
Loading
Split rear bench seat Folding the backrest forward

Warning! G The release handle 1 is located in the
To expand the cargo area, you can fold
Never drive vehicle with trunk open while trunk.
down the left and right rear seat backrests.
the ski sack is removed. Deadly carbon
The two sections can be folded down
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-
separately.
terior, resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
Warning! G
i When expanding the luggage area, always
To prevent unauthorized persons from fold the seat cushions fully forward.
accessing the trunk, always close the
Unless you are transporting cargo, the
flap.
backrests must remain properly locked in
왘 Pull release handle 1.
the upright position.
Installing the ski sack 왘 Fully retract and fold rearward head
In an accident, during hard braking or
Install the ski sack in the reverse order. restraints (컄 page 108).
sudden maneuvers, loose items will be
왘 Push ski sack frame 2 with ski sack thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause
inward until the ski sack frame snaps injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
into place. are securely fastened in the vehicle.
왘 Close flap 3. Always use the cargo tie down rings*

(컄 page 255).
왘 Close trunk lid.
252
Controls in detail
Loading
Returning the backrest to original

position
왘 Pull release handle 2. If the backrest is not locked into position,

왘 Fold seat cushion 3 forward. a red indicator 3 will be visible.
왘 Fold backrest 2 rearward until it 왘 Check for secure locking by pushing
왘 Fold backrest 4 forward. engages. and pulling on the backrest.
! 왘 Fold seat cushion 1 rearward until it
Always release the seat cushion and locks into position.
fold it forward before folding the seat
backrests forward. Otherwise, the
backrest covering may be damaged.
253
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading instructions Always place items being carried against

Warning! G front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
If a red indicator is visible with the backrest
up, then the backrest is not properly locked The heaviest portion of the cargo should al-
into position. ways be kept as low as possible since it in-
fluences the handling characteristics of
Always lock backrest in its upright position the vehicle.
when rear seat bench is occupied, cargo is
being carried in the trunk, or the extended
cargo compartment is not in use. Check for Warning! G
secure locking by pushing and pulling on the
backrest. Always fasten items being carried as secure-
The total load weight including vehicle ly as possible using cargo tie-down rings and
In an accident, during hard braking or sud- occupants and luggage/cargo should not fastening materials appropriate for the
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown exceed the load limit or vehicle capacity weight and size of the load.
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury weight indicated on the corresponding
to vehicle occupants unless the items are In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
placard located on the driver’s door
securely fastened in the vehicle. den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
B-pillar.
around inside the vehicle and can cause in-
To help avoid personal injury during a The handling characteristics of a fully load- jury to vehicle occupants unless the items
collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis- are securely fastened in the vehicle.
when transporting cargo. tribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustra-
i tions shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
To prevent unauthorized persons from
access to the trunk, always lock
backrest in its upright position.
254
Controls in detail
Loading
Cargo tie-down rings*

To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
The four cargo tie-down rings are located
when transporting cargo.
in the trunk.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter ve-
hicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.
i
The trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
The enlarged cargo area should only be
used for items which do not fit in the Cargo tie-down rings
trunk alone.
왘 Carefully secure cargo by applying
even load on all rings with rope
sufficient strength to hold down the
cargo.
Always follow loading instructions
(컄 page 254).
255
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartments Glove box
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. Do not place anything on the shelf 1 Unlocking
below the rear window. 1 Glove box lid release 2 Locking
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy 2 Glove box
objects. Locking glove box
Opening glove box
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help 왘 Insert mechanical key (컄 page 386)
to prevent stored objects from being thrown 왘 Pull glove box lid release 1. into the glove box lock and turn it to
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
The glove box lid 2 opens downward. position 2.
an accident.
Closing glove box Unlocking glove box
왘 Turn mechanical key in the glove box
왘 Push glove box lid 2 up to close.
lock to position 1.
i
Audio system/COMAND* with CD
changer*: The CD changer* is located
in the glove box.
256
Controls in detail
Useful features
Armrest storage compartments Opening upper compartment Armrest in the rear passenger
compartment
왘 Press button 3 on driver’s side or
button 2 on passenger side and lift
armrest.
Closing upper compartment

왘 Press armrest down until it engages
into place.
i
1 Handle The Roadside Assistance button •
2 Button, passenger side and the Information button ¡ are 왘 Pull the top of the armrest out and fold
3 Button, driver’s side located in the armrest storage com- it down.
partment (if equipped).
Opening storage compartment !
왘 Pull handle 1 and lift armrest. against the armrest when it is folded
Closing storage compartment it.
왘 Press armrest down until it engages
into place.
257
Controls in detail
Useful features
Parcel net in front passenger footwell Cup holders

Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
A small convenience parcel net is located holder may come loose during braking, vehi-
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
Warning! G cle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior.
mail, etc. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interi-
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
or may cause an accident and/or serious
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equip-
Warning! G ment, only use containers that fit into the
personal injury.
cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
The parcel net is intended for storing do not fill containers to a height where the Cup holders in front of seat armrest
light-weight items only. contents, especially hot liquids, could spill Underneath the swiveling cup holder is
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or an ac- another stationary cup holder. You can
fragile objects may not be transported in the cident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants only use this when the swiveling cup holder
parcel net. In an accident, during hard brak- may cause serious personal injury. Liquids is pulled out and completely turned
ing, or sudden maneuvers, they could be spilled on vehicle equipment may cause outward.
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
injury to vehicle occupants. Limited Warranty.
The parcel net cannot protect transported When not in use, keep the cup holder
goods in the event of an accident. closed. An open cup holder may cause injury
to you or others when contacted during
braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an acci-
dent.
258
Controls in detail
Useful features
Sliding out swiveling cup holder Turning swiveling cup holder outward Turning swiveling cup holder inward and
sliding it in
왘 Push button 1. 왘 Turn the cup holder in direction of

The cup holder slides upward. arrow 2 until it engages. 왘 Turn the cup holder in direction of
You can now use both cup holders. arrow 3 until it engages.
! 왘 Press the cup holder in direction of
No objects should be in the swiveling arrow 4 until it engages.
cup holder when the swiveling cup
holder is slid upward. Otherwise the !
swiveling cup holder or the objects No objects should be in the stationary
could be damaged. cup holder when the swiveling cup
holder is turned inward and pushed in.
Otherwise the swiveling cup holder or
the objects could be damaged.
259
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in rear seat armrest Closing cup holder Ashtrays

왘 Slide cup holder back until it engages.
Center console ashtray
!
against the armrest when it is folded
it.
1 Cup holder
Opening cup holder

1 Cover plate
왘 Briefly press the front of cup holder 1. 2 Sliding button
The cup holder slides out slightly. 3 Ashtray insert
왘 Briefly press the bottom of cover
왘 Pull out the cup holder until it stops.
plate 1.
The cover plate opens automatically.
260
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing ashtray insert Reinstalling ashtray insert Removing ashtray insert

왘 Push the ashtray insert 3 down into 왘 Push button 1 to disengage ashtray
Warning! G the retainer until it engages. insert 2 and remove it.
왘 Push down cover plate 1 to close
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle Reinstalling ashtray insert
ashtray.
standing still. Set the parking brake to
왘 Push the ashtray insert 2 down into
secure vehicle from movement. Move gear The cover plate engages.
the retainer until it engages.
selector lever to position N. With gear selec-
tor lever in position N turn off the engine. Rear seat ashtray 왘 Push at top of cover 3 to close
ashtray.
왘 Secure vehicle from movement by
setting the parking brake.
왘 Move the gear selector lever to
position N.
Now you have more room to take out
the ashtray insert.
왘 Push sliding button 2 to the right.
The ashtray insert 3 slides out 1 Button
slightly. 2 Ashtray insert
왘 Remove the ashtray insert. 3 Cover
왘 Pull at top of cover 3.
261
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cigarette lighter !
The lighter socket can be used to ac-
commodate 12V DC electrical acces-
Warning! G sories (up to a maximum of 85 W)
designed for use with the standard
Never touch the heating element or sides of
“cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
mind, however, that connecting acces-
knob only.
sories to the lighter socket (for exam-
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ple extensive connecting and
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it disconnecting, or using plugs that do
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave 1 Cover plate not fit properly) can damage the lighter
children unattended in the vehicle, or with 2 Cigarette lighter socket. With the socket damaged, the
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper- 왘 Briefly press the bottom of cover lighter may no longer be able to be
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause plate 1. placed in the heating (pushed-in) posi-
an accident and/or serious personal injury. tion, or the lighter may pop out too ear-
The cover plate opens automatically. ly with the lighter not hot enough.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33). 왘 Push in cigarette lighter 2. To help avoid damaging the cigarette
The cigarette lighter will pop out lighter socket, we recommend con-
automatically when hot. necting 12V DC electrical accessories
designed for use with the standard
“cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V
power outlets (컄 page 263) in your ve-
hicle whenever possible.
262
Controls in detail
Useful features
왘 Push down cover plate 1 to close 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33). Telephone*
ashtray.
왘 Pull at top of cover 2.
The cover plate engages.
왘 Flip cover 1 to the left and insert Warning! G
electrical plug (cigarette lighter type).
Power outlet
i with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
The power outlet is located in the rear pas-
The power outlet can be used to out being connected to an external antenna)
senger compartment.
accommodate 12V DC electrical ac- from inside the vehicle while the engine is
cessories (e.g. air pump, auxiliary running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
lamps) up to a maximum of 180 W. tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and personal
injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-

phone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
nected to an antenna that is installed on
1 Power outlet the outside of the vehicle.
2 Cover The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-
tion on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
mitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
263
Controls in detail
Useful features
You can take and place telephone calls Tele Aid*

Warning! G using the s and t buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other tele- !
Please do not forget that your primary re- phone functions, use the control system The initial activation of the Tele Aid
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s (컄 page 152). system may only be performed by
attention to the road must always be
See separate operating manual for instruc- completing the subscriber agreement
his/her primary focus when driving. For
tions on how to use the telephone. and placing an acquaintance call using
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
the ¡ button. Failure to complete
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
either of these steps will result in a
and stop before placing or taking a tele-
system that is not activated.
phone call.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while If you have any questions regarding
driving, please use the hands-free device activation, please call the Response
and only use the telephone when road, Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Shortly after the completion of your Tele
Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a
Only operate the COMAND* (Cockpit Man-
user ID and password. By visiting
agement and Data System)1 if road, weather
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
and traffic conditions permit.
(USA only), you will have access to account
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph information, remote door unlock and
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is more.
1 Observe all legal requirements.
264
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can i
be adjusted when using the volume control The SOS button is located in the over-
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
on the audio system or COMAND* System head control panel (컄 page 267).
Demand)
or on the multifunction steering wheel. To
The Tele Aid system consists of three raise, turn the rotary volume control on au- The Roadside Assistance button •
types of response: dio system or COMAND* System clock- and the Information button ¡ are
wise or press button æ on the located in the armrest storage com-
앫 automatic and manual emergency
multifunction steering wheel. To lower, partment (컄 page 257).
앫 roadside assistance turn the rotary volume control on audio
앫 information system or COMAND* System control !
counterclockwise or press button ç on The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
the multifunction steering wheel. network for communication and the
ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cel- 왘 To activate, press the SOS button, the GPS (Global Positioning System) satel-
lular and GPS coverage is available. Roadside Assistance button • or lites for vehicle location. If either of
the Information button ¡, depend- these signals are unavailable, the
ing on the type of response required. Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be sum-
moned by other means.
265
Controls in detail
Useful features
i System self-check Emergency calls

When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, Initially, after switching on ignition, mal- An emergency call is initiated automatical-
the audio system or COMAND* System functions are detected and indicated (the ly following an accident in which the emer-
unit is muted and the selected mode indicator lamps in the SOS button, the gency tensioning devices (ETDs) or
(radio, tape or CD) pauses. The optional Roadside Assistance button • and the air bags deploy.
cellular phone (if installed) and inserted Information button ¡ stay on longer
An emergency call can also be initiated
in cradle switches off. If you must use than 10 seconds or do not come on). The
manually by opening the cover next to the
this phone, we recommend that you message Malfunction. Drive to work-
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
use it only with the vehicle at a stand- shop appears in the multifunction display.
briefly pressing the button located under
still in a safe location. Remove the
the cover. See (컄 page 267) for
phone from the cradle and place the
call. The navigation* system (if en-
Warning! G instructions on initiating an emergency call
manually.
gaged) will continue to run. The multi-
If the indicator lamps on the SOS button, on
function display in the instrument Once the emergency call is in progress, the
the Roadside Assistance button, and/or on
cluster is available for use, and spoken indicator lamp on the SOS button will
the Information button remain illuminated
commands are only available by press- begin to flash. The message
continuously in red and/or the message
ing the RPT button on audio system or Connecting Call appears in the multifunc-
Malfunction. Drive to workshop is
COMAND* System unit. A pop-up win- tion display. When the connection is estab-
displayed in the multifunction display after
dow will appear in the audio system or lished, the message Call connected
the system self-check, a malfunction in the
COMAND* System unit display to indi- appears in the multifunction display. All in-
system has been detected.
cate that a Tele Aid call is in progress. formation relevant to the emergency, such
After the TeleAid call has ended, the If a malfunction is indicated as outlined as the location of the vehicle (determined
optional cellular phone switches on above, the system may not operate as by the GPS satellite location system), vehi-
again. A PIN entry might be necessary. expected. Have the system checked at the cle model, identification number and color
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as are generated.
possible.
266
Controls in detail
Useful features
A voice connection between the Response i Initiating an emergency call manually

Center and the occupants of the vehicle Location of the vehicle on a map is only
will be established automatically soon af- possible if the vehicle is able to receive
ter the emergency call has been initiated. signals from the GPS satellite network
The Response Center will attempt to and pass the information on to the
determine more precisely the nature of the Response Center.
accident provided they can speak to an
occupant of the vehicle.
The Tele Aid system is available if Warning! G
앫 it has been activated and is operation-
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
al. Activation requires a subscription 1 Cover
flashing continuously and there was no
for monitoring services, connection 2 SOS button
voice connection to the Response Center
and cellular air time
established, then the Tele Aid system could 왘 Briefly press on cover 1.
앫 the relevant cellular phone network not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
and GPS signals are available and pass vant cellular phone network is not available). The cover will open.
the information on to the response cen- The message Call failed appears in the 왘 Press SOS button 2 briefly.
ter multifunction display for approximately
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
10 seconds.
will flash until the emergency call is
Should this occur, assistance must be sum- concluded.
moned by other means.
왘 Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.
왘 Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.
267
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button • i

Warning! G The Roadside Assistance button • is While the call is connected you can
located below the center armrest cover. change to the navigation menu by
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
pressing NAVI button on the audio sys-
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, 왘 Open the storage compartment under
tem or COMAND* System unit.
vehicle in a dangerous road location), please the center armrest (컄 page 257).
do not wait for voice contact after you have
왘 Press and hold button (for longer than A voice connection between the Roadside
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
2 seconds). Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-
tion. The Response Center will automatically A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside of the vehicle will be established.
contact local emergency officials with the Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. 왘 Describe the nature of the need for
vehicle’s approximate location if they re- The button will flash while the call is in assistance.
ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot progress. The message
make voice contact with the vehicle occu- Connecting call will appear in the
pants. multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the
message Call connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
268
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance i If the indicator lamp on the Roadside

dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified The indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button • is flashing
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to Assistance button • remains illumi- continuously and there was no voice
tow your vehicle to the nearest nated in red for approximately connection to the Response Center
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such 10 seconds during the system established, then the Tele Aid system
as labor and/or towing, charges may ap- self-check after switching on the igni- could not initiate a Roadside Assis-
ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance Man- tion (together with the SOS button and tance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
ual for more information. the Information button ¡). phone network was not available). The
These programs are only available in the message Call failed appears in the
See system self-check (컄 page 266) if
USA: multifunction display.
the indicator lamp does not come on in
앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such red or stays on longer than Roadside Assistance calls can be
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or approximately 10 seconds. terminated using the t button on
the replacement of a flat tire with the the multifunction steering wheel or the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable. END Button on the audio system or
COMAND* System.
269
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button ¡ i i
The Information button ¡ is located While the call is connected, you can The indicator lamp in the Information
below the center armrest cover. change to the navigation menu by button ¡ remains illuminated in red
pressing NAVI button on the audio sys- for approximately 10 seconds during
왘 Open the storage compartment under
tem or COMAND* System. the system self-check after switching
the center armrest (컄 page 257).
on the ignition (together with the
왘 Press and hold button (for longer than A voice connection between the Customer SOS button and the Roadside
2 seconds). Assistance Center representative and the Assistance button •).
A call to the Customer Assistance occupants of the vehicle will be estab- See system self-check (컄 page 266) if
Center will be initiated. The button will lished. Information regarding the operation the indicator lamp does not come on in
flash while the call is in progress. The of your vehicle, the nearest red or stays on longer than
message Connecting call will appear Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz approximately 10 seconds.
in the multifunction display. USA products and services is available to
you. If the indicator lamp in the Information
When the connection is established, the button ¡ is flashing continuously
message Call connected appears in the For more details concerning the Tele Aid and there was no voice connection to
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system system, please visit www.mbusa.com and the Response Center established, then
will transmit data generating the vehicle use your ID and password (sent to you sep- the Tele Aid system could not initiate
identification number, model, color and lo- arately) to learn more (USA only). an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cation (subject to availability of cellular cellular phone network is not avail-
and GPS signals). able). The message Call failed ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
270
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information calls can be terminated Call priority !

using the t button on the multi- If other service calls such as a Roadside If the indicator lamp continues to flash
function steering wheel or the END But- Assistance call or Information call are or the system does not reset, contact
ton on the audio system or COMAND* active, an Emergency call is still possible. the Response Center at
System. In this case, the Emergency call will take 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
priority and override all other active calls. 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
! Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
If the indicator lamps do not start flash- i at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
ing after pressing one of the buttons or The indicator lamp in the respective (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or
remain illuminated (in red) at any time, button flashes until the call is conclud- Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100
the Tele Aid system has detected a ed. Emergency calls can only be termi- in Canada.
malfunction or the service is not nated by a Response Center or
currently active, and may not initiate a Customer Assistance Center represen-
call. Visit your authorized tative, whereas Roadside Assistance
Mercedes-Benz Center and have the and Information calls can also be termi-
system checked or contact the Re- nated by pressing button t on the
sponse Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in multifunction steering wheel or using
the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Cana- the END button on the audio system or
da) as soon as possible. COMAND* System.
271
Controls in detail
Useful features
Remote door unlock i Stolen Vehicle Recovery services

In case you have locked your vehicle unin- The remote door unlock feature is In the event your vehicle was stolen:
tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), available if the relevant cellular phone
왘 Report the incident to the police.
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy: network is available.
The police will issue a numbered
왘 Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response The SOS button will flash and the
incident report.
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) message Connecting call will appear
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). in the multifunction display to indicate 왘 Pass this number on to the
receipt of the door unlock command. Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
You will be asked to provide your pass-
with your password issued to you when
word which you provided when you Once the vehicle is unlocked, a
you subscribed to the service.
completed the subscriber agreement. Response Center specialist may
attempt to establish voice contact with The Response Center will then attempt
왘 Then return to your vehicle and pull the
the vehicle occupants. to covertly contact the vehicle’s
trunk recessed handle for a minimum
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
of 20 seconds until the SOS button is If the tailgate recessed handle was
located, the Response Center will
flashing. pulled for more than 20 seconds
contact the local law enforcement and
before door unlock authorization was
The message Connecting call you. The vehicle’s location will only be
received by the Response Center, you
appears in the multifunction display. provided to law enforcement.
must wait 15 minutes before pulling
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi- the tailgate recessed handle again.
cle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
272
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
When the anti-theft alarm* or the
Warning! G
tow-away alarm* (if equipped) stays on
Before programming the integrated remote
for more than 30 seconds, a call is ini-
control to a garage door opener or gate
tiated automatically to the Response
operator, make sure people and objects are
Center. See “Anti-theft alarm system*”
out of the way of the device to prevent po-
(컄 page 88) and “Tow-away alarm*”
tential harm or damage. When programming
(컄 page 90).
a garage door opener, the door moves up or
down. When programming a gate operator,
Garage door opener Interior rear view mirror with integrated re- the gate opens or closes.
mote control
The integrated remote control is capable of Do not use the integrated remote control
1 Indicator lamp with any garage door opener that lacks
operating up to three separately controlled
devices. It provides a convenient way to re- 2 3 4 Signal transmitter button safety stop and reverse features as required
place up to three hand-held remote con- by U.S. federal safety standards (this
Needed for programming (not part of vehi-
trols used to operate devices such as includes any garage door opener model
cle equipment):
garage door openers, gate openers, or oth- manufactured before April 1, 1982).
er devices compatible with HomeLink® or 5 Hand-held remote control of ga- A garage door that cannot detect an object
some other systems. rage door opener, gate operator - signaling the door to stop and reverse -
or other device does not meet current U.S. federal safety
Before the integrated remote control can standards. 컄컄
be used, it must be programmed to the ga- 6 Hand-held remote control but-
rage door opener, gate operator or other ton
device you wish to operate. See the follow-
ing instructions for programming informa-
tion.
273
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄 Step 2: Step 3:
When programming a garage door opener
park the vehicle outside the garage. 왘 If you have previously programmed a 왘 Hold the end of the hand-held remote
Do not run the engine while programming signal transmitter button and wish to control 5 of the device you wish to
the integrated remote control. Inhalation of retain its programming, proceed to train approximately 2 to 5 in
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All step 3. (5 to 12 cm) away from the signal
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be
If you are programming the integrated
(CO), and inhaling it can cause unconscious- programmed, while keeping the indica-
remote control for the first time, press
ness and possible death. tor lamp 1 in view.
and hold the two outer signal transmit-
ter buttons 2 and 4 and release Step 4:
Programming the integrated remote them only when the indicator lamp 1 왘 Using both hands, simultaneously
control begins to flash after approximately press the hand-held remote control
20 seconds (do not hold the button for button 6 and the desired signal trans-
Step 1:
longer than 30 seconds). This proce- mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33). dure erases any previous settings for release the buttons until step 5 is com-
all three channels and initializes the pleted.
memory.
The indicator lamp 1 will flash, first
If you later wish to program a second
slowly and then rapidly.
and/or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two signal transmitter
buttons, do not repeat this step and be-
gin directly with step 3.
274
Controls in detail
Useful features
i Step 6: Step 7:
The indicator lamp 1 flashes immedi- 왘 Press and hold the just-trained signal 왘 To program the remaining two signal
ately the first time the signal transmit- transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
ter button is programmed. If this button observe the indicator lamp 1. above starting with step 3.
has already been programmed, the in-
If the indicator lamp 1 stays on
dicator lamp will only start flashing af- Rolling code programming
constantly, programming is complete
ter 20 seconds.
and your device should activate when To train a garage door opener (or other
the respective signal transmitter rolling code devices) with the rolling code
Step 5: button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and re- feature, follow these instructions after
왘 After the indicator lamp 1 changes leased. completing the “Programming” portion
from a slow to a rapidly flashing light, (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
release the hand-held remote control i person may make the following training
button and the signal transmitter but- If the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly procedures quicker and easier.)
ton. for about 2 seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with
programming steps 8 through 12 as
your garage door opener may be
equipped with the “rolling code”
feature.
275
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 8: Step 10: Step 12:

왘 Locate “training” button on the garage 왘 Return to the vehicle and firmly press, 왘 Confirm the garage door operation by
door opener motor head unit. hold for 2 seconds and release the pro- pressing the programmed signal trans-
grammed signal transmitter button mitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Exact location and color of the button
(2, 3 or 4).
may vary by garage door opener brand. Step 13:
Depending on manufacturer, the Step 11: 왘 To program the remaining two signal
“training” button may also be referred 왘 Press, hold for 2 seconds and release transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
to as “learn” or “smart” button. If there same signal transmitter button a sec- above starting with step 3.
is difficulty locating the transmitting ond time to complete the training pro-
button, refer to the garage door opener cess. Gate operator/Canadian programming
operator’s manual.
i Canadian radio-frequency laws require
Step 9:
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
Some garage door openers (or other
왘 Press the “training” button on the ga- after several seconds of transmission
rolling code equipped devices) may re-
rage door opener motor head unit. which may not be long enough for the
quire you to press, hold for 2 seconds
integrated signal transmitter to pick up the
The “training light” is activated. and release the same signal transmit-
signal during programming. Similar to this
You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow- ter button a third time to complete the
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
ing two steps. training process.
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
276
Controls in detail
Useful features
If you live in Canada or if you are having 왘 Proceed with programming step 5 and 왘 Press and hold the desired signal
difficulties programming a gate operator step 6 to complete. transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
(regardless of where you live) by using the Do not release the button.
programming procedures, replace step 4 i
왘 The indicator lamp 1 will begin to
with the following: Upon completion of programming the
flash after 20 seconds. Without releas-
integrated remote control, make sure
Step 4: ing the signal transmitter button, pro-
you retain the hand-held remote con-
ceed with programming starting with
왘 Press and hold the signal transmitter trol that came with the garage door
step 3.
button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release opener, gate operator or other device.
this button until it has been successful- You may need it for use in other vehi-
Operation of integrated remote control
ly trained. cles, for future programming of an
integrated remote control, or simply for 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33).
왘 While still holding down the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4), continued use as a hand-held remote 왘 Select and press the appropriate inte-
“cycle” your hand-held remote control control to operate the respective grated signal transmitter button (2,
button 6 as follows: Press and hold device in other situations. 3 or 4) to activate the remote con-
button 6 for 2 seconds, then release trolled device.
it for 2 seconds, and again press and Reprogramming a single signal trans-
The integrated remote control trans-
hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this se- mitter button
mitter continues to send the signal as
quence on the hand-held remote con- To program a device using a signal trans- long as the button is pressed – up to
trol until the frequency signal has been mitter button previously trained, follow 20 seconds.
learned. Upon successful training, the these steps:
indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and
then rapidly after several seconds.
277
Controls in detail
Useful features
Erasing the integrated remote control Programming tips 앫 If another hand-held remote control is
memory available for the same device, try the
If you are having difficulty programming
programming steps again using that
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33). the integrated remote control, here are
other hand-held remote control. Make
some helpful tips:
왘 Simultaneously press and hold down sure new batteries are in the hand-held
the outer signal transmitter buttons 2 앫 Check the frequency of the hand-held remote control before beginning the
and 4, for approximately 20 seconds, remote control 5 (typically located on procedure.
until the indicator lamp 1 flashes rap- the reverse side of the remote). The in-
앫 Straighten the antenna wire from the
idly. Do not hold for longer than tegrated remote control is compatible
garage door opener assembly. This
30 seconds. with radio-frequency devices operating
may help improve transmitting and/or
The codes of all three channels are between 288-399 MHz.
receiving signals.
erased. 앫 Put a new battery in the hand-held re-
mote control 5. This will increase the i
i likelihood of the hand-held remote con- Certain types of garage door openers
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes trol sending a faster and more accurate are incompatible with the integrated
of all three channels. signal to the integrated remote control. remote control. If you should experi-
앫 While performing step 3, hold the ence further difficulties with program-
hand-held remote control 5 at differ- ming the integrated remote control,
ent lengths and angles from the signal contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you Center, or call Mercedes-Benz
are programming. Attempt varying an- Customer Assistance Center (in the
gles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches USA only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or
(5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at Customer Service (in Canada) at
varying distances. 1-800-387-0100.
278
Controls in detail
Useful features
i i
USA only: Canada only:
This device complies with Part 15 of This device complies with RSS-210 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to Industry Canada. Operation is subject
the following two conditions: to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful (1) This device may not cause interfer-
interference, and ence, and
(2) this device must accept any (2) this device must accept any inter-
interference received, including ference received, including interfer-
interference that may cause ence that may cause undesired
undesired operation. operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment. to operate the equipment.
279
280
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
281
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find The more cautiously you treat your vehicle After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may
detailed information on operating, main- during the break-in period, the more satis- gradually increase vehicle and engine
taining and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later speeds to the permissible maximum.
on.
!
앫 Drive your vehicle during the first
Additional instructions:
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds. 앫 During the first 1000 miles
(1500 km), do not exceed a speed
앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads
of 85 mph (140 km/h).
(full throttle driving) and excessive
engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of 앫 During this period, avoid engine
maximum rpm in each gear). speeds above 4500 rpm in each
gear.
앫 Shift gears in a timely manner.
앫 Avoid accelerating by kick-down. All of the above instructions, as may apply
앫 Do not attempt to slow the vehicle to your vehicle type, also apply when
down by shifting to a lower gear using driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km)
the gear selector lever. after the engine or the rear differential has
been replaced.
앫 Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill i
driving). Always obey applicable speed limits.
앫 Select C as the preferred shift program
(컄 page 161) for the first 1000 miles
(1500 km).
282
Operation
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals
Fuel consumption, to a great extent,

depends on driving habits and operating Warning! G Warning! G
conditions.
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-
To save fuel you should:
and driving are very dangerous combina- structing the pedals’ range of movement.
앫 Keep tires at the recommended tire tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
inflation pressures. drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
앫 Remove unnecessary loads. and judgment. the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
The possibility of a serious or even fatal have sufficient clearance.
앫 Remove roof rack when not in use.
accident are greatly increased when you
앫 Allow engine to warm up under low drink or take drugs and drive. Power assistance
load use.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
앫 Avoid frequent acceleration and decel-
G
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
eration. taking drugs.
Warning!
앫 Have all maintenance work performed With the engine not running, there is no
at the intervals specified in the power assistance for the brake and steering
Maintenance Booklet and as required systems. In this case, it is important to keep
by the maintenance service display. in mind that a considerably higher degree of
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz effort is necessary to brake and steer the
Center. vehicle.
Fuel consumption is also increased by
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go
traffic, on short trips and in hilly area.
283
Operation
Brakes To help prevent brake disk corrosion after If the parking brake is released and the
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly brake warning lamp in the instrument
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in the
Warning! G vehicle with considerable force prior to reservoir is too low.
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
After driving in heavy rain for some time the brakes.
be the reason for low brake fluid in the
without applying the brakes or through wa-
If your brake system is normally only reservoir.
ter deep enough to wet brake components,
subject to moderate loads, you should
the first braking action may be somewhat Have the brake system inspected
occasionally test the effectiveness of the
reduced and increased pedal pressure may immediately. Contact an authorized
brakes by applying above-normal braking
be necessary to obtain expected braking ef- Mercedes-Benz Center.
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
enhance the grip of the brake pads. All checks and service work on the brake
in front.
system should be carried out by qualified
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will technicians only. Contact an authorized
cause excessive and premature wear of the Warning! G Mercedes-Benz Center.
brake pads.
Make sure not to endanger any other road Only install brake pads and brake fluid
It can also result in the brakes overheating, users when carrying out these braking ma- recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
thereby significantly reducing their effec- neuvers.
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci-
dent.
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
System (BAS) (컄 page 84).
284
Operation
Driving off Parking

Warning! G
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after !
If other than recommended brake pads are driving off. Perform this procedure only
Set the parking brake whenever park-
installed, or other than recommended brake when the road is clear of other traffic.
ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not move gear selector lever to position P.
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
place full load on the engine until the
safe braking is substantially impaired. This When parking on hills, always turn front
operating temperature has been reached.
could result in an accident. wheels towards the road curb.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an
!
When driving down long and steep
extended period with the ESP® switched Warning! G
off. Doing so may cause serious damage to
grades, relieve the load on the brakes the drivetrain which is not covered by the Do not park this vehicle in areas where
by shifting into a lower gear to use the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. combustible materials such as grass, hay or
engine’s braking power. This helps leaves can come into contact with the hot
prevent overheating of the brakes and ! exhaust system, as these materials could be
reduces brake pad wear. Simultaneously depressing the ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
accelerator pedal and applying the
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive brake reduces engine performance and
sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
on for some time, rather than immediately causes premature brake and drivetrain
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
park, so that the air stream will cool down wear.
the brakes faster. 앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal. 컄컄
285
Operation
컄컄 Tires The treadwear indicator appears as a solid

앫 Move the gear selector lever to
position P. band across the tread.
앫 Slowly release brake pedal. Warning! G Warning! G
앫 When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
Although the applicable federal motor
앫 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI)
from the starter switch. you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
become visible at approximately 1/16 in
앫 Take the SmartKey with you and lock ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
the vehicle when leaving. tion to an area which is a safe distance from
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
the road.
As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm),
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody the adhesion properties on a wet road are
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires sharply reduced.
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
Depending upon the weather and/or road
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
dealer for repairs.
widely.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by

Specified tire inflation pressures must be
law. These indicators are located in six
maintained. This applies particularly if the
places on the tread circumference and
tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
become visible at a tread depth of
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper-
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which
atures).
point the tire is considered worn and
should be replaced.
286
Operation
Tire traction Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires

Warning! G (컄 page 336) with a minimum tread depth
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects icy road is always lower than on a dry road. wheels for the winter season to ensure
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You normal balanced handling characteristics.
You should pay particular attention to the
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued On packed snow, they can reduce your
condition of the road whenever the outside
driving with a flat tire or driving at high stopping distance compared to summer
temperatures are close to the freezing
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
point.
heat build-up and possibly a fire. considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise ap-
Hydroplaning Warning! G propriate caution.
Depending on the depth of the water layer If ice has formed on the road, tire traction !
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even will be substantially reduced. Under such Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce weather conditions, drive, steer and brake may cause serious damage to the
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the with extreme caution. drivetrain which is not covered by the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
rain.
287
Operation
Tire speed rating Your vehicle is factory equipped with Winter driving instructions
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local of 186 mph (300 km/h). The most important rule for slippery or icy
speed limits should be obeyed. Use roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
prudent driving speeds appropriate to abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
prevailing conditions. maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
155 mph (250 km/h).
system under such conditions.
Warning! G i When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
For information on tire speed rating for move gear selector lever to position N or in
Even when permitted by law, never operate winter tires, see “Winter tires” case of manual transmission declutch.
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi- (컄 page 336). Try to keep the vehicle under control by
mum speed rating of the tires. corrective steering action.
For additional general information on
Exceeding the maximum speed for which tire speed markings on tire sidewall, i
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire (컄 page 324).
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and For information on driving with snow
possibly resulting in an accident and/or chains, see “Snow chains”
personal injury and possible death, for you (컄 page 337).
and for others.
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
prevent this type of control loss.
288
Operation
Road salts and chemicals can adversely Standing water

affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal Warning! G
force may become necessary to produce !
the normal braking effect. If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
Do not drive through flooded areas or
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
Depressing the brake pedal periodically water of unknown depth. Before driving
and from around the vehicle with the engine
when traveling at length on salt-strewn through water, determine its depth.
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monox-
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking Never accelerate before driving into
ide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior re-
efficiency back to normal. water. The bow wave could force water
sulting in unconsciousness and death.
into the engine and auxiliary equip-
If the vehicle is parked after being driven To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, ment, thus damaging them.
on salt-treated roads, the braking open a window slightly on the side of the
efficiency should be tested as soon as vehicle not facing the wind. If you must drive through standing wa-
possible after driving is resumed. ter, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
Warning! G Warning! G or the engine compartment. Water in
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
Make sure not to endanger any other road The outside temperature indicator is not
engine or transmission, or could result
users when carrying out these braking designed to serve as an ice-warning device
in water being ingested by the engine
maneuvers. and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
through the air intake causing severe
Indicated temperatures just above the
internal engine damage. Any such
freezing point do not guarantee that the
damage is not covered by the
road surface is free of ice.
For more information, see “Winter driving”

(컄 page 336).
289
Operation
Passenger compartment Control and operation of radio Telephones* and two-way radios
transmitters
COMAND*, radio and telephone*
Always fasten items being carried as
G
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
securely as possible. Warning!
out being connected to an external antenna)
In an accident, during hard braking or sud- from inside the vehicle while the engine is
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown Please do not forget that your primary
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system,
to vehicle occupants unless the items are Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit
possibly resulting in an accident and
securely fastened in the vehicle. Management and Data System), radio or
personal injury.
telephone1 if road, weather and traffic
The trunk is the preferred place to carry conditions permit.
objects. Radio transmitters, such as a portable
telephone or a citizens band unit should
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Driving abroad only be used inside the vehicle if they are
connected to an antenna that is installed
Abroad, there is an extensive on the outside of the vehicle.
1
Mercedes-Benz service network at your Observe all legal requirements
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas instructions regarding use of an external
which are not listed in the index of your antenna.
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
290
Operation
Catalytic converter Emission control

Warning! G
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with Certain systems of the engine serve to
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or keep the toxic components of the exhaust
important element in conjunction with the operate this vehicle in areas where combus- gases within permissible limits required by
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial tible materials such as grass, hay or leaves law.
control of the pollutants in the exhaust can come into contact with the hot exhaust
These systems, of course, will function
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper system, as these materials could be ignited
properly only when maintained strictly
operating condition by following our and cause a vehicle fire.
according to factory specifications. Any
recommended maintenance instructions
adjustments on the engine should,
as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.
therefore, be carried out only by qualified
! Mercedes-Benz Center authorized techni-
cians. Engine adjustments should not be
To prevent damage to the catalytic
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified
converters, only use premium unleaded
service jobs must be carried out regularly
gasoline in this vehicle.
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing
Any noticeable irregularities in engine requirements. For details refer to the
operation should be repaired promptly. Maintenance Booklet.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat and potentially
start a fire.
291
Operation
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions and
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant 앫 Driving when your engine is badly
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon temperature may rise close to overheated can cause some fluids,
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause approximately 248°F (120°C). which may have leaked into the engine
unconsciousness and possible death. compartment, to catch fire. You could
The engine should not be operated with be seriously burned.
Do not run the engine in confined areas the coolant temperature over 248°F 앫 Steam from an overheated engine can
(such as a garage) which are not properly (120°C). Doing so may cause serious cause serious burns and can occur just
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas engine damage which is not covered by the by opening the hood. Stay away from
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the engine if you see or hear steam com-
have the cause determined and corrected ing from it.
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open at all times.
292
Operation
At the gas station
왔 At the gas station
Refueling 왘 Turn the engine off by turning the
SmartKey to position 0.
왘
Warning! G Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. 왘 Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
It burns violently and can cause serious the point indicated by arrow 1.
injury. Whenever you are around gasoline,
The fuel filler flap springs open.
avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact,
extinguish all smoking materials. Never 왘 Turn fuel cap counterclockwise and
allow sparks, flame or smoking materials hold on to it until possible pressure is
1 To open the fuel filler flap
near gasoline! released.
2 To insert the fuel filler cap
3 Supplemental tire inflation pressure 왘 Take off cap and set it in direction of
The fuel filler flap is located on the information arrow 2 in the recess on the fuel filler
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the flap.
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with i
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
the SmartKey automatically locks/unlocks Only use premium unleaded gasoline
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
the fuel filler flap. with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
unit.
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
i Information on gasoline quality can 왘 Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
In case that the central locking system normally be found on the fuel pump. unit cuts out – do not top up or
does not release the fuel filler flap, or overfill. 컄컄
For more information on gasoline, see
the opening mechanism is clamping, “Premium unleaded gasoline”
notify Roadside Assistance or an au- (컄 page 438) or the Factory Approved
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Service Products pamphlet.
293
Operation
At the gas station
컄컄 왘 Replace fuel cap by turning it clockwise Check regularly and before a long trip
Warning! G until it audibly engages.
왘 Close fuel filler flap.
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
pressure in the system which could cause a
i
gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
spray back out when removing the fuel
cap open can cause the yellow fuel
pump nozzle, which could cause personal
tank reserve warning lamp to flash and
injury.
the ú malfunction indicator lamp
(USA only) or the ± malfunction in-
dicator lamp (Canada only) to illumi-
nate. 1 Coolant
For more information, see “Practical 2 Brake fluid (fuse box cover removed)
hints” (컄 page 352) and (컄 page 353). 3 Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system*
i
Opening the hood, see (컄 page 297).
294
Operation
At the gas station
Coolant Windshield washer and headlamp Vehicle lighting

cleaning system*
For normal replenishing, use water (pota- Check function and cleanliness. For more
ble water quality). For more information, For more information on filling up the information on replacing light bulbs, see
see “Coolant level” (컄 page 301) and washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer “Replacing bulbs” (컄 page 394).
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.” system and headlamp cleaning system*”
Exterior lamp switch (컄 page 114).
(컄 page 436). (컄 page 304).
Brake fluid Engine oil level
! For more information on engine oil level,

see “Engine oil” (컄 page 298).
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks immediately.
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately. Do not add brake
fluid as this will not solve the problem.
For more information, see “Practical
hints” (컄 page 351).
Removing fuse box cover (컄 page 421).
295
Operation
At the gas station
Tire inflation pressure

For more information on tire inflation pres-
sure, see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
(컄 page 317).
296
Operation
Engine compartment
왔 Engine compartment
Hood 왘 Pull lever 1 downwards (컄 page 297). 왘 Push lever 2 under the hood upwards.
The hood is unlocked and handle 2. 왘 Pull up on the hood and then release it.
Warning! G ! The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
To avoid damage to the windshield
Do not pull the release lever while the struts.
wipers or hood, never open the hood if
vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood
the wiper arms are folded forward away
could be forced open by passing air flow.
from the windshield. Warning! G
Opening To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
The hood lock release lever is located to moving parts when the hood is open and the
the left of the steering wheel under the engine is running. Make sure the hood is
dashboard. properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or even restart
after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
2 Lever for opening the hood
1 Hood lock release lever
297
Operation
Engine compartment
Closing Engine oil

Warning! G
The amount of oil your engine needs will
If you see flames or smoke coming from the Warning! G depend on a number of factors, including
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem- driving style. Higher oil consumption can
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
perature gauge indicates that the engine is occur when
anyone.
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
앫 the vehicle is new
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary, 왘 Let the hood drop from a height of 앫 the vehicle is driven frequently at
call the fire department. approximately 1 ft (30 cm). higher engine speeds
The hood will lock audibly. Engine oil consumption checks should only
왘
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Warning! G Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed. i
The engine is equipped with a transistorized If you can raise the hood at a point Do not use any special lubricant addi-
ignition system. Because of the high voltage above the headlamps, then it is not tives, as these may damage the drive
it is dangerous to touch any components properly closed. Open it again and let it assemblies. Using special additives not
(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnos- drop with somewhat greater force. approved by Mercedes-Benz may
tic socket) of the ignition system cause damage not covered by the
앫 with the engine running Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫 while starting the engine
More information on this subject is
available at any Mercedes-Benz
앫 if ignition is “on” and the engine is Center.
turned manually
298
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level with the 앫 Add 2.0 qts engine oil
control system for max. oil level
(Canada: 2.0 l)
When checking the oil level
앫 the vehicle must be parked on level i
ground If you want to interrupt the checking
앫 with the engine at operating tempera- procedure, press the k or j
ture, the vehicle must have been button on the multifunction steering
stationary for at least 5 minutes with wheel.
the engine turned off
One of the following messages will 왘 If necessary, add engine oil.
앫 with the engine not at operating tem- subsequently appear in the multifunc-
perature yet, the vehicle must have For adding engine oil, see (컄 page 300).
tion display:
been stationary for at least 30 minutes For more information on engine oil, see the
with the engine turned off 앫 Engine oil
“Technical data” section (컄 page 436) and
level
To check the engine oil level via the (컄 page 437).
OK
multifunction display, do the following:
앫 Add 1.0 qt engine oil Other display messages
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33). for max. oil level
If the SmartKey is not turned to position 2
The standard display (컄 page 125) should (Canada: 1.0 l)
in the starter switch, the following
appear in the multifunction display. 앫 Add 1.5 qts engine oil message will appear:
왘 Press button k or j on the for max. oil level
Switch ignition on to
multifunction steering wheel until the (Canada: 1.5 l)
check engine oil level
following message is seen in the multi-
function display: 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33).
299
Operation
Engine compartment
If you see the message: If there is excess engine oil with the engine Adding engine oil
at operating temperature, the following
Observe waiting time !
message will appear:
왘 If engine is at operating temperature, Only use approved engine oils and oil
Engine oil level
wait 5 minutes before repeating check filters required for vehicles with
Reduce oil level
procedure. Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or
왘 Have excess oil siphoned or drained FSS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of
왘 If engine is not at operating tempera-
ture yet, wait 30 minutes before off. Contact an authorized approved engine oils and oil filters,
repeating check procedure. Mercedes-Benz Center. refer to the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet in your vehicle
If you see the message: ! literature portfolio, or contact an
Engine oil level
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Not when engine on
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not Using engine oils and oil filters of
왘 Turn off the engine. covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited specification other than those
Warranty. expressly required for the Maintenance
왘 If the engine is at operating tempera- System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada
ture, wait 5 minutes before checking vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter
oil. For more information on messages in the
at change intervals longer than those
multifunction display concerning engine
왘 If the engine is not at operating temper- called for by the Maintenance System
oil, see the “Practical hints” section
ature yet, you must wait 30 minutes (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada
(컄 page 371) and (컄 page 372).
before checking oil. vehicles) will result in engine damage
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
300
Operation
Engine compartment
! Transmission fluid level

Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the The transmission fluid level does not need
engine and catalytic converter not to be checked. If you notice transmission
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
Warranty. have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the transmission.
왘 Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
Coolant level
For more information on engine oil, see the
1 Filler cap “Technical data” section (컄 page 436) and The engine coolant is a mixture of water
(컄 page 437). and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
왘 Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck. the coolant level, the vehicle must be
왘 Add engine oil as required. Be careful parked on level ground and the engine
not to overfill with oil. must be cool.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
301
Operation
Engine compartment
The coolant expansion tank is located on 왘 Continue turning the cap counterclock-
Warning! G the passenger side of the engine compart- wise and remove it.
ment.
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns: The coolant level is correct if the level
앫 Use extreme caution when opening the 앫 for cold coolant: reaches the black
hood if there are any signs of steam or top part of the reservoir
coolant leaking from the cooling system, 앫 for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
(1.5 cm) higher
cates that the coolant is overheated.
왘 Add coolant as required.
앫 Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is 왘 Replace and tighten cap.
above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to
cool down before removing cap. The For more information on coolant, see
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and “Coolants” (컄 page 439).
1 Coolant expansion tank
is under pressure.
2 Cap
앫 Using a rag, slowly open the cap
approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess 왘 Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly approx-
pressure. If opened immediately, scald- imately one half counterclockwise to
ing hot fluid and steam will be blown out release any excess pressure.
under pressure.
앫 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene
glycol which may burn if it comes into
contact with hot engine parts.
302
Operation
Engine compartment
Battery
G Observe E Wear eye protection.
all safety instructions
and precautions when handling
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the
automotive batteries.
C
engine compartment on the right hand Keep children away.
A
side (컄 page 411). Risk of explosion
The battery should always be sufficiently
F Follow the instructions in this
D from battery. Do not smoke.
charged in order to achieve its rated Keep flames or sparks away
Operator’s Manual.
service life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet
for battery maintenance intervals.
B Battery
If you use your vehicle mostly for acid is caustic. Do not
short-distance trips, you will need to have allow it to come into contact Batteries contain materials that can harm
the battery charge checked more with skin, eyes or clothing. the environment if disposed of improperly.
frequently. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
In case it does, immediately method of disposal. Many states require
When replacing the battery, always use flush affected area with clean sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz. water and seek medical help if for recycling.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle necessary.
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
303
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer system and During all seasons, add MB Windshield !

headlamp cleaning system* Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to Only use washer fluid which is suitable
water. Premix the windshield washer fluid for plastic lenses. Improper washer
The windshield washer reservoir is located in a suitable container. fluid can damage the plastic lenses of
in the engine compartment. the headlamps.
Warning! G
For more information, see “Windshield
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma- washer and headlamp cleaning system*”
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze (컄 page 442).
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield

Washer Concentrate and water (or
1 Washer fluid reservoir commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze,
Fluid for the windshield washer system and depending on ambient temperatures).
the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
has a capacity of: where temperatures may fall below the
freezing point. Failure to do so could
앫 3.2 US qt (3.0 l) in vehicles without result in damage to the washer
headlamp cleaning system system/reservoir.
앫 6.4 US qt (6.0 l) in vehicles with
headlamp cleaning system
304
Operation
Tires and wheels
왔 Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Important guidelines
for information on tested and Warning! G
recommended rims and tires for summer 앫 Only use sets of tires and rims of the
and winter operation. They can also offer Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the same type and make.
advice concerning tire service and tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
앫 Tires must be of the correct size for the
purchase. sustained damage, replace them.
rim.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
앫 Break in new tires for approximately
Warning! G Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
speeds.
Replace rims or tires with the same designa-
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the accident. 앫 Regularly check the tires and rims for
original part. See an authorized Retreaded tires are not tested or recom- damage. Dented or bent rims can
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa- mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous cause tire inflation pressure loss and
tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are damage cannot always be recognized on re- damage to the tire beads.
mounted: treads. The operating safety of the vehicle 앫 If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
앫 The wheel brakes or suspension cannot be assured when such tires are used. inflation pressure and correct as
components can be damaged. required.
앫 The operating clearance of the wheels 앫 Do not allow your tires to wear down
and the tires may no longer be correct. too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫 When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
305
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire care and maintenance Tire inspection Life of tire

Every time you check your tire inflation The service life of a tire is dependent upon
Warning! G pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
varying factors including but not limited to:
앫 Driving style
Regularly check the tires for damage. Dam- 앫 excessive treadwear (컄 page 307) 앫 Tire inflation pressure
aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
앫 cord or fabric showing through the
loss. As a result, you could lose control of 앫 Distance driven
tire’s rubber
your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
앫 bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Warning! G
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them. Replace the tire if you find any of the above Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
conditions. 6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
at least once a month. For more informa- periodically for condition and inflation.
tion on checking tire inflation pressure see Spare tires will age and become worn over
“Recommended tire inflation pressure” time even if never used, and thus should be
(컄 page 315). inspected and replaced when necessary.
306
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tread depth Storing tires

to wear down to that level. As tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion !
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are properties on a wet road are sharply
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
sharply reduced at tread depths under reduced.
1 place with as little exposure to light as
/8 in (3 mm). Depending upon the weather and/or road possible. Protect tires from contact
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by surface (conditions), the tire traction varies with oil, grease and gasoline.
law. These indicators are located in six widely.
places on the tread circumference and Cleaning tires
become visible at a tread depth of approx-
imately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point !
the tire is considered worn and should be Never use a round nozzle to power
replaced. wash tires. The intense jet of water can
Recommended minimum tire tread depth: result in damage to the tire.
앫 Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm) Always replace a damaged tire.
앫 Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)
Warning! G 1 TWI (TreadWear Indicator)

Although the applicable federal motor safety The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
laws consider a tire to be worn when the band across the tread.
treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we
recommend that you do not allow your tires
307
Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation Loading the vehicle 앫 The Certification label, also found on
the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about
Unidirectional tires offer added advan- Two labels on your vehicle show how much the gross weight capacity of your vehi-
tages, such as better hydroplaning perfor- weight it may properly carry. cle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
mance. To benefit, however, you must Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
앫 The Tire and Loading Information
make sure the tires rotate in the direction weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire
specified. fuel and cargo. The Certification label
Information placard (Example B) can be
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the found on the driver’s door B-pillar. This also tells you about the front and rear
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of placard tells you important information axle weight capacity, called the Gross
the tire. about the number of people that can be Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR
in the vehicle and the total weight that is the total allowable weight that can be
i can be carried in the vehicle. It also carried by a single axle (front or rear).
Spare wheels may be mounted against contains information on the proper size Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for
the direction of rotation (spinning) even and recommended tire inflation either the front axle or rear axle.
with a unidirectional tire for temporary pressures for the original equipment
use only until the regular drive wheel tires on your vehicle.
has been repaired or replaced. Always
observe and follow applicable tempo-
rary use restrictions and speed limita-
tions indicated on the spare wheel.
308
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and Loading Information i

Data shown on placard examples are
Warning! G for illustration purposes only. Load lim-
it data are specific to each vehicle and
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the may vary from data shown in the illus-
specified load limit or vehicle capacity trations below. Refer to placard on ve-
weight as indicated on the placard on the hicle for actual data specific to your
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires vehicle.
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also Placard (Example A)
1 Driver’s door B-pillar
result in handling or steering problems, or
Following is a discussion on how to work brake failure.
with the information contained on the two
placards with regards to loading your Your vehicle is equipped with either the
vehicle. Tire and Loading Information placard
(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information
placard (Example B).
1 Load limit information on the Tire and

Loading Information placard
309
Operation
Tires and wheels
The placard showing the load limit informa- The placard showing the load limit informa- Seating capacity
tion is located on the driver’s door B-pillar. tion is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
The seating capacity gives you important
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle
information on the number of occupants
Loading Information placard (Example A), Tire Information placard (Example B),
that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
locate the statement “The combined locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity
and rear seating capacity. Your vehicle is
weight of occupants and cargo should Weight” on this placard. The combined
equipped with either placard Example A or
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.” weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage
placard Example B located on the driver’s
on this placard. The combined weight of all and trailer tongue (if applicable) should
door B-pillar (컄 page 309).
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer never exceed the weight listed next to
tongue load (if applicable) should never vehicle capacity weight. i
exceed the weight referenced in that Data shown on placard examples are
statement. for illustration purposes only. Load lim-
it data are specific to each vehicle and
Placard (Example B) may vary from data shown in the illus-
trations below. Refer to placard on ve-
hicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
1 Load limit information on the Vehicle

Tire Information placard
310
Operation
Tires and wheels
Steps for determining correct load limit Step 3

The following steps have been developed 왘 Subtract the combined weight of the
as required of all manufacturers under driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, grams or XXX lbs.
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic
Step 4
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
왘 The resulting figure equals the avail-
Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard able amount of cargo and luggage load
Example A) capacity. For example, if the “XXX”
왘 Locate the statement “The combined amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
Placard (Example A) weight of occupants and cargo should be five 150 lbs. passengers in your
1 Seating capacity never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on vehicle, the amount of available cargo
your vehicle’s placard. and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard
Example B) Step 5
왘 Locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity 왘 Determine the combined weight of
Weight” on your vehicle’s placard. luggage and cargo being loaded on the
Step 2 vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
왘 Determine the combined weight of the load capacity calculated in step 4. 컄컄
driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
Placard (Example B)
1 Seating capacity
311
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄Step 6 (if applicable)

왘 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (컄 page 314).
The following table shows examples on
how to calculate total and cargo load
capacities with varying seating configura-
tions and number and size of occupants.
The following examples use a load limit
of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
purposes only. Make sure you are using
the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
on the vehicle’s placard (컄 page 309).
312
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example Combined Number of Seating Occupants weight Combined Available cargo/luggage and trailer
weight limit occupants configura- weight of all tongue weight (total load limit or
of occu- (driver and tion occupants vehicle capacity weight from plac-
pants and passengers) ard minus combined weight of all
cargo from occupants)
placard
1 1500 lbs 5 front: 2 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 750 lbs 1500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
rear: 3 Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
rear: 2 Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, the

less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (컄 page 314).
313
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The Trailer tongue load
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
Even after careful determination of the The tongue load of any trailer is an impor-
all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
combined weight of all occupants, cargo tant weight to measure because it affects
(컄 page 314) must never exceed the
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable) the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
GVWR.
(컄 page 314) as to not exceed the permis- trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
sible load limit, you must make sure that Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The to- added to the weight of all occupants riding
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehi- tal allowable weight that can be carried by and any cargo you are carrying in the
cle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross a single axle (front or rear). vehicle. The tongue load typically is ten
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the percent of the trailer weight and every-
To assure that your vehicle does not ex-
front or rear axle. You can obtain the thing loaded in it.
ceed the maximum permissible weight
GVWR and GAWR from the Certification la-
limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
bel. The Certification Label can be found
axle), have the loaded vehicle (including primarily to carry passengers and their
on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical
driver, passengers and all cargo and, if ap- cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recom-
data” (컄 page 426).
plicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a mend trailer towing with your vehicle.
suitable commercial scale.
314
Operation
Tires and wheels
Recommended tire inflation pressure The tire inflation pressure should be Placard (Example A)
checked regularly and should only be ad-
justed on cold tires. The tires can be con-
Warning! G sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked
for at least three hours or driven less than
Follow recommended tire inflation one mile (1.6 km).
pressures.
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires pressures listed on placard.
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy, Keeping the tires properly inflated
and are more likely to fail from being over- provides the best handling, tread life and
heated. riding comfort. 1 Tire and Loading Information placard
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires In addition to the tire placard on the with recommended cold tire inflation
can adversely affect handling and ride driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel pressures
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping filler flap for any additional information Placard (Example A) lists the recommend-
distance, and result in sudden deflation pertaining to special driving situations. For ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi-
(blowout) because they are more likely to more information, see “Important notes on mum loaded vehicle weight. The tire
become punctured or damaged by road tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 316). inflation pressures listed apply to the tires
debris, potholes etc. installed as original equipment.
i
Data shown on placard examples are
Your vehicle is equipped with either the for illustration purposes only. Tire data
Tire and Loading Information placard are specific to each vehicle and may
(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information vary from data shown in the illustra-
placard (Example B) located on the driver’s tions below. Refer to placard on vehicle
door B-pillar (컄 page 309). for actual data specific to your vehicle.
315
Operation
Tires and wheels
Placard (Example B) Important notes on tire inflation Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
Warning! G adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly inflation pressure information for vehicle
drops: loads less than the maximum loaded
앫 Check the tires for punctures from vehicle condition. If such information is
foreign objects. provided, it can be found on the placard
located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
앫 Check to see whether air is leaking from
1 Vehicle Tire Information placard with the valves or from around the rim. Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi-
recommended cold tire inflation mately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of
pressures Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure air temperature change. Keep this in mind
are also increased while driving, depending when checking tire inflation pressure
Placard (Example B) lists the recommend- where the temperature is different from
on the driving speed and the tire load.
ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi- the outside temperature.
mum loaded vehicle weight. The tire If you will be driving your vehicle at high
inflation pressures listed apply to the tires speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
installed as original equipment. where it is legal and conditions allow,
consult the placard on the inside of the fuel
i filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire
Placard (Example B) may list inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
recommended cold tire inflation tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
pressures for different vehicle loads. build up and result in sudden tire failure.
316
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure Checking tire inflation pressure

Warning! G manually
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
Follow recommended tire inflation pres- Follow the steps below to achieve correct
at least once a month.
sures. tire inflation pressure:
Check and adjust the tire inflation
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires 왘 Remove the cap from the valve on one
pressure when the tires are cold. The tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be- tire.
can be considered cold if the vehicle has
been parked for at least three hours or cause they are more likely to become punc- 왘 Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
driven less than one mile (1.6 km). tured or damaged by road debris, potholes, valve.
etc.
If you check the tire inflation pressure 왘 Read tire inflation pressure on tire
when the tires are warm (the vehicle has Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires gauge and check against the recom-
been driven for several miles or sitting less wear unevenly, adversely affect handling mended tire inflation pressure on the
than three hours), the reading will be and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than from being overheated. (컄 page 315). If necessary, add air to
the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let Do not overload the tires by exceeding the achieve the recommended tire inflation
air out to match the specified cold tire specified load limit or vehicle capacity pressure. 컄컄
inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will weight as indicated on the placard on the
be underinflated. driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout.
317
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 i Run Flat Indicator* (Canada only)

If you have overfilled the tire, release While the vehicle is being driven, the Run
Warning! G
tire inflation pressure by pushing the Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation When the multifunction display shows the
metal stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rota- message Tire pressure Check tires,
a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation tional speed. This allows the system to de- one or more of your tires is significantly un-
pressure with the tire gauge. tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire. der-inflated. You should stop and check
If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
왘 Install the valve cap. to falling tire inflation pressure, you will them to the proper tire inflation pressure as
see a corresponding warning message in indicated on the vehicle’s tire information
왘 Repeat this procedure for each tire.
the multifunction display. placard. Driving on a significantly under-in-
The Run Flat Indicator* may function in a flated tire causes the tire to overheat and
restricted manner or with a delay if: can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
앫 snow chains are mounted to the
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
vehicle
stopping ability. Each tire, including the
앫 winter road conditions prevail in spare, should be checked monthly when
presence of ice and snow cold and set to the recommended tire infla-
앫 you are driving on a loose surface (e.g. tion pressure as specified in the vehicle
sand or gravel) placard and owner’s manual.
앫 you are driving in a very sporty manner

(involving rapid acceleration or high
speeds in curves)
318
Operation
Tires and wheels
i Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator*

The recommended tire inflation pres-
Warning! G The tire inflation pressure monitor must be
sures for your vehicle can be found on reactivated in the following situations:
The Run Flat Indicator* does not provide a
the tire placard located on the driver’s
warning for wrongly selected tire inflation 앫 If you have changed the tire inflation
door B-pillar (컄 page 315). The tire in-
pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pres- pressure
flation pressures are not listed in the
sure according to the placard on the driver’s
owner’s manual. 앫 If you have replaced the wheels or tires
door B-pillar or fuel filler flap.
앫 If you have installed new wheels or
The Run Flat Indicator* does not replace
tires
regular checks of the tire inflation pressures
since a gradual pressure loss in all four tires 왘 Using the tire placard on the driver’s
cannot be detected by the Run Flat door B-pillar or, if available, the inside
Indicator*. of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
The Run Flat Indicator* is not able to issue a inflation pressure of all four tires is cor-
warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of rect.
tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout
caused by a foreign object). In this case
bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply-
ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering
maneuvers.
319
Operation
Tires and wheels
If you wish to confirm activation: Potential problems associated with

Warning! G 왘 Press button æ.
underinflated and overinflated tires
The Run Flat Indicator* can only warn you in The following message will appear in Underinflated tires
a reliable manner if you have set the correct the multifunction display:
tire inflation pressures for each tire. Underinflated tires can:
Run Flat Indicator
If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was Reactivated 앫 cause excessive and uneven tire wear
set, the system will monitor the pressure After a certain “learning phase”, the Run 앫 adversely affect fuel economy
according to the incorrect value. Flat Indicator checks the set pressure
앫 lead to tire failure from being
values for all four tires.
overheated
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33). If you wish to cancel activation:
앫 adversely affect handling
The standard display menu appears in 왘 Press button ç. characteristics
the multifunction display (컄 page 130).
or
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
왘 Wait until the message Warning! G
until the following message appears in
the multifunction display: Tire pres. OK now?
Follow recommended tire inflation pres-
Run Flat Indicator disappears.
sures.
active
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
Reactivation possible: +
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
왘 Press button æ. adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
The following message will appear in and are more likely to fail from being
the multifunction display: overheated.
Tire pres. OK now?
320
Operation
Tires and wheels
Overinflated tires Tire labeling 1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards

(컄 page 329)
Overinflated tires can:
Besides tire name (sales designation) and 2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
앫 adversely affect handling manufacturer name, a number of markings (컄 page 326)
characteristics can be found on a tire. 3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 327)
앫 cause uneven tire wear Following are some explanations for the 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
markings on your vehicle’s tires: (컄 page 328)
앫 be more prone to damage from road 5 Manufacturer
hazards 6 Tire ply material (컄 page 331)
앫 adversely affect ride comfort 7 Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (컄 page 322)
앫 increase stopping distance
8 Load identification (컄 page 325)
9 Tire name
Warning! G
i
Follow recommended tire inflation For illustration purposes only. Actual
pressures. data on tires is specific to each vehicle
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires and may vary from data shown in above
can adversely affect handling and ride illustration.
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping For more information, see “Rims and
distance, and result in sudden deflation Tires” (컄 page 429).
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
321
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire size designation, load and speed General: Tire width

rating
Depending on the design standards used, The tire width 1 (컄 page 322) indicates
the tire size molded into the sidewall may the nominal tire width in mm.
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire
size designation. Aspect ratio
No letter preceding the size designation The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 322) is the
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire dimensional relationship between tire
based on European design standards. section height and section width and is
Letter “P” preceding the size designation: expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design is arrived at by dividing section height by
standards. section width.
1 Tire width
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation: Tire code
2 Aspect ratio in %
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
3 Radial tire code The tire code 3 (컄 page 322) indicates
standards.
4 Rim diameter the tire construction type. The “R” stands
5 Tire load rating Letter “T” preceding the size designation: for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diag-
6 Tire speed rating Temporary spare tires which are high onal or bias ply construction; letter “B”
pressure compact spares designed for means belted-bias ply construction.
i temporary emergency use only.
For illustration purposes only. Actual At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
data on tires is specific to each vehicle with a speed capability above 149 mph
and may vary from data shown in above (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
illustration. designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
For additional information, see “Tire speed
rating” (컄 page 324).
322
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rim diameter For additional information on tire load

The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 322) is the
Warning! G rating, see “Load identification”
(컄 page 325).
diameter of the bead seat, not the The tire load rating must always be at least
diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is half of the GAWR (컄 page 332) of your vehi- i
indicated in inches (in). cle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 322) and
which may cause an accident and/or seri- tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 322) are
Tire load rating ous personal injury to you or others. also referred to as “service descrip-
The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 322) is a Always replace rims and tires with the same tion”.
numerical code associated with the designation, manufacturer and type as
maximum load a tire can support. shown on the original part.
For example, a load rating of 91 corre-
sponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support. Warning! G
See also “Maximum tire load”
(컄 page 327) where the maximum load as- Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
sociated with the load index is indicated in specified load limit or vehicle capacity
kilograms and lbs. weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
brake failure.
323
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire speed rating Summer tires is comprised of the tire load rating 5
(컄 page 322) and the tire speed
The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 322) Index Speed rating rating 6 (컄 page 322).
indicates the approved maximum speed
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
for the tire. If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) designation and no service
Warning! G S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) description 5 and 6 (컄 page 322) is
given, the tire manufacturer must be
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Even when permitted by law, never operate consulted for the maximum speed
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) capability.
a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires. V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) If a service description 5 and 6
Exceeding the maximum speed for which W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) (컄 page 322) is given, the speed capa-
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) bility is limited by the speed symbol in
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and the service description.
(Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h) Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h) In this example, “97Y” is the service
and for others. description. The letter “Y” designates
앫 At the tire manufacturer’s option, any the speed rating and the speed capabil-
tire with a speed capability above ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph
i (300 km/h).
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a
Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 322) and “ZR” in the size designation (for exam-
tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 322) are ple: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the
also referred to as “service descrip- maximum speed capability of the tire,
tion”. the service description for the tire must
be referred to. The service description
324
Operation
Tires and wheels
앫 Any tire with a speed capability above i Load identification

186 mph (300 km/h) must include a Not all M+S rated tires provide special
“ZR” in the size designation AND the winter performance. Make sure the
service description must be placed in tires you use show M+S and the moun-
parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 tain/snowflake.marking on the
(99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in paren- tire sidewall. These tires meet specific
thesis designates the maximum speed snow traction performance require-
capability of the tire as being above ments of the Rubber Manufacturers As-
186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire sociation (RMA) and the Rubber
manufacturer for the actual maximum Association of Canada (RAC) and have
permissible speed of the tire. been designed specifically for use in
All-season and winter tires snow conditions. 1 Load identification
Index Speed rating i
1
Q M+S up to 100 mph (160 km/h) For illustration purposes only. Actual
T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) data on tires is specific to each vehicle
and may vary from data shown in above
H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
illustration.
V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
1
or M+S.for winter tires
325
Operation
Tires and wheels
In addition to tire load rating, special load DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
information may be molded into the tire
sidewall following the letter designating U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
the tire speed rating 1 (컄 page 325). manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
No specification given: absence of any text
produced.
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire. The TIN is a unique identifier which facili-
tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
purchasers in recall situations or other
(or reinforced) tire.
safety matters concerning tires and gives
Light Load: designates a light load tire. purchasers the means to easily identify 1 DOT
such tires. 2 Manufacturer’s identification mark
C, D, E: designates load range associated 3 Tire size
with the maximum load a tire can carry at The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s 4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire
a specified pressure. identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type manufacturer)
code” and “Date of manufacture”. 5 Date of manufacture
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires is specific to each vehicle
illustration.
326
Operation
Tires and wheels
DOT (Department of Transportation) Tire type code Maximum tire load

A tire branding symbol 1 (컄 page 326) The code 4 (컄 page 326) may, at the
which denotes the tire meets require- option of the manufacturer, be used as a
ments of the U.S. Department of Transpor- descriptive code for identifying significant
tation. characteristics of the tire.
Manufacturer’s identification mark Date of manufacture

The manufacturer’s identification mark 2 The date of manufacture 5 (컄 page 326)
(컄 page 326) denotes the tire identifies the week and year of manufac-
manufacturer. ture.
New tires have a mark with two symbols. The first two figures identify the week, 1 Maximum tire load rating
starting with “01” to represent the first full
Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym-
bols. For more information on retreaded
week of the calendar year. The second two i
figures represent the year. For illustration purposes only. Actual
tires, see (컄 page 305).
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd data on tires is specific to each vehicle
Tire size week of 2002. and may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
The code 3 (컄 page 326) indicates the
tire size.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
327
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum tire inflation pressure Always follow the recommended tire

Warning! G inflation pressure (컄 page 315) for proper
tire inflation.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard located Warning! G
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
pressures.
brake failure. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adverse-
1 Maximum permissible tire inflation ly affect handling and fuel economy, and are
For more information on tire load rating
pressure more likely to fail from being overheated.
(컄 page 323).
i Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
For information on calculating total and
can adversely affect handling and ride com-
cargo load capacities (컄 page 311). For illustration purposes only. Actual
fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis-
tance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
illustration.
become punctured or damaged by road de-
bris, potholes etc.
This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure for the tire.
328
Operation
Tires and wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Quality grades can be found, where appli- Treadwear
(U.S. vehicles) cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
shoulder and maximum section width. For
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
Tire manufacturers are required to grade example:
tested under controlled conditions on a
tires based on three performance
specified government test course. For ex-
factors: treadwear, traction and Treadwear Traction Temperature
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one
temperature resistance. 200 AA A and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
All passenger car tires must conform to The relative performance of tires depends
federal safety requirements in addition to upon the actual conditions of their use,
these grades. however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
1 Treadwear
2 Traction
3 Temperature resistance
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
illustration.
329
Operation
Tires and wheels
Traction Temperature
The traction grades, from highest to low- The temperature grades are A (the high-
Warning! G
est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep- est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis- The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet tance to the generation of heat and its lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
pavement as measured under controlled ability to dissipate heat when tested under not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-
conditions on specified government test controlled conditions on a specified indoor flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- rately or in combination, can cause
marked C may have poor traction perfor- perature can cause the material of the tire excessive heat build-up and possible tire
mance. to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex- failure.
cessive temperature can lead to sudden
Warning! G tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
The traction grade assigned to this tire is car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-
based on straight-ahead braking traction tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
tests, and does not include acceleration, Grades B and A represent higher levels of
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction performance on the laboratory test wheel
characteristics. than the minimum required by law.
330
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire ply material Tire and loading terminology Aspect ratio

Dimensional relationship between tire
Accessory weight section height and section width
expressed in percentage.
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
Bar
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power Another metric unit for air pressure. There
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi)
these items are available as to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascal (kPa)
factory-installed equipment (whether to 1 bar.
installed or not).
1 Plies in sidewall Bead
2 Plies under tread Air pressure The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
i The amount of air inside the tire pressing by steel cords that hold the tire onto the
For illustration purposes only. Actual outward on each square inch of the tire. rim.
data on tires is specific to each vehicle Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
and may vary from data shown in above square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or Cold tire inflation pressure
illustration. bar. Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or
This marking tells you about the type of driven no more than one mile (1.6 km).
cord and number of plies in the sidewall
and under the tread.
331
Operation
Tires and wheels
Curb weight GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Kilopascal (kPa)

The weight of a motor vehicle with The GVW comprises the weight of the The metric unit for air pressure. There are
standard equipment including the maxi- vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, 6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
mum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, installed accessories, passengers and pressure is bar. There are
if so equipped, air conditioning and cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
additional optional equipment, but without load. The GVW must never exceed the
passengers and cargo. GVWR indicated on the Certification label Maximum load rating
located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
The maximum load in kilograms and
DOT (Department of Transportation)
pounds that can be carried by the tire.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
A tire branding symbol which denotes the
tire meets requirements of the This is the maximum permissible vehicle Maximum loaded vehicle weight
U.S. Department of Transportation. weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
the vehicle including all options, passen- vehicle capacity weight and production
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) gers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, options weight.
The GAWR is the maximum permissible trailer tongue load). It is indicated on
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on Certification label located on the driver’s
each axle must never exceed the GAWR for door B-pillar.
the front and rear axle indicated on the
Certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar.
332
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum tire inflation pressure Production options weight Rim

This number is the greatest amount of air The combined weight of those installed A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
pressure that should ever be put in the tire regular production options weighing over assembly upon which the tire beads are
under normal driving conditions. 5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those seated.
standard items which they replace, not
Normal occupant weight previously considered in curb weight or Sidewall
accessory weight, including heavy duty
The number of occupants the vehicle is The portion of a tire between the tread and
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
designed to seat, multiplied by the bead.
battery, and special trim.
68 kilograms (150 lbs).
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
Occupant distribution Unique identifier which facilitates efforts
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle A standard unit of measure for air pressure by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers
at their designated seating positions. -> bar, kilopascal (kPa). in recall situations or other safety matters
concerning tires and gives purchases the
Recommended tire inflation pressure means to easily identify such tires. The TIN
Recommended tire inflation pressure is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identifica-
listed on placard located on driver’s door tion mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
B-pillar for normal driving conditions. and “Date of manufacture”.
Provides best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
333
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire load rating Traction Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

Numerical code associated with the Force exerted by the vehicle on the road A tire information system that provides
maximum load a tire can support. via the tires. The amount of grip provided. consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
Tire ply composition and material used Tread determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The
This indicates the number of plies or the The portion of a tire that comes into
ratings are molded into the sidewall of the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in contact with the road.
tire.
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufac-
turers also must indicate the ply materials Treadwear indicators
Vehicle capacity weight
in the tire and sidewall, which include Narrow bands, sometimes called
steel, nylon, polyester, and others. “wear bars” that show across the tread of Rated cargo and luggage load plus
a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread 68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s
Tire speed rating remains. designated seating capacity.
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved. Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle
weight and dividing it by two.
334
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rotating tires If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configu-

ration, tires can be rotated according to Warning! G
the tire manufacturer’s recommended in-
Warning! G tervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty Have the tightening torque checked after
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature changing a wheel. Wheels could become
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires portfolio. If none is available, tires should loose if not tightened with a torque of
are of the same dimension. be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size (5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if neces- Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
tires (different tire dimensions front vs. sary, according to the degree of tire wear. bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
rear), tire rotation is not possible. The same rotation (spinning) direction
must be maintained (컄 page 308).
For information on wheel change, see the
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles Rotate tires before the characteristic tire “Practical hints” section (컄 page 380) and
with tires of the same dimension all wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder (컄 page 404).
around. If your vehicle is equipped with wear on front tires and tread center wear
tires of the same dimension all around, on rear tires).
tires can be rotated, observing a a Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
front-to-rear rotation pattern that will wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
maintain the intended rotation (spinning) of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
direction of the tire (컄 page 308). Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
In some cases, such as when your vehicle pressure.
is equipped with mixed-size tires (different
tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
is not possible.
335
Operation
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your Winter tires

vehicle winterized at an authorized Warning! G
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service Always use winter tires at temperatures
includes: below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated 6
앫 Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
tires provide special winter performance. longer suitable for winter operation.
concentration.
Make sure the tires you use show M+S and
앫 Addition of cleaning concentrate to the the mountain/snowflake.marking on Always observe the speed rating of the
water of the windshield and headlamp the tire sidewall. These tires meet specific winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate snow traction performance requirements maximum speed for which your tires are
“MB SummerFit” to a premixed wind- of the Rubber Manufacturers Association rated is below the speed rating of your
shield washer solvent/antifreeze (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Can- vehicle, you must place a notice to this
which is formulated for below freezing ada (RAC) and have been designed specif- effect where it will be seen by the driver.
temperatures (컄 page 442). ically for use in snow conditions. Use of Such notices are available from your tire
앫 Battery test. Battery capacity drops winter tires is the only way to achieve the dealer or from any authorized
with decreasing ambient temperature. maximum effectiveness of the ABS and Mercedes-Benz Center.
A well charged battery helps to make ESP® in winter operation.
sure that the engine can be started, For safe handling, make sure that all
even at low ambient temperatures. mounted winter tires are of the same make
앫 Tire change. and have the same tread design.
336
Operation
Winter driving
Snow chains 앫 Only use snow chains that are

Warning! G approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your
Snow chains should only be driven on authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
If you use your spare tire when winter tires snow-covered roads at speeds not to be glad to advise you on this subject.
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
앫 Use of snow chains may be prohibited
the difference in tire characteristics may as soon as possible when driving on roads
very well impair turning stability and that depending on location. Always check
without snow.
overall driving stability may be reduced. local and state laws before installing
Adapt your driving style accordingly. i snow chains.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter When driving with snow chains, you !
tire at the nearest authorized may wish to deactivate the ESP®
Some tire sizes do not leave adequate
Mercedes-Benz Center. (컄 page 84) before setting the vehicle
clearance for snow chains. To help
in motion. This will improve the
avoid serious damage to your vehicle or
vehicle’s traction.
Block heater (Canada only) tires, use of snow chains is not permis-
sible with the following tire sizes:
The engine is equipped with a block Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains: 앫 225/40 ZR18 92Y XL
heater.
앫 Use of snow chains is not permissible 앫 245/35 ZR18 92Y XL
The electrical cable may be installed at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. with all wheel/tire combinations. 앫 145/70 - 17 92P (collapsible tire)
앫 Snow chains should only be used on
the rear wheels. Follow the manufac-
turer’s mounting instructions.
337
Operation
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have Maintenance service indicator The type of maintenance service due is
your vehicle serviced by an authorized message indicated in the multifunction display:
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
9 Basic service (A)
the Maintenance Booklet at the times The maintenance service indicator will
called for by the maintenance service notify you when your next maintenance ½ Extended service (B)
indicator display. service is due.
i
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in Starting approximately 1 month before
Vehicles equipped with FSS (Flexible
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet your next maintenance service is due, one
Service System) only (Canada
and maintenance service indicator at the of the following messages will appear in
vehicles): The interval between
designated times/mileage will result in the multifunction display while you are
maintenance services depends on your
vehicle damage not covered by the driving or when you switch on the ignition
driving habits. A gentle driving style,
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. (example service A):
moderate engine speeds and the
Service A in XXXXX Miles (Km) avoidance of short-distance trips will
Service A in XXX Days lengthen the interval between services.
Service A due now
338
Operation
Maintenance
Clearing the maintenance service 왘 Press reset button 1 on the Calling up the maintenance service
indicator message instrument cluster. indicator display
The maintenance service indicator is The maintenance service indicator
automatically cleared message is cleared and the standard
display appears in the multifunction 왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
앫 after 10 seconds when you switch on
display (컄 page 130). tifunction steering wheel repeatedly
the ignition or when reaching the main-
until the standard display appears in
tenance service threshold while driving
Maintenance service term exceeded the multifunction display (컄 page 125).
앫 after 30 seconds, once the suggested
If you have exceeded the suggested 왘 Press button k or j until the
maintenance service term has passed
maintenance service term, you will see the maintenance service indicator display
You can also clear it yourself. following message in the multifunction with the service symbol 9 or ½
display: and the service deadline appears in the
Service A exceeded by XXXX Miles (Km)
Service A exceeded by XXX Days
In addition, a signal sounds when the
message appears.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator
following a completed maintenance
service.
1 Reset button
339
Operation
Maintenance
i Resetting the maintenance service i

If the battery is disconnected, the days indicator If the maintenance service indicator
of disconnection will not be included in was inadvertently reset, have an
In the event that the maintenance service
the count shown by the maintenance authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
on your vehicle is not carried out by an
service indicator. To arrive at the true correct it.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can
maintenance service deadline, you will Only reset if the proper maintenance
have the maintenance service indicator
need to subtract these days from the service has been performed. Resetting
reset. The automotive maintenance facility
days shown in the maintenance service the system without performing the
carrying out the maintenance service will
indicator message or maintenance ser- proper service as called for by the
find the information for resetting the
vice indicator display. maintenance service indicator will
maintenance service indicator in the
Do not confuse the maintenance maintenance-relevant information for your result in engine damage and/or other
service indicator with the engine oil vehicle. Such information is available from vehicle damage not covered by the
level indicator N. either your authorized Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz.
340
Operation
Vehicle care
왔 Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle Such damage is caused not only by More frequent washings are necessary to
extreme and varying climatic conditions, deal with unfavorable conditions:
but also by:
앫
Warning! G 앫 Air pollution
near the ocean
앫 in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. 앫 Road salt emissions)
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
앫 Tar 앫 during winter operation
Always follow the instructions on the partic-
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s 앫 Gravel and stone chipping You should check your vehicle from time to
doors or windows when cleaning the inside. time for stone chipping or other damage.
To avoid paint damage, you should
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de- immediately remove:
possible to prevent corrosion.
signed for cleaning your vehicle. 앫 Grease and oil
Always lock away cleaning products and
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
앫 Fuel of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
keep them out of reach of children.
앫 Coolant ough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
While in operation, even while parked, your 앫 Brake fluid aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
vehicle is subjected to varying external 앫 Bird droppings
influences which, if gone unchecked, can Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
attack the paintwork as well as the under- 앫 Insects ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
body and cause lasting damage. cavities which will last for the lifetime of
앫 Tree resins, etc.
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi- neither necessary nor recommended by
nates the aggressiveness and potency of Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
the above adverse influences. of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others
applied later.
341
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and Power washer Paintwork, painted body components
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and ! !
which always reflect the latest technology. Follow the instructions provided by the Affixing stickers, adhesive tape or sim-
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved power washer manufacturer on main- ilar materials to painted body compo-
car-care products at an authorized taining a distance between the vehicle nents may damage the paintwork.
Mercedes-Benz Center. and the nozzle of the power washer.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or Never use a round nozzle to Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
damage due to negligent or incorrect care power-wash tires. The intense jet of should be applied when water drops on the
cannot always be removed or repaired with water can result in damage to the tire. paint surface do not “bead up”. This should
the car-care products recommended here. normally be done every 3 to 5 months, de-
Always replace a damaged tire. pending on the climate and washing deter-
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Always keep the jet of water moving gent used.
across the surface. Do not aim directly Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
The following topics deal with the cleaning at electrical parts, electrical connec-
and care of your vehicle and give important should be applied if the paint surface
tors, seals, or other rubber parts. shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care gloss).
Tar stains
products. Do not apply any of these products or wax
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
and become more difficult to remove. A tar hood is still hot.
remover is recommended.
왘 Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up
Stick for quick and provisional repairs
of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from
stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
342
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning Hand-wash Automatic car wash

Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle You can have your car washed in an auto-
make sure to protect electrical compo- in direct sunlight. matic car wash from the start. Automatic
nents and connectors from the intrusion of car washes without brushes are prefera-
왘 Only use a mild car wash detergent,
water and cleaning agents. ble.
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor- Shampoo. !
rosion Wax, should be applied to the en- 왘 Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif- Do not clean your vehicle in an auto-
gine compartment after every engine fused jet of water. matic touchless car wash which uses
cleaning. Before applying, all control
Direct only a very weak spray towards caustic spray. Otherwise the caustic
linkage bushings and joints should be
the ventilation intake. spray will damage the paint or orna-
lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys
mental moldings.
should be protected from any wax. 왘 Use plenty of water and rinse the
sponge and chamois frequently. If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it be-
Vehicle washing
왘 Rinse with clean water and thoroughly fore running it through the automatic car
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces dry with a chamois. wash.
of road salt as soon as possible.
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on
When washing the vehicle underbody, do the finish.
not forget to clean the inner sides of the
wheels.
343
Operation
Vehicle care
! Ornamental moldings Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,

Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in turn signal lenses
For regular cleaning and care of ornamen-
exterior rear view mirrors prior to run- tal moldings, use a damp cloth. 왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
ning the vehicle through an automatic Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
car wash to prevent damage to the ! poo, with plenty of water.
mirrors. Do not use chrome cleaner on orna-
mental moldings. Although ornamental !
Make sure that the windshield wiper
switch is set to 0 (컄 page 50). Other- moldings may have chrome appear- Only use window cleaning solutions
wise, the rain sensor could activate and ance, they could be made of anodized that are suitable for plastic lamp lens-
cause the wipers to move unintention- aluminum that will be damaged when es. Window cleaning solutions which
ally. This may lead to vehicle damage. cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, are not suitable may damage the plas-
use a damp cloth to clean those orna- tic lamp lenses of the headlamps.
mental moldings. Therefore, do not use abrasives, sol-
i vents or cleaners that contain solvents.
For very dirty ornamental moldings of
After running the vehicle through an au-
which you are sure are chrome-plated, Never apply strong force and only use a
tomatic car wash, wipe any wax off of
use a chrome cleaner. If in doubt soft, non-scratching cloth when clean-
the windshield (컄 page 345). This will
whether an ornamental molding is ing the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe
prevent smears and reduce wiping
chrome-plated, contact an authorized dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge.
noise which can be caused by residual
Mercedes-Benz Center.
wax on the windshield. Otherwise you may scratch or damage
the lens surface.
When leaving the car wash, make sure
that the mirrors are folded out. Other-
wise they may vibrate.
344
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the windows and the wiper !

blades Warning! G Fold the windshield wiper arms back
! onto the windshield before turning the
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
SmartKey in the starter switch.
The windshield wipers must be in a ver- move SmartKey from starter switch before
tical position before folding them away cleaning the windshield and/or the wiper Hold on to the wiper when folding the
from the windshield. They could other- blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor could wiper arm back. If released, the force
wise damage the hood. suddenly turn on and cause injury. of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
Never open the hood when the wiper
arms are folded forward. 왘 Fold the wiper arms forward until they
snap into place. !
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33). 왘 Clean the wiper blade inserts with a To clean the window interior, do not
clean cloth and detergent solution. use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or
왘 Turn combination switch to wiper cleaners containing solvents. Do not
setting II (컄 page 50). 왘 Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild win- touch the inside of the front, rear or
왘 With wiper arms in vertical position, dow cleaning solution on all outside side windows with hard objects such as
switch off the ignition (컄 page 33). and inside glass surfaces. an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
An automotive glass cleaner is recom- damage the windows.
mended.
345
Operation
Vehicle care
Light alloy wheels When applying Mercedes-Benz ap- Hard plastic trim items
If possible, clean wheels once a week. proved Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz 왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
approved Wheel Care products, take Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel care not to spray them on the brake with light pressure.
Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong disks.
spray of water for cleaning the light al- !
loy wheels. Plastic and rubber parts To prevent scratches, do not use scour-
! 왘 Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or ing agents.
Only use acid-free cleaning materials. mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
Acid may cause corrosion or damage washing solution. Steering wheel and gear selector lever
the clear coat. 왘 Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor-
!
oughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
! approved Leather Care.
The vehicle should not be parked for an
Instrument cluster and cup holders Carpets
extended period of time immediately
after it has been cleaned, especially not 왘 Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or 왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet
after the wheel rims have been cleaned mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a and Fabric Care for cleaning the car-
with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim washing solution. pets.
cleaners can lead to increased corro- 왘 Wipe with a cloth moistened in a luke-
sion of the brake disks and brake pads. warm solution.
Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
should always be warmed-up before it !
is parked after cleaning. To do so, To prevent scratches, do not use scour-
please drive your vehicle for several ing agents.
minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
346
Operation
Vehicle care
Headliner and shelf below rear window Upholstery MB Tex upholstery

왘 Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-sham- Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing 왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt. clothing that have the tendency to give off Care onto a soft, lint-free cloth and ap-
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause ply with light pressure for cleaning the
Seat belts the upholstery to become permanently dis- upholstery.
colored. By lining the seats with a proper
왘 Only use clear, lukewarm water and
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration Wood trims
soap.
will be prevented.
왘 Dampen cloth using water and use
! damp cloth to clean wood trims in your
The webbing must not be treated with Leather upholstery
vehicle.
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry 왘 Wipe leather upholstery with a damp
the webbing at temperatures above cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with !
176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight. Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Do not use solvents like tar remover or
Care. wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
Warning! G Exercise particular care when cleaning per-
forated leather as its underside should not
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
become wet.
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
347
348
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Resetting activated head restraints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
349
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster General information: bulb self-check when switching on the
If any of the following lamps in the instru- ignition, have the respective bulb checked
ment cluster fails to come on during the and replaced if necessary.
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution

- The yellow ABS indicator lamp The ABS has detected a malfunction and 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
comes on while driving. has switched off. The BAS and the ESP® Wheels may lock during hard braking,
are also switched off (see messages in dis- reducing steering capability.
play).
왘 Read and observe messages in the dis-
The brake system is still functioning nor- play (컄 page 358).
mally but without the ABS available.
왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
other systems such as the navigation possible.
system* or the automatic transmission Failure to follow these instructions
may also be malfunctioning. increases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below When the voltage is above this value again,
10 volts. The ABS has switched off. the ABS is operational again and the ABS in-
The battery might not be charged suffi- dicator lamp should go out.
ciently. If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:
왘 Have the generator (alternator) and the
battery checked.
350
Practical hints
What to do if …

; (USA only) You are driving with the parking brake set. 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 46).
3 (Canada only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
; (USA only) There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- 왘 Risk of accident! Carefully stop the vehi-
3 (Canada only) voir. cle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
The red brake warning lamp brake fluid! This will not solve the prob-
comes on while driving. lem.
!
Warning! G If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-
minimum mark or below, have the
nated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked for brake pad
brake system checked immediately if the
thickness and leaks.
brake warning lamp stays on. Don’t add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir
can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
fire. You can be seriously burned.
351
Practical hints
What to do if …

ú (USA only) There is a malfunction in: 왘 Have the vehicle checked as soon as pos-
sible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
± (Canada only) 앫 The fuel management system
Center.
The yellow engine malfunction 앫 The ignition system An on-board diagnostic connector is used
indicator lamp comes on while by the service station to link the vehicle to
앫 The emission control system
driving. the shop diagnostics system. It allows the
앫 Systems which affect emissions accurate identification of system malfunc-
Such malfunctions may result in excessive tions through the readout of diagnostic
emissions values and may switch the en- trouble codes. It is located in the front left
gine to its limp-home (emergency area of the footwell next to the parking
operation) mode. brake pedal.
i
Some states may by law require you to
visit a workshop immediately as soon
as the engine malfunction indicator
lamp comes on. Check local require-
ments.
352
Practical hints
What to do if …

ú (USA only) Your fuel tank is empty. 왘 After refuelling start, turn off and restart
the engine three or four times in succes-
± (Canada only)
sion.
The yellow engine malfunction
indicator lamp comes on while The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not
driving. need to have your vehicle checked.
A loss of pressure has been detected in the 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 293).
fuel system. The fuel cap may not be If it is not closed properly:
closed properly or the fuel system may be
leaky. 왘 Close the fuel cap.
If it is closed properly:
왘 Have the fuel system checked by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
353
Practical hints
What to do if …

v The yellow ESP® warning lamp The ESP® is deactivated. 왘 Switch the ESP® back on (컄 page 84).
comes on while driving.
Risk of accident! If the ESP® cannot be switched back on,
Adapt your speed and driving to the have the system checked at an autho-
prevailing road, weather and traffic rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
conditions. possible.
The yellow ESP® warning lamp The ESP® or traction control has come into 왘 When driving off, apply as little
flashes while driving. operation because of detected traction loss throttle as possible.
in at least one tire. 왘 While driving, ease up on the
accelerator.
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather
conditions.
왘 Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (컄 page 84).
Failure to follow these instructions
increases the risk of an accident.
The yellow fuel tank reserve The fuel level has gone below the reserve 왘 Refuel at the next gas station
warning lamp in the fuel gauge mark. (컄 page 293).
(컄 page 24) comes on while
driving.
354
Practical hints
What to do if …

< The red seat belt telltale comes The seat belt telltale reminds you and your 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
on and a warning chime sounds passengers to fasten your seat belts before
The seat belt telltale goes out.
for approximately 6 seconds af- driving off.
ter starting the engine with all
doors closed.
The red seat belt telltale remains You and/or your front passenger have for- 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
illuminated after driving off. The gotten to fasten your seat belts.
vehicle’s speed does not exceed 왘 Remove the items from the front pas-
There are items placed on the front passen-
15 mph (25 km/h). senger seat and put them in a safe
ger seat and therefore the system senses the
front passenger seat as being occupied. place.
The red seat belt telltale flashes You and/or your front passenger have for- 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
and you additionally hear an in- gotten to fasten your seat belts.
termittent warning signal with in- 왘 Remove the items from the front pas-
There are items placed on the front passen-
creasing intensity for a maximum senger seat and put them in a safe
ger seat and therefore the system senses the
of 60 seconds when the vehicle’s place.
front passenger seat as being occupied.
speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h).
i The seat belt telltale will only go out if

After 60 seconds with an unfastened both, the driver and front passenger’s
seat belt the warning chime stops seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is
sounding and the seat belt telltale illu- standing still and a front door is
minates continuously. opened.
355
Practical hints
What to do if …

1 The red SRS indicator lamp comes There is a malfunction in the restraint 왘 Drive with added caution to the near-
on while driving. systems. The air bags or emergency est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
tensioning devices (ETDs) could deploy
unexpectedly or fail to deploy in an acci-
dent.
Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you visit an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the system checked;
otherwise the SRS may not be deployed
when needed in an accident, which could
result in serious or fatal injury, or it might
deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
which could also result in an accident
and/or injury to you or to others.
356
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console

TM
56 The front passenger front A BabySmart child seat is installed on
air bag off indicator lamp the front passenger seat. Therefore the
comes on and remains illu- passenger front air bag is switched off.
minated.
The system is malfunctioning when 왘 Have the system checked as soon as
there is no BabySmartTM child seat possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
installed on the front passenger seat. Center.
The front passenger front The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Make sure there is nothing between seat
air bag off indicator lamp cushion and child seat and check
does not come on or does installation of the child seat.
not remain illuminated with
왘 If the front passenger front air bag off
a BabySmartTM child seat
indicator lamp remains out, have the
properly installed on the
system checked as soon as possible by an
front passenger seat.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to
transport children on the front passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
357
Practical hints
What to do if …
Vehicle status messages in the Certain messages of high priority cannot

multifunction display be cleared from the multifunction display Warning! G
using the reset button (컄 page 122) or
Warning and malfunction messages button j, k, ÿ, or è on the All categories of messages contain
appear in the multifunction display located steering wheel. important information which should be
in the instrument cluster. taken note of and, where a malfunction is
Other messages of high priority and indicated, addressed as soon as possible at
Certain warning and malfunction messag- messages of less immediate priority can an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
es are accompanied by an audible signal. be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button (컄 page 122) or Failure to repair condition noted may cause
Address these messages accordingly and damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
follow the additional instructions given in button j, k, ÿ, or è on the
steering wheel. They are then stored in the Limited Warranty, or result in property
this Operator’s Manual. damage or personal injury.
vehicle status message memory
Selecting the vehicle status message (컄 page 134). Remember that clearing a
memory menu in the control system message will only make the message dis-
(컄 page 134) displays both cleared and appear. Clearing a message will not cor-
uncleared messages. rect the condition that caused the
High-priority messages appear in the message to appear.
multifunction display in red color.
358
Practical hints
What to do if …
i On the pages that follow, you will find a

Warning! G Switching on the ignition causes all compilation of the most important warning
instrument cluster lamps (except low and malfunction messages that may
No messages will be displayed if either the appear in the multifunction display.
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high
instrument cluster or the multifunction
beam headlamp indicator lamp, and For your convenience the messages are
display is inoperative.
turn signal indicator lamps unless divided into two sections:
As a result, you will not be able to see infor- activated) as well as the multifunction
mation about your driving conditions, such 앫 Text messages (컄 page 360)
display to come on. Make sure the
as speed or outside temperature, warning/ lamps and multifunction display are in 앫 Symbol messages (컄 page 365)
indicator lamps, malfunction/warning mes- working order before starting your
sages or the failure of any systems. Driving journey.
characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
359
Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

ABS malfunction The ABS has detected a malfunction and 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop has switched off. The ESP®, BAS and the Wheels may lock during hard braking,
Run Flat Indicator* are also deactivated. reducing steering capability.
The brake system is still functioning 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
normally but without the systems speci- Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
fied above.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
Display malfunction The ABS or the ABS display is 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop malfunctioning. Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
360
Practical hints
What to do if …

ESP unavailable The ESP® was deactivated because of a 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
See Operator’s Manual malfunction or interrupted power supply.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
The BAS and the Run Flat Indicator* are also
ter as soon as possible.
deactivated.
Failure to follow these instructions
The ABS might not be operational. increases the risk of an accident.
The brake system is still functioning
normally but without the systems specified
above.
If the yellow ESP® warning lamp v flash- As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the
es while driving and this message appears, electronic traction system switches on
the electronic traction system has switched again.
off to prevent overheating of the drive wheel
brakes.
The self-diagnosis has not been completed The display will clear after driving a short dis-
yet. tance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The ESP®, BAS and the Run Flat Indicator*
are temporarily deactivated.
above.
361
Practical hints
What to do if …

ESP unavailable The charging voltage has fallen below 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
See Operator’s Manual 10 volts. The battery might not be charged
왘 If necessary, have the generator and bat-
sufficiently.
tery checked.
The ESP®, BAS and the Run Flat Indicator* When the voltage is above this value again,
are deactivated. the ESP® is operational again.
above.
malfunction The ESP® is deactivated because of a 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop. malfunction. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
The ESP®, BAS and the Run Flat Indicator* ter as soon as possible.
are deactivated.
The brake system is still functioning the risk of an accident.
above.
Display malfunction The ESP® or the ESP® display is 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop malfunctioning.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter as soon as possible.
362
Practical hints
What to do if …

SRS Restraint system The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest
malfunction authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Drive to workshop
Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
not be operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately to have the system
checked; otherwise the SRS may not be
deployed when needed in an accident,
which could result in serious or fatal injury,
or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.
363
Practical hints
What to do if …

Run Flat Indicator The Run Flat Indicator* is malfunc- 왘 Have the Run Flat Indicator* checked by an
inactive tioning. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Check tires There was a warning message about 왘 Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure
Then reactivate a loss in tire inflation pressure and is set for each tire.
Run Flat Indicator the Run Flat Indicator* has not been
왘 Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator*.
reactivated yet.
Run Flat Indicator The Run Flat Indicator* has been 왘 Have the Run Flat Indicator* checked by an
unavailable switched off due to an error. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure The Run Flat Indicator* indicates 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
Check tires that the pressure is too low in one or abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe
more tires. the traffic situation around you.
왘 Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure as
required (컄 page 317).
왘 If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 404).
왘 Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator* after adjusting
the tire inflation pressure values (컄 page 319).
Warning! G You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-

ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
364
Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

# Battery Alternator The battery is no longer charging. 왘 Stop immediately and check the
Visit workshop Possible causes: poly-V-belt in a safe location or as
soon as it is safe to do so.
앫 broken poly-V-belt
If it is broken:
앫 alternator malfunctioning
왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an
inoperative water pump which may
result in damage to the engine. Notify
If it is intact:
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest
Low voltage The battery has insufficient voltage. 왘 Start the engine (컄 page 45).
Charge battery
Low voltage The battery has insufficient voltage. 왘 Turn off unnecessary electrical
Consumers off consumers.
365
Practical hints
What to do if …

; (USA only) Release You are driving with the parking brake 왘 Release the parking brake
Parking brake set. (컄 page 46).
! (Canada only)
2 Brake wear The brake pads have reached their wear 왘 Have the brake pads replaced as soon
Visit workshop limit. as possible.
; (USA only) Brake fluid There is insufficient brake fluid in the 왘 Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and
Visit workshop reservoir. notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
3 (Canada only)
Center. Do not add brake fluid! This
will not solve the problem.
! !
Warning! G If you find that the brake fluid in the Brake pad thickness must be visually
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the inspected by a qualified technician at
Driving with the message Brake fluid
minimum mark or below, have the the intervals specified in the Mainte-
Visit workshop. displayed can result in
brake system checked for brake pad nance Booklet.
an accident. Have your brake system
thickness and leaks.
checked immediately. Do not add brake
fluid before checking the brake system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can re-
sult in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
366
Practical hints
What to do if …

B Coolant The coolant level is too low. 왘 Add coolant (컄 page 301).
Check level
왘 If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by
!
Warning! G Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
the message and symbol displayed
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may cause serious engine damage not
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat causing major
engine damage.
367
Practical hints
What to do if …

• Coolant The coolant is too hot. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location and
Stop, engine off! turn off the engine.
왘 Only start the engine again after the
message disappears. You could
otherwise damage the engine.
During severe operating conditions and !

Warning! G stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem- The engine should not be operated with
perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C). the coolant temperature above 248°F
Driving when your engine is badly over-
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
heated can cause some fluids which may
engine damage which is not covered by
have leaked into the engine compartment to
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it.
368
Practical hints
What to do if …

• Coolant The poly-V-belt could be broken. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location and
Stop, engine off! immediately turn off the engine.
왘 Check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine
will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Notify
If it is intact:
왘 Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this
message displayed. Doing so could result in seri-
ous engine damage that is not covered by the
왘 Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the in-
strument cluster (컄 page 24).
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mer-
cedes-Benz Center.
Coolant The cooling fan for the coolant is 왘 Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the in-
Visit workshop malfunctioning. strument cluster (컄 page 24).
왘 Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
369
Practical hints
What to do if …

Ñ Cruise contr. Cruise control is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Drive to workshop Center.
G Display malfunction The instrument cluster display is 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop malfunctioning.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
The displays for several systems have 왘 Have the electronic systems checked
malfunctioned. Some systems them- by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
selves may also have malfunctioned. Center.
± Display malfunction Certain electronic systems are unable to 왘 Have the electronic systems checked
Visit workshop relay information to the control system. by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
The following systems may have failed: Center.
앫 Coolant temperature display
앫 Tachometer
앫 Cruise control display
J Doors open You are attempting to drive with one or 왘 Close the doors.
more doors open.
370
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

N USA only: The engine oil level is too low. 왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 300) and check
At next gas station the engine oil level (컄 page 299).
add 1.0 qt engine oil
Canada only:
At next gas station
add 1.0 l engine oil
Engine oil level There is no oil in the engine. There is a 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
Stop, engine off! danger of engine damage. soon as possible.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 300) and check
the engine oil level (컄 page 299).
Engine oil level You have added too much engine oil. 왘 Have oil siphoned or drained off.
Reduce oil level There is a risk of damaging the engine or Observe all legal requirements with
the catalytic converter. respect to its disposal.
Change engine oil It may be that there is water in the engine 왘 Have the engine oil checked.
Visit workshop oil.
371
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

N Engine oil level The engine oil has dropped to a critical 왘 Check the engine oil level
Visit workshop level. (컄 page 299) and add oil as required
(컄 page 300).
왘 If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
Oil sensor malfunction The measuring system is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the measuring system checked
Visit workshop by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
When the message At next gas station When this occurs, the warning will first !
add 1.0 qt engine oil (Canada: 1.0 l) come on intermittently and then stay on if The engine oil level warnings should
appears while the engine is running and at the oil level drops further. not be ignored. Extended driving with
operating temperature, the engine oil level the symbol displayed could result in
Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil
has dropped to approximately the mini- serious engine damage that is not
leaks are noted, drive to the nearest
mum level. covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
service station where the engine oil should
be topped to the required level with an Warranty.
approved oil specified in the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet.
372
Practical hints
What to do if …

4 Check gas cap. A loss of pressure has been detected in 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 293).
See Operator’s Manual the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be
If it is not closed properly:
closed properly or the fuel system may be
leaky. 왘 Close the fuel cap.
If it is closed properly:
왘 Have the fuel system checked by an
Y Hood open You are attempting to drive with the hood 왘 Close the hood (컄 page 297).
open.
I Remove key. You have forgotten to remove the 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
SmartKey. switch.
Replace key No additional code available for 왘 Change the SmartKey.
Drive to workshop SmartKey.
373
Practical hints
What to do if …

. 3rd brake lamp The high mounted brake lamp is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
malfunctioning. This message will only Center as soon as possible.
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Backup lamp, left The left backup lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Backup lamp, right The right backup lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Brake lamp Brake lamp illumination is delayed or 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Drive to workshop lamp is permanently on. Center as soon as possible.
Brake lamp left The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Brake lamp right The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Display malfunction The display for the lamps or the system is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Visit workshop. malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible.
Front foglamp left The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Front foglamp right The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Front left The left front side marker lamp is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
side marker lamp malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible.
Front right The right front side marker lamp is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
sider marker lamp malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible.
374
Practical hints
What to do if …

. High beam left The left high beam lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
malfunctioning.
High beam right The right high beam lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
malfunctioning.
License plate lamp, The left license plate lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left malfunctioning.
License plate lamp, The right license plate lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right malfunctioning.
Light sensor The light sensor is malfunctioning. 왘 In the control system, set lamp
Drive to workshop The headlamps switch on automatically. operation to manual (컄 page 144).
왘 Switch on the headlamps using the
exterior lamp switch (컄 page 114).
Low beam left The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. Halogen headlamp:
왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
375
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Low beam right The right low beam lamp is Halogen headlamp:
malfunctioning.
왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
Parking lamp The left front parking lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left front malfunctioning.
Parking lamp The right front parking lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right front malfunctioning.
Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Substit. bulb on A substitute bulb is being used.
Switch off lights Headlamps have been turned on with the 왘 Switch off the headlamps.
driver’s door opened and the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch.
Taillamp left The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Taillamp right The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
376
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Turn signal The left front turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left front malfunctioning.
Turn signal The right front turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right front malfunctioning.
Turn signal The left turn signal in the side mirror is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
left mirror malfunctioning. This message will only Center as soon as possible.
stopped working.
Turn signal The right turn signal in the side mirror is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
right mirror malfunctioning. This message will only Center as soon as possible.
stopped working.
Turn signal The left rear turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left rear malfunctioning.
Turn signal The right rear turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right rear malfunctioning.
377
Practical hints
What to do if …

< Belt system The seat belt system is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Drive to workshop Center as soon as possible.
_ Steering oil The steering gear oil level is too low. 왘 Have the system checked by an
Visit workshop There is a danger of steering gear authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
damage.
Warning! G
If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is
too low, the steering power assistance could
fail. Much greater effort will then be needed
to turn the steering wheel.
Do not add steering oil without checking the
steering system.
Do not drive the vehicle. Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
378
Practical hints
What to do if …

K Close slid./pop-up You have opened the driver’s door with 왘 Close the tilt/sliding sunroof
sunroof the SmartKey removed from the starter (컄 page 242).
switch and the sliding portion of the
tilt/sliding sunroof open.
J Close slid./pop-up You have opened the driver’s door with 왘 Close the tilt/sliding sunroof
sunroof the SmartKey removed from the starter (컄 page 242).
switch and the tilting portion of the
tilt/sliding sunroof open.
L Tele Aid malfunction. One or more main functions of the Tele 왘 Have the Tele Aid system* checked by
Drive to workshop Aid system* are malfunctioning. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
t Function unavailable This display appears if button t
or s on the multifunction steering
wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not
equipped with a telephone*.
Ê Trunk open You are attempting to drive with the trunk 왘 Close the trunk.
open.
W Washer fluid The fluid level has dropped to 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 304).
please refill about 1/3 of total reservoir capacity.
379
Practical hints
First aid kit Vehicle tool kit Removing the vehicle tool kit
왘 Lift up trunk floor cover and engage
The first aid kit is located in the trunk on The vehicle tool kit is located in the storage
trunk floor handle in upper edge of
the left side secured by a hook and loop compartment underneath the trunk floor.
trunk.
fastener.
The following is included:
앫 Towing eye bolt
앫 Wheel wrench
앫 Alignment bolt
앫 Vehicle jack
앫 Spare fuses
앫 Valve extractor
앫 Protective wrap 1 Spare wheel with collapsible tire
1 First aid kit
앫 Collapsible wheel chock 2 Vehicle tool kit (under collapsible tire)
2 Hook and loop fastener
3 Retaining screw
앫 A pair of gloves
왘 Unfasten hook and loop fastener 2.
왘 Loosen retaining screw 3 by turning it
왘 Remove first aid kit 1. counterclockwise.
i 왘 Remove collapsible tire 1.
Check expiration dates and contents 왘 Remove vehicle tool kit 2.
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
380
Practical hints
Vehicle jack The vehicle jack is located in the storage

compartment underneath the trunk floor.
Warning! G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
1 Vehicle jack
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
2 Collapsible wheel chock and spare
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
wheel bolts Storage position
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
3 Towing eye bolt 왘 Turn crank handle in the direction of ar-
before raising vehicle with jack.
4 Alignment bolt row as far as it will go.
5 Wheel wrench Do not disengage parking brake while the
6 Spare fuses and valve extractor vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
7 Electric air pump always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
381
Practical hints
Setting up the collapsible wheel chock 왘 Tilt both plates upward 1.

The collapsible wheel chock serves to 왘 Fold the lower plate outward 2.
additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while
왘 Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the
changing the wheel.
way into the openings of the base
plate 3.
왘 Turn crank handle clockwise.

Before storing the vehicle jack in its
compartment:
앫 It should be fully collapsed.
앫 The handle must be folded in (storage
position).
1 Tilt the plate upward

2 Fold the lower plate outward
3 Insert the plate
382
Practical hints
Spare wheel Removing the spare wheel 왘 Take the valve extractor from the
vehicle tool kit (컄 page 381).
왘 Loosen retaining screw 3 by turning it
The spare wheel with collapsible tire is lo-
counterclockwise. 왘 Unscrew the valve insert from the valve
cated in the storage compartment under-
and allow the air to escape.
neath the trunk floor. 왘 Remove spare wheel 1.
왘 Lift up trunk floor cover and engage i
Storing the spare wheel
trunk floor handle in upper edge of It may take a few minutes for the col-
trunk. If you wish to store the spare wheel after lapsible tire to deflate completely.
use, carry out the following steps.
Otherwise the spare wheel will not fit the 왘 Screw the valve insert back into the
storage compartment. valve.
! 왘 Screw the valve cap back on the valve.
Make sure the spare wheel is dry when 왘 Pull the protective wrap provided with
storing it. the vehicle tool kit over the spare
wheel.
왘 Unscrew the valve cap from the valve
왘 Store the spare wheel and the valve ex-
of the collapsible tire.
tractor in the storage compartment un-
1 Spare wheel with collapsible tire derneath the trunk floor. 컄컄
2 Vehicle tool kit (under collapsible tire)
3 Retaining screw
383
Practical hints
컄컄왘 Pierce the protective wrap with In case of a flat tire, you may temporarily
retaining screw 3. Warning! G use the spare wheel with collapsible tire
when observing the following restrictions:
왘 Secure the spare wheel by turning re- The dimensions of the spare wheel with
taining screw 3 clockwise. collapsible tire are different from those of 앫 Do not exceed a vehicle speed of
the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle han- 50 mph (80 km/h).
!
dling characteristics change when driving 앫 Drive to the nearest tire repair facility
To prevent damage, always disengage
with a spare wheel mounted. to have the flat tire repaired or
trunk floor handle from upper edge of
The spare wheel with collapsible tire should replaced as appropriate.
trunk and lower trunk floor before
closing the trunk. only be used temporarily, and should be re- 앫 Do not operate vehicle with more than
placed with a regular road wheel as quickly one spare wheel mounted.
as possible.
For more information, see “Rims and Tires”
(컄 page 429).
384
Practical hints
Spare wheel bolts !

Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
mounting the spare wheel. The use of
any wheel bolts other than wheel
bolts 2 for the spare wheel will physi-
cally damage the vehicle’s brakes.
Warning! G
Make sure to use the original length wheel
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims bolts when remounting the original wheel
2 Wheel bolt for spare wheel (located in after it has been repaired.
trunk with spare wheel)
385
Practical hints
Unlocking the vehicle Removing the mechanical key Unlocking the driver’s door
If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with

the SmartKey, open the driver’s door and
the trunk using the mechanical key.
i
Unlocking and opening the driver’s
door and/or the trunk with the me-
chanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system*.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the 1 Mechanical key locking tab 1 Unlocking
following: 2 Mechanical key
왘 Insert the mechanical key into the
앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the 왘 Move locking tab 1 in direction of driver’s door lock until it stops.
SmartKey. arrow. 왘 Turn the mechanical key counterclock-
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter 왘 Slide mechanical key 2 out of the wise to position 1.
switch. housing.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
386
Practical hints
Unlocking and opening the trunk 왘 Insert the mechanical key into the Locking the vehicle
trunk lid lock until it stops.
A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
If you can not lock the vehicle with the
(1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid. 왘 Turn the mechanical key
SmartKey, do the following:
counterclockwise to position 1.
The trunk lid lock is located next to the
왘 Close the passenger door, the rear
handle above the rear license plate recess. The trunk lid unlocks.
doors and the trunk.
왘 Pull on handle 2.
왘 Press the central locking switch in the
The trunk opens. center console (컄 page 104).
! 왘 Check to see whether the locking
The trunk lid swings open upwards knobs on the doors have moved down.
automatically. Always make sure there 왘 If necessary push them down manually.
왘 Remove the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (컄 page 386).
왘 Turn the mechanical key back and
remove it from the trunk lid lock. 왘 Check whether the trunk is locked.
1 Unlocking in an emergency
2 Handle 왘 If necessary, lock the trunk with the
mechanical key (컄 page 103).
왘 Close the driver’s door.
Except for the driver’s door, the vehicle
should now be locked. 컄컄
387
Practical hints
컄컄 Manually unlocking the transmission 왘 Insert a tool 1 (e.g. flat blade screw
gear selector lever driver) into the opening.
왘 Perform the following two steps
In case of power failure, the transmission
simultaneously:
gear selector lever can be manually un-
locked, e.g. to tow the vehicle. 왘 Press tool 1 forward in the
direction of the arrow.
왘 Slide out the swiveling cup holder
(컄 page 259). 왘 Move gear selector lever from
position P.
1 Locking 왘 Remove tool 1 from the opening.
왘 Insert the mechanical key into the i

driver’s door lock until it stops. The gear selector lever is locked again
왘 Turn the mechanical key clockwise to when moving it to position P.
position 1.
The driver’s door is locked.
1 Tool
388
Practical hints
왔 Opening/closing in an emergency
You can open or close the tilt/sliding

sunroof manually should an electrical
malfunction occur.
The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located
behind the lens 1 of the interior overhead
light.
2 Locking tabs 3 Crank

왘 Slide both locking tabs 2 in direction 왘 Insert crank 3 through hole on the left
of the arrows. side.
왘 Lower the rear of the cover and 왘 Turn crank 3 clockwise to:
remove.
앫 slide sunroof closed
왘 Remove the cover.
앫 raise sunroof at the rear
왘 Take the crank 3 out of the Operator’s
1 Lens 왘 Turn crank 3 counterclockwise to:
Manual pouch.
왘 Remove SmartKey from the starter 앫 slide sunroof open
switch. i 앫 lower sunroof at the rear 컄컄
Do not disconnect electrical
왘 Pry off lens 1 using a flat blade
connectors.
screwdriver.
389
Practical hints
컄컄 i
Turn crank 3 slowly and smoothly.
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be
synchronized after being operated
manually (컄 page 244).
390
Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints
왔 Resetting activated head restraints
Resetting activated head restraints 왘 Press reset tool downward until you
hear the head restraint release
If the active head restraints have been trig- mechanism audibly engage.
gered in a rear-end collision, the active
왘 Pull out reset tool.
head restraints must be reset. Otherwise,
the active head restraint cannot offer any 왘 Firmly press the head restraint cushion
additional protection in the event of anoth- back toward the rear head restraint
er rear-end collision. cover until it engages.
i
For your convenience, we recommend
Warning! G
왘 Take the reset tool out of the
that you have this work carried out by Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature When pushing back the head restraint cush-
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. pouch. ion, take care that your fingers do not be-
You will find the reset tool for manually 왘 Guide reset tool into center of head re- come caught between the head restraint
operating the active head restraints in straint between head restraint cushion cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may
the Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature and rear head restraint cover. lead to injury.
pouch.
! 왘 Repeat this procedure on the active
Take care to avoid damaging the uphol- head restraint for the second seat.
stery.
For information on active head restraints,
see “Active head restraint” (컄 page 71).
왘 Press the reset tool forward in the di-
rection of the arrow. For information on head restraint adjust-
ment, see “Seats” (컄 page 35).
391
Practical hints
If the batteries in the SmartKey are Batteries contain materials that can harm i
discharged, the vehicle can no longer be the environment if disposed of improperly. When inserting the batteries, make
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to Recycling of batteries is the preferred sure they are clean and free of lint.
have the batteries replaced at an method of disposal. Many states require
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling. i
When replacing batteries, always
Warning! G replace both batteries of both
SmartKeys.
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
The required replacement batteries are
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
available at any Mercedes-Benz
immediately.
Center.
392
Practical hints
SmartKey 왘 Insert the mechanical key 1 in direc- 왘 Using a lint-free cloth, insert new
tion of arrow in side opening. batteries 4 under the contact
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type spring 5 with the positive terminal (+)
왘 Using mechanical key 1, push gray
CR 2025 or equivalent. side facing up.
slide 2 to unlatch battery compart-
왘 Remove the mechanical key ment 3. 왘 Return battery compartment 3 into
(컄 page 386). housing until it locks into place.
왘 Pull battery compartment 3 out of the
housing in direction of arrow. 왘 Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
SmartKey.
왘 Check the operation of the SmartKey.
1 Mechanical key
2 Slide
4 Battery
3 Battery compartment
5 Contact spring
왘 Remove the batteries 4 in direction of
arrow.
393
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper i i

exterior lighting and signaling. It is there- If the headlamps or front fog lamps are Substitute bulbs will be brought into
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp fogged up on the inside as a result of use when lamps malfunction. Observe
assemblies are in good working order at all high humidity, driving the vehicle a the messages in the multifunction
times. distance with the lights on should clear display (컄 page 374).
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely up the fogging.
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.
394
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Bulbs Front lamps Lamp Type

Lamp Type 4 Halogen headlamp:
High beam/high beam
1 Additional turn signal LED
flasher H7 (55 W)
lamp
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
2 Halogen headlamp: High beam flasher H7 (55 W)
Turn signal lamp 1156 A Parking and standing W5W
Bi-Xenon* headlamp: lamp
Turn signal lamp 2357 A
5 Front fog lamp HB4 (51 W)
3 Halogen headlamp:
Low beam H7 (55 W) 6 Side marker lamp W5W
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
Low and high beam1 D2S-35 W
1 Vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Low beam
and high beam use the same D2S-35W lamp. Do
not replace the Xenon bulbs yourself. Contact an
395
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps Notes on bulb replacement

Warning! G 앫 Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type
Lamp Type
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. and with the specified watt rating.
7 High mounted brake LED
Allow the lamp to cool down before 앫 Switch lights off before changing a bulb
lamp
changing a bulb. to prevent short circuits.
8 Brake lamp P 21 W
Keep bulbs out of reach of children. 앫 Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
9 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W handling bulbs.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas.
a Parking and side P 21/5 W A bulb can explode if you 앫 Your hands should be dry and free of oil
marker lamp
앫 touch or move it when hot and grease.
b Backup lamp P 21 W
앫 drop the bulb 앫 If the newly installed bulb does not
c License plate lamps C5W 앫 scratch the bulb come on, visit an authorized
d Rear fog lamp (driver’s P 21/4 W Mercedes-Benz Center.
Wear eye and hand protection.
side only), tail and
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
standing lamp
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
396
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following Replacing bulbs for front lamps
lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center: Before you start to replace a bulb for a
front lamp, do the following first:
앫 Additional turn signals in the exterior
rear view mirrors 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M (컄 page 114).
앫 High mounted brake lamp
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 297).
앫 Xenon* lamps
앫 Front fog lamps Halogen headlamp
앫 Front side marker lamps 3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb
4 Bulb socket for low beam bulb
i 5 Bulb socket for high beam bulb
Have the headlamp adjustment 6 Bulb socket for parking and standing
checked regularly. lamp bulb
1 Housing cover for low beam headlamp

2 Housing cover for high beam head-
lamp, parking and standing lamp
397
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Low beam bulb High beam bulb Front turn signal lamp bulb
왘 Press the clamp on housing cover 1 왘 Press the clamp on housing cover 2 왘 Turn bulb socket 3 with the bulb
and remove it. and remove it. counterclockwise and remove it.
왘 Pull the electrical connector off. 왘 Pull the electrical connector off. 왘 Press gently onto the bulb and turn it
왘 Turn bulb socket 4 counterclockwise 왘 Turn bulb socket 5 counterclockwise counterclockwise out of bulb
and take out the bulb. and take out the bulb. socket 3.
왘 Press new bulb gently into bulb
왘 Insert the new bulb so that its socket 왘 Insert the new bulb so that its socket
socket 3 and turn clockwise until it
locates in the recess of the lamp locates in the recess of the lamp
engages.
housing. housing.
왘 Place bulb socket 3 back into the
왘 Turn bulb socket 4 clockwise until it 왘 Turn bulb socket 5 clockwise until it
lamp and turn it clockwise.
engages. engages.
왘 Plug the electrical connector onto the 왘 Plug the electrical connector onto the Parking and standing lamp bulb
bulb. bulb.
왘 Press the clamp on housing cover 2
왘 Align housing cover 1 and press until 왘 Align housing cover 2 and press until and remove it.
it engages. it engages.
왘 Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb.
왘 Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 6.
왘 Press the new bulb into bulb socket 6.
왘 Press bulb socket 6 back into the
lamp.
왘 Align housing cover 2 and press until
it engages.
398
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Bi-Xenon* headlamp High beam flasher bulb

Warning! G and remove it.
왘 Pull the electrical connector off.
Do not remove the cover 1 for the
Bi-Xenon headlamp. Because of high voltage 왘 Turn bulb socket 4 counterclockwise
in Bi-Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace and take out the bulb.
the bulb or repair the lamp and its compo- 왘 Insert the new bulb so that its socket
nents. We recommend that you have such locates in the recess of the lamp
work done by a qualified technician. housing.
3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb
4 Bulb socket for high beam flasher bulb 왘 Turn bulb socket 4 clockwise until it
5 Bulb socket for parking and standing engages.
lamp bulb 왘 Plug the electrical connector onto the
bulb.
it engages.
1 Housing cover for Bi-Xenon headlamp

2 Housing cover for high beam flasher,
parking and standing lamp
399
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front turn signal lamp bulb Additional turn signal lamp bulbs Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
왘 Turn bulb socket 3 with the bulb The additional turn signal lamps in the
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
counterclockwise and remove it. exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs.
lamp, do the following first:
왘 Press gently onto the bulb and turn it If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to func-
counterclockwise out of bulb tion, the entire turn signal unit must be re-
position M (컄 page 114).
socket 3. placed. Have the turn signal unit replaced
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Open the trunk (컄 page 99).
왘 Press new bulb gently into bulb
socket 3 and turn clockwise until it
Front side marker lamp bulbs Tail lamp unit
engages.
Since replacing the side marker lamp bulbs
왘 Place bulb socket 3 back into the
is a technically highly demanding process,
lamp and turn it clockwise.
we recommend you have the side marker
lamp bulbs replaced by an authorized
Parking and standing lamp bulb
Mercedes-Benz Center.
and remove it.
왘 Pull out bulb socket 5 with the bulb.
왘 Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 5.
1 Latch
왘 Press the new bulb into bulb socket 5.
왘 Press bulb socket 5 back into the
lamp.
it engages.
400
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘 Fold the corresponding trim panel to 왘 Press gently onto the respective bulb License plate lamp
the side. and turn counterclockwise out of its
bulb socket.
왘 Turn latch 1 to vertical position and
remove the bulb carrier. 왘 Press the new bulb gently into its bulb
socket and turn clockwise until it
engages.
왘 Reinstall the bulb carrier and lock it
again with latch 1.
왘 Reinstall the trim panel.
1 Screw
왘 Loosen both screws 1.
왘 Remove the license plate lamp.
Bulb carrier
왘 Replace the bulb.
2 Brake lamp bulb
3 Backup lamp bulb 왘 Reinstall the license plate lamp.
4 Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only), 왘 Retighten screws 1.
tail and standing lamp bulb
5 Parking and side marker lamp bulb
6 Turn signal lamp bulb
401
Practical hints
Removing and installing wiper blades 왘 Remove SmartKey from starter switch. 왘 Pull the tab 2 in the direction of
arrow 1.
Removing wiper blades
Warning! G The wiper blade is unlocked.
왘 Lift up the wiper arm as far as you need
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and to remove the wiper blade.
remove SmartKey from starter switch be-
왘 Carefully fold the wiper arm back to
fore replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, the
rest on the windshield.
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury. !
Hold on to the wiper arm when folding
! the wiper arm back. If released, the
Never open the hood when the wiper force of the impact from the tensioning
arms are folded forward. 1 Unlocking spring could crack the windshield.
2 Tab
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
402
Practical hints
Installing wiper blades 왘 Lift up the wiper arm as far as you need !
to position the wiper blade under the Hold on to the wiper arm when folding
wiper arm and hold it. the wiper arm back. If released, the
왘 Carefully fold the wiper arm back and force of the impact from the tensioning
make sure that the taper piece 4 spring could crack the windshield.
slides into the recess 1 at the wiper Make certain that the wiper blades are
blade. properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
!
damage.
Make certain that the square recess 5
on the taper piece 4 is on the top, oth-
erwise the taper piece 4 can not slide
in the recess 1 at the wiper blade. If
the square recess 5 is not at the top
turn the taper piece 4 around to bring
the square recess 5 to the top.
1 Recess
2 Tab
왘 Slide the tab 2 back in the direction of
3 Locking
4 Taper piece arrow 3 until it audibly engages.
5 Square recess The wiper blade is locked.
403
Practical hints
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle Mounting the spare wheel

Warning! G
왘 Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
The dimensions of the spare wheel with col- moving traffic on a hard, flat surface Preparing the vehicle
lapsible tire are different from those of the when possible. Prepare the vehicle as described
road wheels. As a result, the vehicle han- (컄 page 404).
왘 Turn on the hazard warning flasher
dling characteristics change when driving
(컄 page 119). 왘 Take the collapsible tire, wheel wrench,
with a spare wheel mounted. Adapt your
wheel bolts, jack, and electric air pump
driving style accordingly. 왘 Turn the steering wheel so that the
out of the trunk (컄 page 380).
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
front wheels are in a straight ahead
When driving with spare wheel mounted,
position.
ensure proper tire pressure and do not ex- 왘 Set the parking brake (컄 page 54).
ceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
왘 Move the gear selector lever to P.
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 56).
as soon as possible to have the spare wheel
replaced with a regular road wheel. 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
Never operate the vehicle with more than
switch.
one spare wheel mounted. 왘 Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
®
Do not switch off the ESP when a spare a safe distance from the roadway.
wheel is mounted.
i
Open doors only when conditions are
safe to do so.
404
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lifting the vehicle

왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
Warning! G
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
or other sizable objects. up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
One wheel chock is included with the built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
vehicle tool kit (컄 page 380). avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
When changing wheel on a level surface:
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
왘 Place the wheel chock in front of and by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
another sizable object behind the the area under the lifted vehicle. Always 왘 On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
wheel that is diagonally opposite to the firmly set parking brake and block wheels not yet remove the wheel bolts
wheel being changed. before raising vehicle with jack. (approximately one full turn with
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack Do not disengage parking brake while the wrench). 컄컄
on a level surface. However, should cir- vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
cumstances require you to do so on a hill, always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
place the wheel chock and the other size- especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
able object as follows: on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Al-
왘 Place wheel chocks and another siz-
ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca-
able object on the downhill side block-
pacity jackstands before working under the
ing both wheels of the axle not being
vehicle.
worked on.
405
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄The jack take-up brackets are located Removing the wheel

directly behind the front wheel housings
and in front of the rear wheel housings.
왘 Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a

maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the 1 Alignment bolt
ground. Never start engine while
왘 Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and
1 Take-up bracket vehicle is raised.
remove.
2 Jack
왘 Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
왘 Place jack 2 on firm ground. Warning! G bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
왘 Position jack 2 under take-up
The jack is intended only for lifting the 왘 Remove the remaining bolts.
bracket 1 so that it is always vertical
vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not
(plumb-line) as seen from the side, !
suited for performing maintenance work
even if the vehicle is parked on an Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
under the vehicle.
incline. This could result in damage to the bolts
앫 Never start the engine when the vehicle
is raised.
and wheel hub threads.
앫 Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
왘 Remove the wheel.
406
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the spare wheel !

To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while
installing first wheel bolt.
Warning! G
Always replace wheel bolts that are
damaged or rusted.
왘 Guide spare wheel onto the alignment
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims bolt and push it on.
2 Wheel bolt for spare wheel with Damaged wheel hub threads should be
왘 Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
collapsible tire (located in trunk with repaired immediately. Do not continue to
slightly. 컄컄
spare wheel) drive under these circumstances! Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
! Roadside Assistance.
Wheel bolts 2 must be used when Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-
mounting the spare wheel. The use of ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
any wheel bolts other than wheel come off. This could cause an accident.
bolts 2 for the spare wheel will physi- Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
cally damage the vehicle’s brakes.
왘 Clean contact surfaces of wheel and

wheel hub.
407
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 Inflating the collapsible tire
Warning! G
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly mounted.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
pump (컄 page 408) before lowering the
vehicle.
왘 Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last 1 Flap
wheel bolt and tighten slightly. 2 On/off switch
Warning! G 3 Electrical plug
Warning! G Observe instructions on air pump label.
4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
screw
Only use genuine equipment 5 Union nut
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel ! 왘 Open flap 1 on electric air pump.
bolts may come loose. Do not lower the vehicle before
왘 Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the inflating the collapsible tire. Otherwise
with pressure gauge 4.
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle the rim may be damaged.
왘 Remove the valve cap from the
could fall off the jack.
왘 Take the electric air pump out of the collapsible tire valve.
trunk (컄 page 381). 왘 Screw union nut 5 onto the collaps-
ible tire valve.
408
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘 Insert electrical plug 3 into vehicle 왘 Inflate the tire to approximately 51 psi
cigarette lighter socket (컄 page 263). (3.5 bar). Warning! G
! This takes about 5 minutes for the col- Follow recommend inflation pressures.
lapsible tire. Air hose 4 and union
The cigarette lighter (컄 page 262) is Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
nut 5 can become hot during infla-
not designed for use with the electric can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
tion. Exercise proper caution to avoid
air pump. Use the power outlet in the cause they are more likely to become punc-
burning yourself when using the equip-
rear passenger compartment tured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
ment.
(컄 page 263) for electric air pump etc.
operation. ! Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
Do not operate the electric air pump wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch longer than 6 minutes without interrup- and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
to position 1. tion. Otherwise it may overheat. from being overheated.
왘 Press I on electric air pump switch 2. You may operate the electric air pump
The electric air pump should now again after it has cooled off. 왘 Detach the electric air pump.
switch on and inflate the collapsible 왘 Store the electrical plug and the air
tire. 왘 Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2. hose behind the flap and place the
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch electric air pump back in the trunk.
to position 0.
왘 If the tire pressure is above 51 psi
(3.5 bar), release excess tire pressure
using the vent screw.
409
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle

Warning! G
Warning! G Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
loose if they are not tightened to a torque
properly mounted.
of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
pump (컄 page 408) before lowering the ve-
Before storing the jack, it should be fully
hicle.
collapsed, with handle folded in (storage
1-5 Wheel bolts position) (컄 page 381).
왘 Lower vehicle by turning crank 왘 Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, 왘 Store the jack and the other vehicle
counterclockwise until vehicle is following the diagonal sequence tools in the trunk.
resting fully on its own weight. illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are
왘 Remove the jack. tight. Observe a tightening torque
of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
410
Practical hints
Battery
왔 Battery
The battery is located in the engine
compartment on the right hand side. Warning! G Warning! G
Failure to follow these instructions can Do not place metal objects on the battery as
result in severe injury or death. this could result in a short circuit.
Observe all safety instructions and Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
precautions when handling automotive of acid burns in the event of an accident.
batteries (컄 page 303).
Never lean over batteries while connecting, !
you might get injured. Never loosen or detach battery termi-
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not nal clamps while the engine is running
1 Clamps allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, or the SmartKey is in the starter switch.
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately Otherwise the alternator and other
Removing filter box: flush affected area with water and seek electronic components could be se-
왘 Release clamps 1. medical help if necessary. verely damaged.
왘 Remove filter box. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, Have the battery checked regularly by
which is flammable and explosive. Keep an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Installing filter box: flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
왘 Insert filter box properly. improper connection of jumper cables,
maintenance intervals or contact an
smoking, etc.
왘 Secure it with clamps 1. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
further information.
411
Practical hints
Battery
Disconnecting the battery 왘 Remove the filter box (컄 page 411).

왘 Disconnect the battery negative lead
from negative terminal 1.
Warning! G
왘 Remove cover 2 from the positive
With a disconnected battery terminal.
앫 you will no longer be able to turn the 왘 Disconnect the battery positive lead.
SmartKey in the starter switch
앫 the gear selector lever will remain Removing the battery
locked in position P
1 Negative terminal 왘 Remove the screw-nuts securing the
2 Positive terminal cover battery.
!
Always disconnect the battery in the 왘 Remove the battery bracket.
order described below. Otherwise the 왘 Pull out the battery ventilation hose
vehicle’s electronics can be damaged. from the battery (depending on battery
arrangement in your vehicle model, the
왘 Depress the parking brake pedal. ventilation hose is located either on the
left or right side of the battery).
왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to position P. 왘 Take out the battery.
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 56).
왘 Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 297).
412
Practical hints
Battery
Charging and reinstalling the battery 왘 Charge battery in accordance with the Reconnecting the battery
instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer. !
Warning! G 왘 Reinstall the charged battery. Follow Always connect the battery in the order
the previously described steps in described below. Otherwise the
Never charge a battery while still installed in
reverse order. vehicle’s electronics can be damaged.
the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is !
being used. Gases may escape during charg- 왘 Turn off all electrical consumers.
The battery, its filler caps and the bat-
ing and cause explosions that may result in 왘 Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
tery ventilation hose must always be
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
securely installed when the vehicle is in 왘 Connect the battery positive lead and
An accessory battery charge unit specially operation. fasten its cover 2.
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
왘 Connect the battery negative lead.
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
available, permitting the charging of the bat- !
tery in its installed position. Contact an au-
Never invert the terminal connections!
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
information and availability. Charge battery
왘 Reinstall the filter box (컄 page 411).
in accordance with the separate instruc-
tions for the accessory battery charger.
413
Practical hints
Battery
i Batteries contain materials that can harm

The following procedures must be the environment if disposed of improperly.
carried out following any interruption of Large 12 volt storage batteries contain
battery power (e.g. due to reconnec- lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
tion): method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
앫 Set the clock (컄 page 140). for recycling.
See COMAND operator’s manual.
앫 Synchronize side windows
(컄 page 240).
앫 Synchronize tilt/sliding sunroof
(컄 page 244).
414
Practical hints
Jump starting
왔 Jump starting
! If the battery is discharged, the engine can
Warning! G Do not tow-start the vehicle. be started with jumper cables and the
battery of another vehicle. Observe the
Failure to follow these directions will cause following:
damage to the electronic components, and !
앫 Jump starting should only be performed
can lead to a battery explosion and severe Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
injury or death. attempts. when the engine and catalytic con-
verter are cold.
Never lean over batteries while connecting Do not attempt to start the engine
앫 Do not start the engine if the battery is
or jump starting, you might get injured. using a battery quick charge unit.
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not If engine does not run after several
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, 앫 Only jump start from batteries with the
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately checked at the nearest authorized same voltage rating (12 V). Jump
flush affected area with water, and seek Mercedes-Benz Center. starting with a more powerful battery
medical help if necessary. could damage the vehicle’s electrical
Excessive unburned fuel generated by system, which will not be covered by
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, repeated failed starting attempts may the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep damage the catalytic converter and
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid 앫 Only use jumper cables with sufficient
may present a fire risk.
improper connection of jumper cables, cross-section and insulated terminal
smoking, etc. Make sure the jumper cables do not clamps.
have loose or missing insulation.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery 앫 Always make sure the jumper cables
can result in it exploding, causing personal Make sure the cable clamps do not are not on or near pulleys, fans, or oth-
injury. touch any other metal part while the er parts that move when an engine is
other end is still attached to a battery. started or running.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
415
Practical hints
Jump starting
왘 Start engine of the vehicle with the

Warning! G charged battery and run at idle speed.
왘 Connect negative terminal 4 of the
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke. charged battery with negative under
hood terminal 3 in front of the filter
Observe all safety instructions and precau- box with the jumper cables. Clamp ca-
tions when handling automotive batteries ble to charged battery 4 first.
(컄 page 303).
왘 Start the engine of the disabled
vehicle.
The battery is located in the engine
1 Positive terminal of charged battery You can now again turn on the electrical
compartment on the right hand side. The
2 Positive under hood terminal in front of consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
terminals for jump starting are located in
discharged battery any circumstances.
front of the battery.
3 Negative under hood terminal in front
왘 Make sure the two vehicles do not of discharged battery 왘 Remove the jumper cables first from
touch. 4 Negative terminal of charged battery negative terminals 3 and 4 and then
from positive terminals 2 and 1.
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. 왘 Connect positive terminal 1 of the
charged battery with positive under You can now turn on the lights.
왘 Apply parking brake.
hood terminal 2 in front of the filter 왘 Have the battery checked at the near-
왘 Shift gear selector lever to position P. box with the jumper cables. Clamp ca- est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 297). ble to charged battery 1 first.
왘 Flip up cover positive under hood !
terminal 2 in front of the filter box Never invert the terminal connections!
(컄 page 411).
416
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
왔 Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the When circumstances do not permit the When towing the vehicle with all wheels
vehicle be transported with all wheels off recommended towing methods, the on the ground, the gear selector lever
the ground using flatbed or appropriate vehicle may be towed with all wheels on must be in position N and the
wheel lift/dolly equipment. This method is the ground or front wheels raised only so SmartKey must be in starter switch
preferable to other types of towing. far as necessary to have the vehicle moved position 2.
to a safe location where the recommended
! towing methods can be employed. When towing the vehicle with all wheels
Do not tow-start the vehicle. on the ground or the front axle raised,
! the vehicle may be towed only for
If the vehicle is towed with the front distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and
! at a speed not to exceed 30 mph
axle raised, the engine must be shut off
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equip- (50 km/h).
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
ment with the SmartKey in the starter
or 1). Otherwise the ESP® will immedi-
switch turned to position 0. !
ately be engaged and will apply the rear
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. wheel brakes. To be certain to avoid a possibility of
Towing with sling-type equipment over damage to the drivetrain, however, we
bumpy roads will damage radiator and recommend the drive shaft be discon-
supports. nected at the rear axle drive flange for
To prevent damage during transport, any towing beyond a short tow to a
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or nearby garage.
suspension parts.
Switch off the tow-away alarm*
(컄 page 90) and deactivate the auto-
matic central locking (컄 page 147).
417
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
i !
Warning! G To signal turns while being towed with When towing the vehicle with all wheels
the hazard warning flasher in use, on the ground, please note the
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
switch on the ignition and activate the following:
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
combination switch for the left or right With the automatic central locking
with a tow bar if:
turn signal in the usual manner – only activated and the SmartKey in starter
앫 the engine will not run the selected turn signal will operate. switch position 2, the vehicle doors
앫 there is a malfunction in the power
Upon canceling the turn signal, the lock if the left front wheel as well as the
supply or in the vehicle’s electrical
hazard warning flasher will operate right rear wheel are turning at vehicle
system
again. speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or
as that will be necessary to adequately more.
control the towed vehicle.
Switch off the tow-away alarm*
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on Warning! G (컄 page 90).
the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in
starter switch position 2. With the engine not running, there is no To prevent the vehicle doors from
power assistance for the brake and steering locking, deactivate the automatic
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
systems. In this case, it is important to keep central locking (컄 page 147).
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
in mind that a considerably higher degree of Towing of the vehicle should only be
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve- done using the properly installed
case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
hicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. towing eye bolt. Never attach tow
remove SmartKey from starter switch and
reinsert. cable, tow rope or tow rod to vehicle
chassis, frame or suspension parts.
418
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
i Installing towing eye bolt Removing cover

If the battery is disconnected or 왘 Press mark on cover 1 or 2 in
discharged direction of arrows.
앫 the SmartKey will not turn in the 왘 Lift cover off to reveal the threaded
starter switch. For more informa- hole for towing eye bolt.
tion, see “Battery” (컄 page 411)
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
and “Jump starting” (컄 page 415).
tool kit (located in the compartment under-
앫 the gear selector lever will remain neath the trunk floor).
locked in position P. For informa-
왘 Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tion on manually unlocking the
tighten with lug wrench.
transmission gear selector lever
1 Cover on right side of front bumper.
(컄 page 388).
Reinstalling cover
왘 Fit cover 1 or 2 and snap into place.
2 Cover on right side of rear bumper.
419
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses are designed to protect the electri- ! Aids for replacing fuses
cal circuits in your vehicle from a short cir- Never attempt to repair or bridge a
cuit. If a fuse is blown, the component(s) blown fuse. Have the cause determined Fuse chart
and systems secured by that fuse will stop and remedied by an authorized
operating. Mercedes-Benz Center. The fuse chart is located in the main fuse
box in the passenger compartment
The following aids are available to help you
(컄 page 421). The amperages of the fuses
replace fuses (컄 page 420): ! are also given there.
앫 Fuse chart Keep the fuse boxes free by contamina-
tion and wetness. Otherwise, electrical Spare fuses
앫 Spare fuses
parts or systems could be damaged.
앫 Fuse extractor Spare fuses are located in the vehicle tool
kit in the trunk (컄 page 380).
The electrical fuses are located in different
Warning! G fuse boxes: Fuse extractor
앫 Main fuse box in passenger
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz The fuse extractor is located in the fuse
compartment (컄 page 421) box cover in the trunk (컄 page 422).
with the specified amperage for the system
in question. Using other fuses may cause an 앫 Fuse box in engine compartment
overload leading to a fire, and/or cause (컄 page 421)
damage to electrical components and/or 앫 Fuse box in trunk (컄 page 422)
systems.
420
Practical hints
Fuses
Main fuse box in passenger Closing fuse box Removing cover

compartment
왘 Attach fuse box cover 1 in the front. 왘 Twist screws 2
90° counterclockwise.
The main fuse box is located in the passen- 왘 Fold fuse box cover 1 in until it
ger compartment on the driver’s side of engages. 왘 Lift the rear of cover 1.
the cockpit. 왘 Slide out retainer 3 and remove
Fuse box in engine compartment cover 1 by pulling towards front.
The fuse box is located in the engine
Opening fuse box
compartment on the driver’s side.
1 Main fuse box cover
Opening fuse box

왘 Open the driver’s door. 4 Fuse box cover
1 Cover
5 Clamps
왘 Pull fuse box cover 1 open with a 2 Screws
screw driver or similar tool (see arrow). 3 Retainer 왘 With a dry cloth, remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
왘 Remove fuse box cover 1 rearward.
왘 Release clamps 5.
왘 Remove fuse box cover 4.
421
Practical hints
Fuses
Closing fuse box Fuse box in trunk Opening fuse box

왘 Make sure that the sealing rubber is 왘 Pull away trim panel 1.
The fuse box is located in the trunk behind
properly positioned.
the left-hand trim panel. 왘 Remove fuse box cover 3.
왘 Press fuse box cover 4 down and
secure with clamps 5. Closing fuse box
왘 Insert fuse box cover 3.
Installing cover
왘 Insert trim panel 1.
왘 Insert cover 1 sideways into
retainer 3.
왘 Twist screws 2 90° clockwise.
1 Trim panel
2 Fuse extractor
3 Fuse box cover
422
Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and Tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions and weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
423
Technical data
Parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers !
necessary technical data for your vehicle. maintain a stock of Genuine The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz parts required for mainte- parts and accessories not authorized
nance and repair work. In addition, strate- by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
gically located parts distribution centers vehicle, which is not covered by the
provide quick and reliable parts service. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
More than 300000 different parts for could compromise the vehicle’s
Mercedes-Benz models are available. durability or safety.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject
to stringent quality inspections. Each part
has been specifically developed, manufac-
tured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
424
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are Loss of Service and Warranty
the warranties printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Information Booklet
Warranty Information booklet. Your Accessories warranties, copies of which
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will ex- are available at any Mercedes-Benz Should you lose your Service and Warranty
change or repair any defective parts origi- Center. Information booklet, have an authorized
nally installed in the vehicle in accordance Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
with the terms of the following warranties: replacement. It will be mailed to you.
앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫 Emission System Warranty
앫 Emission Performance Warranty
앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
425
Technical data
Identification labels
1 Certification label 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 3 Vacuum line routing diagram label
(includes Paintwork code) 4 Engine number (engraved on engine)
5 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
6 Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission
standards
i
When ordering parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine num-
bers.
426
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
왔 Layout of poly-V-belt drive
C 55 AMG
1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 Power steering pump
3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley
427
Technical data
Engine
Model C 55 AMG (203.076)1

Engine 113
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 8
Bore 3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke 3.60 in (92.00 mm)
Total piston displacement 331.8 cu in (5439 cm3)
Compression ratio 11:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 362 hp/5750 rpm 2
(270 kW/5750 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 376 lb-ft/4000 rpm
(510 Nm/4000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6700 rpm
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2380 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special
bodies and special equipment.
2
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
428
Technical data
Rims and Tires
왔 Rims and Tires
! Using tires other than those approved i
Only use tires which have been tested by Mercedes-Benz may result in dam- Further information on tires and rims is
and approved for your vehicle by age that is not covered by the available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz. Tires approved by Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Mercedes-Benz Center. A placard with
Mercedes-Benz are developed to pro- the recommended tire inflation
vide best possible performance in con- ! pressures is located on the driver’s
junction with the driving safety Using tires other than those approved door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have
systems on your vehicle such as ABS or by Mercedes-Benz can have detrimen- supplemental tire inflation pressure
ESP®. Tires specially developed for tal effects, such as information for driving at high speeds
your vehicle and tested and approved (컄 page 316) or for vehicle loads less
앫 poor handling characteristics
by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by than the maximum loaded vehicle
finding the following on the tire’s side- 앫 increased noise condition (컄 page 316). If such infor-
wall: 앫 increased fuel consumption mation is provided, it can be found on
앫 MO = Mercedes-Benz Original the placard located on the inside of the
Moreover, tires and rims not approved fuel filler flap. The tire inflation pres-
equipment tires
by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, sure should be checked regularly and
AMG vehicles: exhibit dimensional variations and dif- should only be adjusted on cold tires.
Does not apply to all approved tires ferent tire deformation characteristics Follow tire manufacturer’s mainte-
on AMG vehicles. For information that could cause them to come into nance recommendation included with
on tested and approved tires for contact with the vehicle body or axle vehicle.
AMG vehicles, contact an autho- parts. Damage to the tires or the vehi-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. cle may be the result.
429
Technical data
Rims and Tires
i
The following pages also list the ap-
proved wheel rim and tire sizes for
equipping your vehicles with winter
tires. Winter tires are not available as
standard or optional factory equip-
ment, but can be purchased from an
Depending on vehicle model and the
standard or optional factory-equipped
wheel rim/tire configuration on your
vehicle (Sport Package etc.), equipping
your vehicle with winter tires approved
for your vehicle model may also require
the purchase of two or four wheel rims
of the recommended size for use with
these winter tires. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for more infor-
mation.
430
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Same size tires
Model C 55 AMG
1,2
Winter tires 205/50 R17 89H M+S.
Rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset 1.46 in (37 mm)
Winter tires1,2,3 225/45 R17 91H M+S.

Winter tires1,2,3 225/40 R18 92H XL (Extra Load) M+S.

1 Radial-ply tires
2
Not available as factory equipment.
3
For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
431
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Mixed size tires
Model C 55 AMG
Front axle:
Summer tires1, 2 225/40 ZR18 92Y XL (Extra Load)
Rear axle:
1, 2
Summer tires 245/35 ZR18 92Y XL (Extra Load)
1
Radial-ply tires
2 Must not be used with snow chains.
432
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Spare wheel (collapsible tire)
Model C 55 AMG
Rim (steel) 4.5 B x 17 H2
Tire 145/70 -17 92P1
1 Must not be used with snow chains.
! i
Please compare the recommended tire Please note that the tire inflation
inflation pressure for your vehicle with pressure of the collapsible tire differs
the tire inflation pressure on the yellow from the tire inflation pressure of the
label located on the spare wheel rim. road tires.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yel- Inflate the collapsible tire to approxi-
low label on the spare wheel rim differs mately 51 psi (3.5 bar).
from the values given in this Operator’s
Manual, inflate the collapsible tire to
the recommended tire inflation pres-
sure given on the yellow label on the
spare wheel rim.
433
Technical data
Electrical system
Model C 55 AMG
Generator (alternator) 14 V/150 A
Starter motor 14 V/1.7 kW
Battery 12 V/100 Ah
Spark plugs NGK ILFR 6 A
Electrode gap 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Tightening torque 18 – 22 lb-ft (25 – 30 Nm)
434
Technical data
Main dimensions and weights
왔 Main dimensions and weights
Main dimensions
Model C 55 AMG
Overall vehicle length 181.8 in (4617 mm)
Overall vehicle width (exterior rear 77.8 in (1977 mm)
view mirrors folded out)
Overall vehicle height 55.6 in (1412 mm)
Wheelbase 106.9 in (2715 mm)
Track, front 59.3 in (1507 mm)
Track, rear 58.0 in (1474 mm)
Weights
Roof load max. 220 lbs (100 kg)

Trunk load max. 220 lbs (100 kg)
435
Technical data
Capacities lubricants must match. Therefore only use Please refer to the Factory Approved
products tested and approved by Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at
Vehicle components and their respective Mercedes-Benz. your Mercedes-Benz Center.
Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Engine with oil filter 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) Approved engine oils
Automatic transmission 9.3 US qt (8.7 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Rear axle 1.5 US qt (1.4 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Power steering approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S)
Front wheel hubs approx. 2.1 oz (60 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system 0.5 US qt (0.5 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system approx. 12.8 US qt (12.0 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/antifreeze agent
Fuel tank 16.4 US gal (62.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline:
including 2.6 US gal (10.0 l) Minimum Posted Octane 91
a reserve of (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
Air conditioning system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil
(never R-12)
Windshield washer 3.2 US qt (3.0 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
Windshield washer and headlamp 6.4 US qt (6.0 l)
cleaning system*
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”
and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 442).
436
Technical data
Engine oils Please follow Maintenance System Brake fluid

(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehi-
Engine oils are specifically tested for their cles) recommendations for scheduled During vehicle operation, the boiling point
suitability in our engines and durability for oil changes. Failure to do so will result of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
our service intervals. Therefore, only use in engine damage not covered by the through the absorption of moisture from
approved engine oils and oil filters Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the atmosphere.
required for vehicles with Maintenance
System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada
vehicles). For a listing of approved engine
Engine oil additives Warning! G
oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Ap- Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. Under extremely strenuous operating condi-
proved Service Products pamphlet, or con- They may damage the engine. tions, this moisture content can lead to the
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. formation of bubbles in the system, thus re-
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
! blending oil additives are not covered by ducing the system’s efficiency.
Using engine oils and oil filters of the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
specification other than those express- regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Mainte-
ly required for the Maintenance System Air conditioning refrigerant nance Booklet for replacement interval.
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehi-
cles), or changing of oil and oil filter at R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
Only brake fluid approved by
change intervals longer than those lubricating oil are used in the air
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. An
called for by the Maintenance System conditioning system.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehi- Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based provide you with additional information.
cles) will result in engine damage not lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited system will occur.
Warranty.
437
Technical data
Premium unleaded gasoline ! Gasoline additives

To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gaso- A major concern among engine
Warning! G line must be used. If premium unleaded manufacturers is carbon build-up caused
is not available and low octane fuel is by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
used, follow these precautions: only the use of quality gasoline containing
It burns violently and can cause serious additives that prevent the build-up of
injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, 앫 Have the fuel tank only partially carbon deposits.
avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extin- filled with unleaded regular and fill
up with premium unleaded as soon After an extended period of using fuels
guish all smoking materials. Never allow
as possible. without such additives, carbon deposits
sparks, flame or smoking materials near
can build up especially on the intake valves
gasoline! 앫 Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt and in the combustion area, leading to
acceleration. engine performance problems such as:
앫 Do not exceed an engine speed of 앫 Warm-up hesitation
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
앫 Unstable idle
with a light load such as two
persons and no luggage. 앫 Knocking/pinging
앫 2/
Do not exceed 3 of maximum 앫 Misfire
accelerator pedal position if the
앫 Power loss
vehicle is fully loaded or operating
in mountainous terrain.
438
Technical data
In areas where carbon deposits may be Fuel requirements Coolants

encountered due to lack of availability of
gasolines which contain these additives, Only use premium unleaded fuel: The engine coolant is a mixture of water
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which
앫 The octane number (posted at the
additives approved by us for use on provides:
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to Factory of both the Research (R) octane num- 앫 Corrosion protection
Approved Service Products pamphlet for a ber and the Motor (M) octane number:
listing of approved product(s). Follow 앫 Freeze protection
(R+M)/2. This is also known as the
directions on product label. ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. 앫 Boiling protection (by increasing the
Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel. boiling point)
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
This only results in unnecessary cost and such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be The cooling system was filled at the factory
may be harmful to engine operation. used provided the ratio of any one of these with a coolant providing freeze protection
Damage or malfunction resulting from oxygenates to gasoline does not to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and
poor fuel quality or from blending exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%. corrosion protection.
additional fuel additives other than those The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not If the antifreeze mixture is effective
tested and approved by us for use on exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents. to -22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the
Mercedes-Benz vehicles listed in the coolant in the pressurized cooling system
Factory Approved Service Products Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
is reached at approx. 266°F (130°C).
pamphlet are not covered by the not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can
be used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
439
Technical data
The coolant solution must be used If you use a solution that is more than 55% Anticorrosion/antifreeze
year-round to provide the necessary corro- anticorrosion/antifreeze [freeze
Your vehicle contains a number of
sion protection and increase boil-over protection to approx. -49°F (-45°C)], the
aluminum parts. The use of aluminum
protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet engine temperature will increase due to
components in motor vehicle engines
for replacement interval. the lower heat transfer capability of the
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
solution. Therefore, do not use more than
Coolant system design and coolant used coolant used in such engines be specifi-
this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
determine the replacement interval. The cally formulated to protect the aluminum
replacement interval published in the If the coolant level is low, water and parts.
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze should Failure to use such anticorrosion/anti-
if MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze be used to bring it up to the proper level freeze coolant will result in a significantly
solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved (have cooling system checked for signs of shortened service life.
products of equal specification (see leakage). Please make sure the mixture is
Therefore, the following product is strongly
Factory Approved Service Products in accordance with label instructions.
recommended for use in your vehicle:
pamphlet) are used to renew the coolant
The water in the cooling system must meet Mercedes-Benz 325.0
concentration or bring it back up to the
minimum requirements, which are usually anticorrosion/antifreeze agent.
proper level.
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you Before the start of the winter season (or
To provide important corrosion protection, are not sure about the water quality, once a year in hot southern regions), you
the solution must be at least 45% consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
anticorrosion/antifreeze [equivalent to Center. concentration checked. The coolant is also
freeze protection to approx. -22°F
regularly checked each time you bring your
(-30°C)].
vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.
440
Technical data
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model Approx. freeze protection

–35°F (–37°C) –49°F (–45°C)
C 55 AMG 6.4 US qt (6.0 l) 7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
441
Technical data
Windshield washer and headlamp 왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
cleaning system* Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” mixing ratio
and water (or concentrate and com-
For temperatures above freezing point, use
Both the windshield washer and headlamp mercially available premixed wind-
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
cleaning system* are supplied from the shield washer solvent/antifreeze,
“MB SummerFit” and water:
windshield washer fluid reservoir. depending on ambient temperatures).
앫 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of
water
approx.: Warning! G
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
앫 3.2 US qt (3.0 l) in vehicles without
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma- 1 gallon [4.0 l] water)
headlamp cleaning system*
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze For temperatures below freezing point, use
앫 6.4 US qt (6.0 l) in vehicles with on hot engine parts, because it may ignite MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
headlamp cleaning system* and burn. You could be seriously burned. “MB SummerFit” and commercially avail-
able premixed windshield washer sol-
vent/antifreeze:
앫 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
1 gallon [4.0 l] solvent)
442
Technical terms
ABS BabySmartTM air bag deactivation BAS

(Antilock Brake System) system (Brake Assist System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up This system detects if a special system System for potentially reducing braking
during braking so that the vehicle can compatible child restraint seat is distances in emergency braking
continue to be steered. installed on the front passenger seat. situations. The system is activated
The system will automatically when it senses an emergency based on
Accessory weight
deactivate the passenger front air bag how fast the brake is applied.
(컄 page 331)
when such a seat is properly installed
Bead
Air pressure (the 56 indicator lamp located
(컄 page 331)
(컄 page 331) in the center console comes on and re-
Alignment bolt mains illuminated). Bi-Xenon headlamps*
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
Metal pin with thread. The centering BabySmartTM compatible child seats
pin is an aid used when changing a tire the light source and produce a more
Special restraint system for children.
to align the wheel with the wheel hub. intense light than filament headlamps.
The sensor system for the passenger
Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
Aspect ratio seat prevents deployment of the
beam and high beam.
(컄 page 331) passenger front air bag if a
BabySmartTM compatible child seat is CAC
installed. See an authorized (Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz Center for availability. Mercedes-Benz customer service
center, which can help you with any
Bar questions about your vehicle and
(컄 page 331) provide assistance in the event of a
breakdown.
443
Technical terms
CAN system COMAND* DOT

(Controller Area Network) (Cockpit Management and Data (Department of Transportation)
Data bus network serving to control System) (컄 page 332)
vehicle functions such as door locking Information and operating center for
Engine number
or windshield wiping depending on vehicle sound and communications
The number set by the manufacturer
vehicle settings and/or ambient systems, including the radio and the
and placed on the cylinder block to
conditions. navigation system, as well as other
uniquely identify each engine
optional equipment (CD changer*,
Cockpit produced.
telephone*, etc.).
All instruments, switches, buttons and
Engine oil viscosity
indicator/warning lamps in the Control system
Measurement for the inner friction
passenger compartment needed for The control system is used to call up
(viscosity) of the oil at different temper-
vehicle operation and monitoring. vehicle information and to change
atures. The higher the temperature an
component settings. Information and
Cold tire inflation pressure oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
messages appear in the multifunction
(컄 page 331) or the lower the temperature it can
display. The driver uses the buttons on
Collapsible tire tolerate without becoming viscous, the
the multifunction steering wheel to
An especially compact spare tire that better the viscosity.
navigate through the system and to
must be inflated with a provided air adjust settings. ESP®
pump before using. It should only be (Electronic Stability Program)
used to bring the vehicle to the nearest Cruise control Improves vehicle handling and
service station. Driving convenience system that directional stability.
automatically maintains the vehicle
speed set by the driver.
Curb weight
(컄 page 332)
444
Technical terms
ETD Gear range Instrument cluster

(Emergency Tensioning Device) Number of gears which are available to The displays and indicator/warning
Device which deploys in certain frontal the automatic transmission for shifting. lamps in the driver’s field of vision,
and rear collisions exceeding the The automatic gear shifting process including the tachometer, speedo-
system’s threshold to tighten the can be adapted to specific operating meter, engine temperature display and
seat belts. conditions using the gear selector fuel gauge.
->SRS lever.
Kickdown
FSS (Canada vehicles) GPS Depressing the accelerator past the
(Flexible Service System) (Global Positioning System) point of resistance shifts the transmis-
Maintenance service indicator in the Satellite-based system for relaying sion down to the lowest possible gear.
multifunction display that informs the geographic location information to and This very quickly accelerates the
driver when the next vehicle mainte- from vehicles equipped with special vehicle and should not be used for
nance service is due. FSS evaluates receivers. Employs CD digital maps for normal acceleration needs.
engine temperature, oil level, vehicle navigation.
Kilopascal (kPa)
speed, engine speed, distance driven
GVW (컄 page 332)
and the time elapsed since your last
(Gross Vehicle Weight) (컄 page 332) Locking knob
maintenance service, and calls for the
next maintenance service accordingly. GVWR Knob on the door which indicates
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) whether the door is locked or un-
GAWR (컄 page 332) locked. Pushing the locking knob down
(Gross Axle Weight Rating) on an individual door from inside will
(컄 page 332) lock that door.
445
Technical terms
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) MON Overspeed range

Maintenance service indicator in the (Motor Octane Number) Engine speeds within the red marking
multifunction display that informs the The Motor Octane Number for gasoline of the tachometer dial. Avoid this
driver when the next vehicle mainte- as determined by a standardized engine speed range, as it may result in
nance service is due. The Maintenance method. It is an indication of a serious engine damage that is not
System in your vehicle tracks distance gasoline’s ability to resist undesired covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
driven and the time elapsed since your detonation (knocking). The average of Warranty.
last maintenance service, and calls for both the MON (Motor Octane Number)
Poly-V-belt drive
the next maintenance service accord- and ->RON (Research Octane Number)
Drives engine-components (alternator,
ingly. is posted at the pump, also known as
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Maximum load rating
Power train
(컄 page 332) Multifunction display
Collective term designating all
Display field in the instrument cluster
Maximum loaded vehicle weight components used to generate and
used to present information provided
(컄 page 332) transmit motive power to the drive
by the control system.
Maximum tire inflation pressure axles, including
(컄 page 333) Multifunction steering wheel 앫 engine
Steering wheel with buttons for
Memory function operating the control system. 앫 clutch/torque converter
Used to store three individual seat,
Normal occupant weight 앫 transmission
steering wheel and mirror positions.
(컄 page 333) 앫 transfer case
앫 drive shaft
앫 differential
앫 axle shafts/axles
446
Technical terms
Production options weight RON SRS

(컄 page 333) (Research Octane Number) (Supplemental Restraint System)
The Research Octane Number for gaso- Seat belts, emergency tensioning
Program mode selector switch
line as determined by a standardized device and air bags. Though indepen-
Used to switch the automatic
method. It is an indication of a gaso- dent systems, they are closely inter-
transmission* between standard
line’s ability to resist undesired deto- faced to provide effective occupant
operation S, comfort operation C and
nation (knocking). The average of both protection.
manual operation M.
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
Tele Aid* System
PSI and RON (Research Octane Number) is
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
(Pounds per square inch) (컄 page 333) posted at the pump, also known as
Demand)
Recommended tire inflation pressure ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
The Tele Aid system consists of three
(컄 page 333) Shift lock types of response: automatic and
Restraint systems When the vehicle is parked, this lock manual emergency, roadside assis-
Seat belts, belt tensioners, air bags prevents the transmission gear tance and information. Tele Aid is
and child restraint systems. As inde- selector lever from being moved out of initially activated by completing a
pendent systems, their protective position P without SmartKey turned subscriber agreement and placing an
functions complement one another. and brake pedal depressed. acquaintance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational
Rim Sidewall
provided that the vehicle’s battery is
(컄 page 333) (컄 page 333)
charged, properly connected, not
damaged and cellular and GPS
coverage is available.
447
Technical terms
Telematics* Tire speed rating VIN

A combination of the terms “tele- (컄 page 334) (Vehicle Identification Number)
communications” and “informatics”. The number set by the manufacturer
Traction
and placed on the body to uniquely
Tightening torque (컄 page 334)
identify each vehicle produced.
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
Tread
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
(컄 page 334)
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
Treadwear indicators
TIN (컄 page 334)
(Tire Identification Number)
(컄 page 333) Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(컄 page 334)
Tire load rating
(컄 page 334) Vehicle capacity weight
(컄 page 334)
Tire ply composition and material used
(컄 page 334) Vehicle maximum load on the tire
(컄 page 334)
448
Index
A Air conditioning refrigerant 437 Air vents, Rear

ABS 25, 82, 443 Air conditioning system Automatic climate control*
Indicator lamp 350 Automatic climate control* (Canada only) 196
Messages in display 360 (Canada only) 184 Climate control 183
Accelerator position, Climate control 174 Air volume
automatic transmission 158 Air conditioning, Cooling Automatic climate control*
Accessory weight 331 Automatic climate control* (Canada only) 190
Accident (Canada only) 194 Climate control 178
In case of 53 Climate control 182 Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 406, 443
Active head restraint 71, 391 Air distribution Anticorrosion/antifreeze 440, 441
Active head restraints Automatic climate control* Anti-theft systems 88
see Head restraints (Canada only) 189 Anti-theft alarm system* 88
Additional turn signals 395 Climate control 178 Immobilizer 88
Air bags 61 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure Tow-away alarm* 90
BabySmartTM deactivation Air pump, electric Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
system 75, 443 Turning on 409 Armrest 257
Children 75 Air recirculation mode Ashtrays 260
Front passenger front air bag off Automatic climate control* Aspect ratio 331
indicator lamp 27, 75, 357 (Canada only) 191 ATF (Automatic transmission fluid) 301
Front, Driver 65 Climate control 180 AUDIO menu (Control system) 131
Front, Passenger 65 Air vents, Front
Passenger 65 Automatic climate control*
Safety guidelines 64 (Canada only) 185
Side impact (front and rear*) 66 Climate control 175
Window curtain 66
449
Index
Audio system 197 Automatic time change (Standard time, B

Audio and telephone, operation 197 Daylight Saving time) 142 BabySmartTM
Button and soft key operation 200 Automatic transmission 155 Air bag deactivation system 75, 443
CD changer* with MP3 216 Accelerator position 158 Compatible child seats 75, 443
CD operation 214 Automatic shift program 161 Self-test 76
Operating and display elements 198 Emergency operation Backrest
Operating audio system 200 (Limp-Home Mode) 168 Rear seat, folding 252
Operating safety 197 Fluid level (ATF) 301 Seat, power 36
Radio operation 205 Gear ranges 160 Backup lamps
Telephone* operation 223 Gear selector lever 155 Messages in display 374
Auto-dimming mirror* 169 Gear shifting malfunctions 168 Replacing bulbs 396
Automatic central locking Kickdown 158 Bar 331
Activating/deactivating Kickdown, manual shift program 167 BAS 84, 443
(Control system) 147 Manual shift program 165 Batteries, SmartKey
Automatic climate control* Manual shifting 162 Changing 393
(Canada only) 184 One-touch gearshifting, Checking battery condition 98
Control panel 185 Gear selector lever 162 Battery, Vehicle 303, 411
Defrosting, front 190 One-touch gearshifting, Charging 413
Rear window defroster 173 Steering wheel gearshift Disconnecting and connecting 412
Automatic headlamp mode 115 control 163 Jump starting 415
Automatic locking when driving 103 Program mode selector switch 161 Removing and installing 412
Automatic shift program Program mode selector switch, Bead 331
Program mode selector switch manual shift program 165 Bi-Xenon headlamps see headlamps
(Automatic transmission) 161 Starting engine 46 Block heater (Canada only) 337
Bolts, Spare wheel 385
Brake Assist System see BAS
450
Index
Brake fluid 437 Central locking Cockpit Management and Data System
Checking 295 Automatic 103, 147 see COMAND
Message in display 366 From inside 104 Cold tire inflation pressure 331
Brake lamps Locking/unlocking from inside 104 Collapsible tire 383, 433, 444
Cleaning lenses 344 Switch 104 Collapsible wheel chock 382
Messages in display 374 Certification label 426 COMAND* 444
Replacing bulbs 400 Charcoal filter COMAND* see separate COMAND
Brake pads Automatic climate control* operating instructions
Message in display 366 (Canada only) 193 Combination switch 49, 118
Brakes 284 Children in the vehicle 72 Control system 125, 444
Warning lamp 25, 351 Air bags 62 Multifunction display 125
Break-in period 282 Blocking rear door window Multifunction steering wheel 126
Bulbs, replacing see Replacing bulbs operation 80 Resetting to factory default 135
Indicator lamp, front passenger Control system menu 125, 444
C
air bag 75, 357 AUDIO 131
CAC 443
Infant and child restraint systems 73 Menus overview 128
California retail buyers and lessees,
LATCH-type child seat anchors 79 NAV* 134
important notice 11
Cigarette lighter 262 Settings 135
CAN system 444
Climate control system 174 Standard display 130
Cargo area see Trunk
Control panel 175 TEL* 152
Cargo tie-down rings* 255
Defrosting, Front 179 Trip computer 150
Carpets, cleaning 346
Rear window defroster 173 Vehicle status message
Catalytic converter 291
Clock 25, 125 memory 134
CD changer* 214
Setting time 140, 141
CD player* 132, 214
Cockpit 22, 444
Centigrade see Temperature display
mode 137
451
Index
Control system submenus 127, 129 D Displays

Convenience 148 Date display, setting 142, 143 Digital speedometer 130
Instrument cluster 138 Daytime running lamp mode 116 Maintenance service indicator 338
Lighting 144 Setting 144 Messages in display 370
Time/Date 140 Deep water see Standing water Multifunction display 125
Vehicle 147 Defogging windshield Outside temperature 130
Controller Area Network see CAN system Automatic climate control* Symbol messages 365
Coolant 301, 439 (Canada only) 191 Text messages 360
Anticorrosion/antifreeze Climate control 180 Vehicle status messages
quantity 440 Defrosting, Front memory 135, 358
Capacities 436 Automatic climate control* Distance to empty (range),
Checking coolant level 295, 301 (Canada only) 190 Trip computer 151
Messages in display 367–369 Climate control 179 Door control panel 30
Temperature 292 Defrosting, Rear 173 Doors
Temperature gauge 25, 123 Delayed shut-off Entry lamps 121
Cruise control 245, 444 Exterior lamps 146 Locking/unlocking, SmartKey 94
Message in display 370 Interior lighting 147 Message in display 370
Cup holder 258, 260 Department of Transportation see DOT Opening from inside/outside 96, 99
Cleaning 346 Difficulties Remote door unlock (Tele Aid*) 272
Curb weight 332 While driving 52 Unlocking, Mechanical key 386
Customer Assistance Center see CAC With starting 46 DOT 332
Digital clock see clock Downhill driving
Digital speedometer 130 Cruise control 246
Dimensions, vehicle 435 Drinking and driving 283
Direction of rotation (tires) 308
452
Index
Driving Emergency operations Engine

Abroad 290 Gear selector lever, Unlocking 388 Belt layout 427
Hydroplaning 287 Locking/unlocking the vehicle 386 Block heater (Canada only) 337
In winter 288 Power tilt/sliding sunroof*, Brake-in recommendations 282
Instructions 42, 283 Manual operation 389 Cleaning 343
Problems 52 Remote door unlock 272 Compartment 297
Safety systems 82 Trunk lid, Releasing from inside 102 Malfunction indicator lamp 25, 352
Systems 245 Trunk lid, Unlocking 387 Maximum engine speed 428
Through standing water 289 Emergency Tensioning Device see ETD Number 426
Driving safety systems Emergency, in case of Starting 46
ABS 82 Battery, Jump starting 415 Technical data 428
BAS 84 First aid kit 350, 380 Turning 56
ESP® 84 Flat tire, Changing 404 Engine coolant see coolant
Fuses 420 Engine number 444
E
Hazard warning flasher 119 Engine oil 298, 437
Easy-entry/exit feature 39, 148
Instrument cluster, Adding 300
Electrical fuses see Fuses
Indicator lamps 350–356 Additives 437
Electrical outlet 263
Roadside Assistance 12, 268 Changing 436
Electrical system, Technical data 434
Towing the vehicle 417 Checking level 299
Electronic Stability Program see ESP®
Emission control 291 Consumption 298
Emergency calls
Information label 426 Display messages 299
911 calls 235
System warranties 10 Filler neck 301
Tele Aid* calls 266, 267, 271
Messages in display 299, 371, 372
Emergency operation
Recommended engine and
(Limp-Home Mode) 168
oil filter 371
Viscosity 444
453
Index
ESP® 84, 444 Fluids Fuel 293, 438

Messages in display 361–362 Automatic transmission fluid 301, Additives 438
Warning lamp 25, 354 436 Capacities, Fuel tank 436
ETD 70, 445 Brake fluid 295, 437 Filling the tank 293
Safety guidelines 64 Capacities 436 Fuel filler flap and cap, Multifunction
Exterior lamp switch 48, 114 Engine coolant 295, 439 display messages 353, 373
Exterior rear view mirrors 40 Engine oil 298, 437 Fuel gauge 25
Parking position 170 Power steering fluid 436 Fuel reserve warning lamp 354
Windshield washer and headlamp Requirements, Octane rating 439
F
cleaning system* 304, 442 Technical data 436, 438
Fahrenheit see Temperature display
Fog lamps 117, 118 Fuel consumption statistics
mode 137
Message in display 374, 376 After start 150
Filler neck, Engine oil 301
Replacing bulbs 395, 396 Since last reset 151
First aid kit 380
Front air bags 65 Fuel filler flap 293
Flat tire 404
Front lamps see Headlamps Fuel reserve warning lamp 25
Jacking up the vehicle 405
Front passenger front air bag 65 Fuel tank
Lowering the vehicle 410
Front passenger front air bag off indicator Capacity 436
Mounting the spare wheel 404
lamp 27, 75, 357 Filler flap 293
Preparing the vehicle 404
Front seat head restraints see Head Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Spare wheel with collapsible tire 383
restraints 106 Capacities 436
Flexible Service System see FSS
FSS (Flexible Service System) (Canada
vehicles) 338, 445
454
Index
Fuses 420 Global locking/unlocking see Key Head unit

Aids for changing fuses 420 Global Positioning System see GPS Time synchronization* with 140
Fuse box (main) in passenger Glove box 256 Headlamp cleaning system* 169, 304,
compartment 421 Good visibility 169 436
Fuse box in engine compartment 421 GPS 445 Headlamp shut-off delay see Delayed
Fuse box in trunk 422 Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR shut-off, Exterior lamps
Fuse chart 420 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR Headlamps
Fuse extractor 420, 422 Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW Automatic headlamp mode 115
Replacing 420 GVW 332 Bi-Xenon* 399, 443
Spare fuses 420 GVWR 332 Cleaning lenses 344
Halogen 397
G H
High beam see High beam flasher
Garage door opener 273 Halogen headlamp see Headlamps
High beam see High beam headlamps
Gasoline also see Fuel Hands-free microphone 29
Low beam see Low beam headlamps
Gasoline see Fuel Hard plastic trim items, cleaning 346
Manual headlamp mode 115
GAWR 332 Hazard warning flasher 119
Messages in display 374, 375, 376
Gear range 445 Head restraints 106
Replacing bulbs 394
Automatic transmission 160 Active head restraint 71
Switch 48, 55
Limiting 160, 162 Front seat,
Headliner and shelf below rear window
Shifting into optimal 162 Removing and installing 106
Cleaning and care of 347
Gear selector lever 45, 155 Power seat, Adjusting 37
Heated seats 110
Cleaning 346 Rear seat, Folding back 107
High beam flasher 49, 118
Lock 45 Rear seat, Removing and
High beam headlamps 49, 118
Position indicator 156 installing 108
Indicator lamp 25
Position, Automatic Resetting activated head
Messages in display 375
transmission 125, 155, 157 restraints 391
Replacing bulbs 395, 398
Unlocking in an emergency 388
455
Index
High mounted brake lamp 396 Instrument cluster 24, 122, 445 K
Hood 297 Cleaning 346 Key, mechanical 386
Message in display 373 Illumination brightness 122 Key, SmartKey
Horn 23 Lamps 350, 356 Batteries 98
HVAC see Climate control Messages in display see Malfunction Battery check lamp 98
Hydroplaning 287 display messages Changing batteries 393
Multifunction display 125 Factory setting 96
I
Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster, Locking/unlocking 32, 96
Identification labels 426
Illumination brightness Locking/unlocking, Global setting 96
Identification number, Vehicle (VIN) 426
Instruments and controls see Cockpit Locking/unlocking, Selective
Ignition 33, 46
Interior lighting 120 setting 96
Immobilizer 88
Delayed shut-off 147 Loss of 98
Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and
Interior rear view mirror 40 Messages in display 373
warning
Auto-dimming mirrors* 169 Opening and closing the power
Infant and child restraint systems see
Interior storage spaces see Storage windows 241
Children in the vehicle
compartment Opening and closing the tilt/sliding
Inflation pressure see Tires, Inflation
sunroof* 241
pressures J
Positions in starter switch 33
Inside door handle 99 Jack 380
Remote control 94
Instrument and controls see Instrument Jacking up the vehicle 405
Starting the engine 45
cluster Jump starting 415
Turning off the engine 56
Unlocking, Trunk lid 98
Valet locking 103
Kickdown 158, 445
Kilopascal 332
456
Index
L Maintenance service indicator 338 Locking knob 445

Labels 426 Rear fog lamp 114 Loss of keys 98
Certification 426 Seat belt telltale 25 Loss of Service and Warranty Information
Emission control information 426 SRS 25, 61, 356 Booklet 425
Emission control vacuum line Turn signals 25 Low beam headlamps
routing 426 Language, Setting 138 Indicator lamp 25
Lamp sensor LATCH-type child seat anchors see Messages in display 375, 376
Message in display 375 Children in the vehicle Replacing bulbs 395, 398
Lamps, exterior 395, 396 Leather upholstery, Cleaning and Switching on 48
Light sensor 375 care of 347 Lubricants 436
Messages in display 374, 375, 376, License plate lamps Technical data 436
377 Messages in display 375 Lumbar support* 109
Lamps, indicator and warning Replacing bulbs 396
M
ABS 25, 350 Light alloy wheels
Main dimensions 435
Battery (SmartKey) 96 Cleaning 346
Main fuse box
Brakes 25, 351 Technical data 431, 432
In passenger compartment 421
Engine diagnostics 352, 356 Light sensor see Lamp sensor
Main odometer 125
Engine malfunction 25, 352–353 Lighter see Cigarette lighter
ESP® 25, 354 Lighting
Fog lamps 114 Parking lamps 114
Front passenger front air bag off 27, Lighting, Exterior and interior 114
66 Limp-Home Mode 168
Fuel reserve 25, 354 Loading see Vehicle loading
High beam headlamps 25 Loading terminology 331
Instrument cluster 350, 356 Loading the vehicle 308
Low beam headlamps 25 Locator lighting 117, 145
457
Index
Maintenance 12, 338 Mirrors Fuel cap 353, 373

Calling up service indicator Adjusting 40 Headlamps 375, 376
display 339 Auto-dimming* 169 Hood 373
Clearing service indicator Exterior rear view mirror 40 Key, SmartKey 373
message 339 Exterior rear view mirror, Lamps, exterior 374–377
FSS (Canada vehicles) 338 Parking position 113, 149, 170 Parking brake 366
Maintenance System Interior rear view mirror 40 Parking lamp 376
(U.S. vehicles) 338 MON 446 Seat belt system 378
Resetting service indicator 340 Motor Octane Number see MON SRS 363
Service indicator message 338 Multifunction display 125, 446 Steering gear oil 378
Service term exceeded 339 Changing settings see Control system Tele Aid* 379
Maintenance System menus and Control system sub- Telephone* 379
(U.S. vehicles) 338, 446 menus Tilt/sliding sunroof* 379
Manual headlamp mode see Headlamps Multifunction display messages Trunk 379
Maximum load rating, Tires 332 ABS 360 Turn signals 377
Maximum loaded vehicle weight 332 Brake fluid 366 Windshield washer fluid 379
Maximum tire inflation pressure 333 Brake lamps 374 Multifunction steering wheel 26, 126,
MB Tex upholstery, Cleaning and Brake pads 366 446
care of 347 Coolant 367, 368, 369 Button operation 126
Mechanical key 386 Cruise control 370
N
Memory function see Steering wheel Display 370
Navigation system* 134
Menus see Control system Door 370
See separate COMAND* operating
Microphone, Hands-free 29 Engine coolant 367, 368, 369
instructions
Engine oil 371, 372
Net, parcel 258
ESP® 361, 362
Neutral gear position, Automatic
Fog lamps 374, 376
transmission 155
458
Index
New vehicle break-in 282 One-touch gearshifting, Steering wheel Parking position
Night security illumination 117 gearshift control Exterior rear view mirrors 113, 149,
Setting 146 (Automatic transmission) 163 170
Normal occupant weight 333 Operating safety 197 Parts service 424
Number, vehicle identification (VIN) 426 Ornamental moldings, Cleaning 344 Passenger compartment 290
Outside temperature indicator 124 Interior lighting 120
O
Outside temperature see Displays Interior rear view mirror 40
Occupant distribution 333
Overhead control panel 29 Main fuse box in 421
Occupant safety 60
Overspeed range 446 Parcel net in front passenger
Air bags 61
footwell 258
Children and air bags 62 P
Passenger safety see Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle 72 Paintwork, Cleaning 342
Pedals 283
Fastening the seat belt 42 Panic alarm* 81
Phone* see Telephone*
Front passenger front air bag off Parcel net
Plastic and rubber parts, Cleaning and
indicator lamp 75, 357 In front passenger footwell 258
care of 346
Infant and child restraint systems 73 Parking 54, 285
Poly-V-belt drive 446
LATCH-type child seat anchors 79 Parking brake 46, 54
Layout 427
Seat belts 42, 64 Engaging 54
Positions (memory function) see Seats
Odometer 125 Message in display 366
Power assistance 283
Oil level see Engine oil level, Checking oil Releasing 46
Power outlet in rear passenger
level Parking lamps
compartment 263
Oil see Engine oil Messages in display 376
Power seat see Seats, Power 36
One-touch gearshifting, Gear selector le- Replacing bulbs 395
ver (Automatic transmission) 162
Canceling gear range limit 162
Downshifting 162
Upshifting 162
459
Index
Power tilt/sliding sunroof 242 Program mode selector switch 447 Rear seat head restraints see Head
Opening/closing in an Automatic shift program, automatic restraints
emergency 389 transmission 161 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Stopping 244 Manual shift program, automatic Rear window defroster 173
Synchronizing 244 transmission 165 Rear window sunshade* 172
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* PSI 333 Recommended tire inflation
Messages in display 379 Push starting 415 pressure 333
Opening/closing 242 Push-start see Tow-start Recovery services, Stolen vehicle
Opening/closing, SmartKey 241 (Tele Aid*) 272
R
Power train 446 Refrigerant, Air conditioning 437
Radio
Power washer 342 Refueling 293
Operation 200, 205
Power windows 238 Regular checks 294
Selecting stations (Control
Cleaning 345 Remote control, SmartKey 94
system) 131
Opening/closing 238 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid*) 272
Radio transmitters 290
Rear door window, Replacing bulbs
Range (distance to empty) 151
Blocking operation 80 Additional turn signal lamps 400
Reading lamp 120
Stopping 240 Backup lamp 401
Rear bench seat, foldable* 252
Synchronizing 240 Brake lamp 401
Rear door window
Practical hints 350 Fog lamps 401
Blocking operation 80
Premium unleaded gasoline 438 Headlamps 395, 397, 399
Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps
Problems High beam headlamps 395, 397
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
While driving 52 License plate lamps 401
Rear outer seats
With vehicle 17 Low beam headlamps 397
Adjusting head restraint height 107
Product information 9 Parking lamps 398, 400, 401
Rear passenger compartment
Production options weight 333 Rear lamps 396
Adjustable air vents 183, 196
Program mode 125 Side marker lamps 400, 401
Rear seat ashtray see Ashtray
460
Index
Standing lamps 398, 400, 401 S Selecting radio mode 205

Tail lamps 401 Safety Selector lever see gear selector lever
Turn signal lamps 398, 400, 401 Driving safety systems 82 Self-test
Reporting safety defects 18 Occupant 60 BabySmartTM air bag deactivation
Research Octane Number see RON Reporting defects 18 system 76
Reset button, In the instrument Safety belts see Seat belts Tele Aid* 266
cluster 122, 136 Satellite radio* 209 Service and Warranty Booklet
Reset tool Seat belt force limiter 70 Loss of 425
Location 391 Seat belts 67 Service and warranty information 10
Residual heat utilization 195 Children in the vehicle 72 Service intervals see Maintenance service
Residual ventilation 195 Cleaning 347 indicator 338
Restraint system Fastening 42 Service life (tires) 306
see Children in the vehicle Height adjustment 44 Service see Maintenance Service system
see Infant and child restraint systems Message in display 378 see FSS (Canada vehicles) or Mainte-
see SRS Proper use of 44, 68 nance System (U.S. vehicles) 338
Restraint system see Infant and child re- Safety guidelines 64 Service System see FSS
straint systems Telltale 25, 378 Service, Parts 424
Reverse gear position, Automatic Seat heating 110
transmission 45 Seating capacity 310
Rims 333, 429 Seats, 35, 106
Roadside Assistance 12 Heating 110
RON 447 Lumbar support* 109
Roof rack* 248 Memory function 111
Rubber parts, Cleaning 346 Power 36, 106
Run Flat Indicator* (Canada only) 318 Rear bench seat* 252
Securing cargo 255
461
Index
Settings Side marker lamps Starter switch 23, 33

Control system menus and Cleaning lenses 344 Positions 33
submenus 128, 129 Messages in display 374 Starting difficulties, Engine 46
Date 142, 143 Replacing bulbs 400 Steering column 38
Factory, SmartKey 96 Side windows see Power windows Easy entry/exit feature 39
Individual, SmartKey 96 Sidewall 333 Steering gear oil
Individual, Vehicle 135 Ski sack (Canada only) 249 Message in display 378
Lighting (control system) 144 Ski sack* (Canada only) 251, 252 Steering wheel 38
Memory function 111 SmartKey see Key, SmartKey Buttons 26
Menus and submenus 127 Snow chains 337 Cleaning 346
Resetting all (control system) 136 Sound system* 202 Electrical adjustment 38
Selective, SmartKey 96 Spare fuses 420 Stolen vehicle
Time 140, 141 Spare wheel 433 Recovery services 272
Shelf below rear window, cleaning 347 Bolts 385 Storage compartments
Shift lever position indicator 125, 156 Mounting 404 Armrest 257
Shift lock 447 Speed settings Cup holder 258
Shift program (manual) Cruise control 247 Glove box 256
Automatic transmission 165 Speedometer 25, 138 Parcel net in front passenger
Shift program mode, Automatic Split rear bench seat* 252 footwell 258
transmission 125 SRS 68, 447 Storing (memory function)
Shifting 155 Indicator lamp 25, 356 Positions into memory 112
Automatic transmission 45 Message in display 363 Storing tires 307
Into optimal gear range Standing lamps Submenus see Control system submenus
(automatic transmission) 162 Replacing bulbs 395, 396 Substitute lamps
Side impact air bags (front and rear*) 66 Standing water, Driving through 289 Bulbs 394
Summer opening feature 241
462
Index
Sun visors 171 Premium unleaded gasoline 438 Telephone* 26, 263
Sunshade* 172 Rims and tires 429 Answering/ending a call 153
Supplemental Restraint System see SRS Weights 435 Hands-free microphone 29
Symbols used in this operator’s Windshield washer 436 Message in display 379
manual 15 Windshield washer and headlamp Operation 152, 223
cleaning* system 436, 442 Phone book 153
T
Tele Aid* 264, 265, 271 Redialing 154
Tachometer 25, 124
Emergency calls 266 Temperature
Overspeed range 124
Hands-free microphone 29 Display mode 130
Tail lamps
Information 270 Interior temperature 178
Cleaning 344
Initiating an emergency call Temperature, Tires 316
Messages in display 376
manually 267 Tether attachment points, see
Replacing bulbs 396, 400
Message in display 379 Children in the vehicle
Tar stains 342
Remote door unlock 272 Tie-down rings*, Trunk 255
Technical data
Roadside Assistance 268 Tightening torque, Wheel bolts 410, 448
Air conditioning refrigerant 437
SOS button 267 Tilt/sliding sunroof see Power tilt/sliding
Brake fluid 437
Stolen Vehicle Recovery sunroof
Coolant 436, 439
services 272 Time 140
Electrical system 434
System self-check 266 TIN 333
Engine 428
Telematics* 448 Tire and Loading Information
Engine oil additives 437
Placard 309
Engine oils 437
Tire and loading Information
Fuel requirements 439
Terminology 331
Fuels 436
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc 436
Gasoline additives 438
Lubricants 436
463
Index
Tires 305, 429 Tire Identification Number see TIN Trunk

Air pressure 331 Traction 287 Closing the lid 101
Care and maintenance 306 Tread 334 Fuse box 422
Chains 337 Tread depth 307, 336 Lamp 121
Cleaning 307, 342 Treadwear indicators 334 Message in display 379
Direction of rotation 308 Vehicle maximum load on 334 Opening 98, 99, 100
Driving instructions 286 Wear pattern 335 Tie-down rings 255
Important notes, Tire inflation Winter 336 Trunk emergency release 102
pressure 316 Tools 380 Unlocking in an emergency 102
Inflation pressure 295, 315, 317 Top tether Turn signal lamps
Information Placard 309 Children in the vehicle 77 Messages in display 377
Inspection 306 Tow-away alarm* 90 Replacing bulbs 395, 396
Load rating 334 Towing eye bolt 419 Turn signals 49
Ply composition and material Towing the vehicle 417 Additional in mirrors 395
used 334 Tow-start 415, 417 Bulbs 395, 396
Problems under-/overinflation 320 Traction 161, 334 Cleaning lenses 344
Retreads 305 Transmission gear selector lever see Gear Indicator lamps 25
Rims and tires 429 selector lever Turning off engine 56
Rotating 335 Transmission see Automatic transmission
U
Run Flat Indicator* (Canada Traveling abroad 290
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
only) 318 Tread 334
Standards 334
Service life 306 Tread depth 307, 336
Units, Setting
Sizes 429 Treadwear indicators 334
Speedometer 138
Speed rating 288, 324, 334 Trip computer 150
Upholstery, Cleaning 347
Temperature 316, 330 Trip odometer 123
Useful features 256
Terminology 331
464
Index
V Vehicle loading Washing the vehicle 341

Vacuum line routing diagram label 426 Cargo tie-down rings* 255 Wear pattern (tires) 335
Valet locking 103 Instructions 254, 308 Weights, Vehicle 435
Vehicle Load limit 435 Wheel
Battery 411 Roof rack* 248 Bolts 385
Breaking-in the vehicle 282 Split rear bench seat* 252 Removing 406
Care 341 Terminology 331 Spare 383, 433
Dimensions 435 Vehicle maximum load on the tire 334 Tightening torque 410
Individual settings 135, 137 Vehicle recovery services, Stolen Wheels, Tires 305
Locking/unlocking 104 (Tele Aid*) 264 Window curtain air bags 66
Locking/unlocking in an Vehicle status message memory 134 Windows see Power windows
emergency 386, 387 Vehicle tool kit 380 Windshield
Lowering 410 Removing 380 Cleaning 345
Modifications and alterations, VIN 426, 448 Defogging 180, 191
Operating safety 16 Voice control system*, Replacing wiper blades 402
Towing 417 Hands-free microphone 29 Washer fluid 304, 442
Washing 342, 343 Washer system 442
W
Weights 435 Windshield washer fluid 442
Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and
Vehicle capacity weight 334 Message in display 379
warning
Vehicle Identification Number see VIN Mixing ratio 442
Warning sounds
Vehicle jack 381 Refilling 304
Driver or front passenger seat belt 69
Wiping with 51
Parking brake 47
Windshield washer system 442
Seat belt telltale 355
Windshield wipers 50
Warranty coverage 10, 425
Cleaning 345
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Replacing wiper blades 402
Washer reservoir level 295
465
Index
Winter driving 336

Block heater (Canada only) 337
Snow chains 337
Tires 336
Winter driving instructions 288
Winter tires 336
Wiper blades
Cleaning 345
Replacing 402
Wood trims, Cleaning 347
466
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Press time November 08, 2005
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany

2006 Mercedes-Benz C-Class Amg

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2006 Mercedes-Benz C-Class Amg

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2006 Mercedes-Benz C-Class Amg

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG

Operator’s Manual C-Class AMG

Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 21 Getting started ................................... 31

Lighting ............................................. 114

Loading .............................................. 248 At the gas station .............................. 293

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Replacing bulbs .................................. 394

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ......... 436

Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership

This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-

Proper use of the vehicle

For the USA only:

Reporting Safety Defects

(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)

Item Page Item Page Item Page

Item Page Item Page Item Page

Item Page Item Page

2 Telephone*: è for next menu

4 Hazard warning flasher 119 a Audio system, 197

6 Switch for folding back rear 108 b Climate control 174

Lower part Item Page

Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G

! 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 33).

Seat cushion tilt Head restraint tilt

Head restraint height For more information, see “Seats”

Steering wheel Steering wheel adjustment, electrical i

Easy-entry/exit feature With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,

Mirrors Interior rear view mirror

The buttons are located above the exterior ! i

Warning! G Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-

왘 With a smooth motion, pull the belt

Starting the engine Automatic transmission

Starting Starting difficulties Parking brake

Automatic transmission Switching on headlamps

High beam Turn signals 왘 Press combination switch in direction

Windshield wipers ! Intermittent wiping

Vehicles with rain sensor*: i Single wipe

For information on filling up the washer

! Problems while driving The coolant temperature is

You have now completed your first drive. Parking brake

Switching off headlamps

Turning off engine Releasing seat belts Locking

i For more information, see “Locking and

왘 Exit the vehicle and close all doors.

Warning! G To help avoid the possibility of injury, please

Front air bags

Warning! G Warning! G 앫 Seat belts can only work when used

Depending on vehicle production date, Enhanced seat belt reminder system

For information on resetting the activated

Children in the vehicle

BabySmartTM air bag deactivation

Installation of infant and child restraint

컄컄 Once the top tether anchorage hook is

Child seat anchors – LATCH-type

Blocking of rear door window operation Activating override switch

In this section you will find information on i ABS

Braking Emergency brake maneuver

For more information, see the “Practical

Switching on the ESP®

Immobilizer Anti-theft alarm system* i